JP6717550B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as “pachinko machine”) or a rotating drum type gaming machine (generally referred to as “pachi-slot machine”).

Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game area for driving a game medium such as a game ball is defined on a game board for playing a game, and a large number of obstacle nails are arranged in a predetermined gauge in the game area. In addition to being provided, a prize hole that can receive a game medium at an appropriate position in the game area (for example, a general prize hole, a variable prize hole, a start prize hole (start mouth), a prize prize hole, a big prize) Mouths, etc.) are provided, and a predetermined number of game media are paid out by accepting the game media into the winning opening. Further, this type of game board is provided with an opening formed in a substantially central portion separately from the game area, and is provided with effect display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying a predetermined effect image behind the opening. Therefore, it has been proposed to display various effect images according to the game state so as to entertain the player and prevent the user from getting tired.

In this type of gaming machine, when the game medium is accepted as the winning opening at the starting winning opening (starting opening), a predetermined lottery result is selected, and then a lottery result drawn by the effect display means over a predetermined time is suggested. By displaying the effect image that is displayed, and opening and closing the normally-winning prize winning opening, special winning opening, etc. in a predetermined pattern according to the displayed lottery result, the game medium is accepted into the big winning opening, etc. An advantageous game state (for example, a "big hit" game) in which the player has an advantage by increasing the chances of being played is generated.

Further, in this type of gaming machine, there may be a case where an effect accompanied by an operation on an operation button is performed while an effect image (for example, a plurality of decorative symbols) suggesting a lottery result is being displayed on the effect display means. It is known that a display mode of an effect image is changed by operating an operation button to give an expectation for a big hit and entertain a variety of effects (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP, 2014-087595, A

In the game machine described in Patent Document 1, if the game medium spills, there is a risk that the game ball will be sandwiched between the outer frame and the main frame.

An object of the present invention is to reduce the possibility that a game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame and the main body frame .

The gaming machine according to [Solution 1],
A gaming machine comprising an outer frame and a main body frame that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, wherein a game is played using a game ball ,
The outer frame is
A lower member that is provided at a lower portion and includes a curtain plate on which the main body frame is placed in a state where the main body frame is closed with respect to an outer frame;
A hinge member that is provided on the left side of the outer frame and that supports the main body frame in an openable and closable manner,
Has at least
On the side on which the hinge member is provided, a horizontally extending standing wall portion is provided at a position retracted rearward from the front end of the outer frame, and is formed in front of the standing wall portion to the rear surface side of the curtain plate. Equipped with a game ball discharge area for discharging balls,
The upper end of the standing wall portion is higher than the upper end of a portion of the portion of the curtain plate on which the main body frame is placed that is not present at a position where the standing wall portion is retracted rearward,
The game ball discharge area is provided at a position where the whole is retracted rearward from the front end of the outer frame,
On the side of the game ball discharge area, a flat plate portion capable of receiving a game ball when the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame is provided,
Is guidably configuration to said game ball discharge region game balls that are received in said plate along said vertical wall,
In a state in which the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame, the standing wall portion is fixedly provided in a form of rising upward from the rear surface of the lower end of the main body frame .
When the main body frame is closed, the front wall surface of the standing wall portion has a function of hindering straight movement of foreign matter inserted from the front of the hinge member,
The game ball discharge area is located at least behind the lower end rear surface of the main body frame so that the lower surface of the main body frame does not cover all of the game ball discharge area when the main body frame is closed. It is characterized by being

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame and the main body frame.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the outer frame side upper hinge member portion of the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. .. FIG. 6A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect|action of the lock member in an outer frame. 1A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 1, and FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which a main body frame is opened together with a door frame with respect to an outer frame in FIG. (A) is explanatory drawing shown in the state which provided the main body frame with respect to an outer frame with the guide blade provided in the site|part of the outer frame side lower hinge member, (b) is an outer frame in the embodiment of (a). On the other hand, it is an explanatory view showing the main body frame in a closed state, and (c) is a state in which the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame with the guide vanes of the embodiment different from (a) and (b). It is explanatory drawing, (d) is explanatory drawing shown in the state which closed the main body frame with respect to the outer frame in embodiment of (c). It is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of a door frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit of the dish unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which saw the production operation unit from the back. It is the perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the production|operation production unit for every main member, and was seen from the top. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production operation unit for every main member and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the attachment base unit of the production operation unit and was seen from above. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the attachment base unit and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the touch unit of the production operation unit and was seen from above. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the touch unit and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the button unit of the production operation unit and was seen from above. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the button unit and was seen from the bottom. It is a top view of a dish unit. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site|part of the effect operation unit in the BB cross section in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site|part of the effect operation unit in the CC cross section in FIG. (A) is a front view of the door lower right production unit of a plate unit, (b) is a right side view of the door lower right production unit. (A) is a perspective view of the lower right door effect unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the lower right door effect unit seen from the rear. It is DD sectional drawing in the door lower right production unit of FIG.43(b). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door lower right production unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the lower right door production unit and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled|disassembled the rotary body internal unit of the door lower right production unit, and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled|disassembled the rotary body internal unit and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of the lower right door rotating body of the lower right door effect unit facing forward, and (b) is a front view of the lower right door rotating body facing back. (A) is a perspective view from the front of the dish unit with the upper bowl ball removing unit attached to the dish unit base, and (b) is from the rear with the upper dish ball removing unit attached to the dish unit base. It is the perspective view seen. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the upper dish ball removal unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the upper dish ball removal unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower dish ball removal unit of a dish unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower dish ball removal unit from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the front with the lid member removed, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear with the lid member removed. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with a lid member removed. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main-body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main composition and was seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as seen from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of a ball guide unit. (A) is a perspective view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing device as seen from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the delivery apparatus and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the delivery apparatus and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of the dispensing device, and (b) is a sectional view taken along line EE in (a). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which closed the ball removal passage by the ball removal movable piece in a dispensing apparatus, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which opened the ball removal passage by the ball removal movable piece. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site|part of the delivery blade in a delivery apparatus. (A) is a perspective view of the upper full-ball path unit in the payout unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the upper full-ball path unit as seen from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full-ball path unit disassembled as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full-ball path unit disassembled as seen from the rear. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full ball path unit in a payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full ball path unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the lower tank ball path unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the lower tank ball path unit and was seen from back. (A) is an explanatory view showing a state in which a guideway opening/closing door is closed in the lower tank ball path unit, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the guideway opening/closing door is opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full ball path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the taxiway opening/closing door of a form different from FIG. 76 thru|or FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a payout unit. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main composition, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main composition, and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view seen from the front which shows only the front component member and the game panel in the game board. It is the perspective view seen from the back which shows only the front component and the game panel in the game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit of the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit of the game board from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the starting opening unit of the front unit from the front upper side, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the starting opening unit from the back lower side. (A) is a perspective view of the side unit of the front unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the side unit seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the attacker unit of the front unit seen from the front upper side, (b) is a perspective view of the attacker unit seen from the upper rear side, and (c) is a perspective view of the attacker unit seen from the lower rear side. It is a figure. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory of a front unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory of a front unit from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main composition and saw it from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main composition and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back upper movable production unit in a back unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which saw the back upper movable production unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper movable production unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper movable production unit and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper decoration body unit of the back upper movable production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed the back decoration unit of the back movable production unit and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back upper sub-decoration body in a back upper movable decoration body unit. It is a front view showing the state of the internal mechanism when the back side decorative body unit of the back side movable effect unit is in the retracted position. It is a front view showing the state of the internal mechanism when the back decoration unit of the back movable production unit is in the first appearance position. It is a front view showing the state of the internal mechanism when the back decoration unit of the back movable production unit is in the second appearance position. (A) is a front view showing a part of an internal mechanism of the back movable art production unit, (b) is a perspective view of a part of the internal mechanism different from (a) as seen from the front, and (c). [Fig. 3] is a perspective view of (b) viewed from the rear. It is explanatory drawing which shows a part of movement of the internal mechanism of a back upper movable production unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the main member which comprises the internal mechanism in a retracted position, (b) is a state which the 1st transmission member rotates from the state of (a) to a 1st to-be-transmitted member. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state in which the transmission of the rotation was started. FIG. 113C shows a state in which the first transmitted member and the first transmitted member further rotate from the state of FIG. 113B and the back decorative body unit is descending from the retracted position to the first appearance position. FIG. 9D is an explanatory diagram, in which the first transmitted member further rotates together with the first transmitted member from the state of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which reached one appearance position. 114E shows a state in which the second transmission member of the transmission mechanism that has been rotating together with the first transmission member has further rotated from the state of FIG. 114D and transmission of rotation to the second transmitted member has started. FIG. 6F is an explanatory view showing the back decorative body unit descending from the first appearance position to the second appearance position by rotating the second transmitted member and the second transmitted member from the state of (e). It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which is rotating. (G) shows a state in which the second transmitted member and the second transmitted member are rotated together with the second transmission member from the state of (f) of FIG. 115, and the back decoration unit is further descending and rotated toward the second appearance position. FIG. 6( h) is an explanatory view showing the state of (g), in which the second transmitted member further rotates together with the second transmitted member, the transmission of the rotation to the second transmitted member ends, and the back decorative body unit is It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which reached|attained to the 2nd appearance position by making a half rotation, descending from the state of the 1st appearance position. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back lower front movable production unit of a back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back lower front movable production unit of a back unit from the back. (A) is an explanatory view showing the front lower back front decorative body and the front lower back front decorative body of the front lower back movable effect unit from the front in the state of a normal retracted position, and (b) is the front lower back It is explanatory drawing which shows from the front the 1st under-back front decorative body and the 2nd under-back front decorative body of a movable production unit in the state of an appearance position. (A) is a perspective view of the back right movable effect unit of the back unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back right movable effect unit of the back unit seen from the back. (A) is a front view of a back right movable effect unit shown in a state where the first decorative surface of the back right rotation decorative body is directed to the front, and (b) is a shutter of the back right rotation decorative body opened in (a). It is a front view of the back right movable production unit shown in a state where (c) is a front view of the back right movable production unit shown in a state where the second decorative surface of the back right rotating decorative body is directed to the front. ) Is a front view of the back right movable effect unit shown with the third decorative surface of the back right rotation decorative body facing the front. (A) is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit seen from the back. (A) is a front view of the back left movable effect unit shown in the state which turned the 1st decoration surface of a back left rotation decoration body to the front, and (b) shows the 2nd decoration surface of a back left rotation decoration body to the front. It is a front view of the back left movable production unit shown in a state of facing, and (c) is a front view of the back left movable production unit shown in a state in which the third decorative surface of the back left rotating decorative body is turned to the front, FIG. 8D is a front view of the back left movable effect unit showing the state where the back left protruding decoration of the back left rotating decoration is set to the appearance position in the state of FIG. It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the FF line in FIG. 122 (a). (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back lower back movable production unit of the back unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back lower rear movable production unit of the back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the raising/lowering unit of the back lower back movable production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the raising/lowering unit of the back lower back movable production unit and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a raising/lowering unit from the front when a back lower back rotation decoration unit is in a falling end position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a raising/lowering unit from the front when a back lower back rotation decoration unit is a raising end position. (A) is a front view of the back lower back movable effect unit, (b) is a perspective view of the back lower rear movable effect unit seen from the front, and (c) is a back lower side. It is the perspective view which looked at the back underside of the back movable production unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled|disassembled the back lower back rotation decoration body unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the back lower back decoration body unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the GG line in FIG. 129 (a). (A) is a front view showing a state in which the back-bottom rear-rotating decorative body of the back-bottom rear-rotating decorative unit is stopped rotating, and (b) is a front-bottom rear-rotating decorative body in a counterclockwise direction in a front view. It is a front view which shows the state which is rotating, (c) is a front view which shows a state just before a back decoration is opened and a rotating decorative body is opened, and it rotates in the clockwise direction of a front view, (d) is a back bottom. It is a front view showing the state where the back rotation ornamental object is rotating in the direction of clockwise as seen from the front. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the drive mechanism which concerns on the back lower back rotation decoration motor in a back lower rear rotation decoration body unit, (b) is a differential mechanism which concerns on a rotation damper in a back lower back rotation decoration body unit. FIG. 6C is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a coupling mechanism that couples the drive mechanism related to the back lower rear rotation drive motor and the differential mechanism related to the rotary damper in the back lower rear rotating decorative body unit. It is an explanatory view shown. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a coupling mechanism when a back lower back rotating ornament is closed and rotation is stopped, (b) is a back lower rear rotating ornament rotating in the counterclockwise direction. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a connection mechanism at the time of doing. (A) is an explanatory view showing a state of the connecting mechanism when the rotating decorative body is closed and the rotation is stopped after the underside of the back, and (b) is a connecting ring of the drive mechanism rotating in the clockwise direction. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a connection mechanism when a lower back rotation decoration body is opening, (c) the connection ring of a drive mechanism further rotates in the clockwise direction, and a back lower back rotation decoration body is completely. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a connection mechanism at the time of opening, (d) is a connection mechanism at the time of the back lower back rotation decoration body of the open state rotating with the connection mechanism of a drive mechanism in the clockwise direction. It is explanatory drawing which shows a state. It is the perspective view which looked at the back four corner movable production unit of a back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back four corners movable production unit of a back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back four corner 1st unit in the back four corner movable production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back four corner first unit in the back four corner movable production unit, and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back four corner second unit in the back four corner movable production unit, and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back four corner second unit in a back four corner movable production unit, and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of the back four corner first unit in the back four corner movable effect unit in the state of the normal retreat position, (b) is the back four corner first in the state of the back four corner first decorative body in the appearance position It is a front view of a unit, and (c) is a front view of a back four corners first unit in the state where a back four corners second decoration object is in an appearance position. (A) is an explanatory view showing the state of the drive mechanism from the left side when the back four corner first decorative body is in the retracted position in the back four corner first unit, and (b) is the back four corner first in the back four corner first unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a drive mechanism in the middle of a decoration body going to an appearance position from a retracted position, (c) is a drive mechanism when a back four corners 1st decoration body is an appearance position in a back four corners 1st unit. It is an explanatory view showing the state of from the left side. (A) is an explanatory view showing the state of the drive mechanism from the left side when the back four corner second decorative body is in the retracted position in the back four corner first unit, and (b) is the back four corner second in the back four corner first unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a drive mechanism in the middle of a decoration body going from an evacuation position to an appearance position, (c) is a drive mechanism when the back four corners second decoration body is an appearance position in a back four corners first unit. It is an explanatory view showing the state of from the left side. It is a front view of the game board which shows the movement of the movable front decoration of the movable front unit in the center accessory. It is the front view of the game board which shows the state where the back decoration of the back movable production unit in the back unit is in the first appearance position. A state in which the back decorative body of the back movable movable production unit in the back unit is at the second appearance position, and the first front lower decorative body and the second front decorative body of the back lower movable production unit are at the appearing position. It is a front view of the game board showing. The first decoration of the back left rotating decorative body of the back left movable effect unit while the pair of shutters are opened with the first decorative surface of the back right rotating decorative body of the back right movable effect unit facing forward. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state where the back left protruding decorative body is in the appearance position with the surface facing forward. It is the front view of the game board which shows the back right rotation decoration body of the back right movable production unit and the back left rotation decoration body of the back left movable production unit in the back unit, with their respective second decorative surfaces facing forward. It is the front view of the game board which shows the back right rotation decoration body of the back right movable production unit and the back left rotation decoration body of the back left movable production unit in the back unit, with their respective third decorative surfaces facing forward. It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear lower back rotating decorative body of the rear lower rear movable effect unit in the rear unit is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in front view at the rising end position. Movable back under the back unit in the back unit Rotating the underneath back rotating decorative body of the back unit at the rising end position in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the back four corners second decorative body of the back four corner movable rendering unit is in the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board showing the state. It is a front view of the game board which shows the back four corner first decorative body of the back four corner movable effect unit in the back unit in the state of the appearance position. (A) is a flowchart showing a procedure of main processing executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment, and (b) shows interrupt processing periodically executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure concerning the special design process processing which is executed by the main control MPU of the same execution form. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the big hit judging processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a jackpot determination table used in the lottery process for the big hit, (B) is a symbol determination table used in the lottery process for the big hit. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the 1st special design stop design setting processing which is executed by the main control MPU of the same execution form. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the 1st special design fluctuation processing which is executed by the main control MPU of the same execution form. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the first special symbol stop processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about sub main processing performed by peripheral control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about 16mS steady-state processing performed by peripheral control MPU of the embodiment. It is a timing chart of battle production. It is a timing chart of battle production. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a battle production. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a battle production. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a battle production. It is the front view of the game board which cut the front component and the front unit in the center of the front and back direction inside the game territory. 174 (a) is an enlarged front view showing the right part in the game area in FIG. 174, and (b) is a cross-sectional view showing only the main part by cutting along the line H-H in (a). It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the upper special winning opening vicinity in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the hold number display on the display panel of a central liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the hold change effect using the hold number display on the display panel of a central liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example as a continuation of the suspension change production of FIG. 178. It is a figure which shows an example as a continuation of the suspension change production of FIG. 179. It is a time chart that schematically shows the pending change effect of this example, the change in the display color of the target pending image, and the display color of the target pending image whose display position is changed as the pending storage is exhausted. It is a flow chart which shows each processing which peripheral control MPU performs as related processing among the production control processing of Step S602 of Drawing 168 concerning pending storage. It is a flow chart which shows a subroutine of the number reservation command designation processing which peripheral control MPU performs. It is a continuation of the flowchart of FIG. 183. It is a flow chart which shows a subroutine of a reservation notice decision processing which peripheral control MPU performs. It is a flow chart which shows the subroutine of the reservation notice production processing which peripheral control MPU performs. It is a flow chart which shows a subroutine of a reserved image shift processing which peripheral control MPU performs. It is a figure which shows each table, storage area, and processing operation required in order that peripheral control MPU may perform each process regarding pending storage. It is one example of the figure which shows the flow of reservation announcement production. It is a scenario pattern table which shows the pattern in which the display color of a notice reservation image changes. It is a figure which shows a time chart at the time of selecting an immediate movable pattern in participation type movable accessory production. It is a figure which shows the time chart when a movable pattern is selected after 1 second in the participation type movable accessory production. It is a figure which shows a time chart when a movable pattern is selected after 2 seconds in the participation type movable accessory production. It is a figure which shows the pattern of the timing which a back movable operation unit moves. It is the figure which showed the flow of the production|generation in which a movable pattern notice is performed when a movable accessory production after 1 second is selected in a participation type movable accessory production. It is the figure which shows the time chart when succeeding in the production game. It is the figure which shows the time chart when the production game fails. It is a figure showing a pattern of timing when a back movable production unit moves for every number of rounds when a big hit is drawn. It is a figure which shows the time chart when an immediate change pattern is selected in the pending notice effect. It is a figure which shows the time chart when a change pattern after 1 second is selected in the pending notice effect. It is a figure which shows a time chart when a change pattern after 2 seconds is selected in the pending notice effect. It is a change timing table showing a change timing pattern of a notice pending image in the pending notice effect. It is a figure which shows a series of flows of the reservation notice production which compared the case where the change production after 1 second was selected, and the case where the immediate change production was selected. It is a change timing table showing a change timing pattern of a notice pending image for each number of rounds when a jackpot is drawn. It is a figure showing an example of a series of flows in notice advance production.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the back. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 9 is a front view of the pachinko machine. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled and was seen from the back.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is openably and closably supported and is also openably and closably attached to the outer frame 2, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20, which are vertically separated from each other and extend horizontally, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of 20 and extend vertically are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. In addition, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and is attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 are provided. The body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a square outer shape in a front view and having a through hole 111 penetrating in the front and back, and a game attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100. A dish unit 200 having an upper tray 201 and a lower tray 202 capable of storing balls, a top unit 350 attached to an upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to a left front portion of the door frame base unit 100. A unit 400, a right side unit 450 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100, and a game ball stored in the upper plate 201 attached to the lower right part of the front face of the door frame base unit 100 through the plate unit 200. A handle unit 500 that can be operated by a player to drive the game board 5 into the game area, and a dish unit 200 that is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and receives a game ball that has been hit into the game area. The foul cover unit 520 for discharging to the lower tray 202, the ball feeding unit 540 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 for feeding the game balls of the upper tray 201 to the ball launching device 680, and the door frame base unit 100. A glass unit 560 attached to the rear surface of the glass unit 560 to close the through hole 111 and a security cover 580 for covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 560 are provided.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is a frame-shaped main body frame base 600, a part of which can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side in front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and at the same time, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3. A body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are rotatably attached respectively, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to a left side surface of the body frame base 600 in a front view, and a body frame base 600. A ball launching device 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 mounted on the lower front surface of the game board 5, and an outer frame 2 and a main frame 4 mounted on the right side surface of the main frame base in front view. , And a locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and a reverse L that is attached to the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front and pays out the game ball to the player side. The character-shaped payout unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable on the rear side of the main body frame base 600. And a back cover 980 that covers the rear side.

The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends leftward and rightward. A ball-shaped tank 802 that stores game balls supplied from a box-shaped island facility (not shown), and a game ball inside the ball tank 802 that is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 to the left when viewed from the front. A tank rail 803 that extends to the left and right to guide, a ball guide unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 when viewed from the front, and guides the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guide unit 820. The game balls that are detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and guided by the ball guiding unit 820 are paid out one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board housed in the payout control board box 950. The payout device 830 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801, guides the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 downward, and normalizes the game balls according to the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. The upper full-ball path unit 850 to be discharged from either the discharge port or the full-tank discharge port, and the game ball discharged from the normal discharge port of the upper full-ball path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801 are forward. Guide the game ball discharged from the normal guide path and the full tank discharge port that guides to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3 from the front end to the full tank ball receiver 530 of the door frame 3 from the front end. And a lower full tank ball path unit 860 having a full tank guide path for guiding.

The board unit 900 of the body frame 4 has a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600, and a bass speaker inside the board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 in front view. The speaker unit 920, the power supply board box 930 in which the power supply board is housed in the rear side of the board unit base 910, which is mounted on the right side when viewed from the front, and the interface control inside which is installed in the rear side of the speaker unit 920. An interface control board box 940 accommodating a board, a power supply board box 930, and a payout control board box mounted across the interface control board box 940 and accommodating a payout control board for controlling the payout of game balls inside. And 950.

As shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game balls are driven, and places the game balls emitted from the ball emitting device 680 at the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 for guiding to, a flat-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a, and a game panel 1100. It has a box-shaped substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower part of the rear side and opened upward, and a main control substrate attached to the rear side of the substrate holder 1200 for controlling the game of the pachinko machine 1. A table unit (not shown) having a main control unit 1300 and a plurality of winning openings that are mounted in the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100 and that can receive game balls hit in the game area 5a. And a back unit (not shown) having a liquid crystal display device attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 above the board box 1200 and visible from the player side through the game panel 1100.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle lever 504 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper plate 201, the ball launching device 680 causes the game with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. The ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls hit in the game area 5a are accepted into a winning opening (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 by the payout device 830 according to the accepted winning holes. .. Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 15. 10 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 11 is a right side view of the outer frame. 12 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as disassembled and seen from the front. 15A is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame-side upper hinge member of the outer frame seen from the lower side with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 15B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. It is a figure. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed.

As shown in the drawing, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 that are vertically separated and extends to the left and right, and connects both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 to each other. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 extending in the direction. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. In addition, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled such that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the left and right side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 face outward in the same plane. Has been.

The outer frame 2 includes an outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end of the upper frame member 10 in a front view, and a lock member 66 attached to a lower surface of the outer frame-side upper hinge member 60. An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 is provided. The outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 allow the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 to be openably and closably attached.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 and the curtain plate member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 respectively, a flat plate-like left sliding member 81 attached to a position on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 to the left from the left and right center, and a curtain. A plate-shaped right sliding member 82 attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (eg, wood, plywood, etc.) and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. The connecting member 85 is connected. Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper hook member 90 and a lower hook member 91 which are attached to the inner side (left side surface side) of the right frame member 40 and to which an outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700 described later is locked. Is prepared.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid (solid) material having a predetermined thickness (eg, wood, plywood, etc.). The upper frame member 10 is provided with engagement notches 11 that vertically penetrate and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at the left and right ends. Inside the engagement notch 11, the upper lateral fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85 described later are attached. Further, the upper frame member 10 includes mounting step portions 12 that are recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion in front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid (solid) material having a predetermined thickness (eg, wood, plywood, etc.). The lower frame member 20 is formed such that the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses are the same as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear width is the upper frame member 10. Is formed to be longer than the width in front of and behind. The lower frame member 20 includes engagement notches 21 that vertically penetrate and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at positions closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at the left and right ends. In the engagement notch 21, the lower left side connecting member 85C and the lower right side connecting member 85D of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached.

Further, the lower frame member 20 includes front end cutouts 22 that are recessed rearward from the front surfaces of the left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end cutout 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to be the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. In the state where the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the portion between the left and right front end cutouts 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of a metal extruded shape member such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 20 and the right frame member 40 are formed in a mutually symmetrical shape in a plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward from a position that is rearward with respect to the center in the front-rear direction to a position near the rear end on the side surface that is the outer side in the left-right direction. The recesses 31 and 41 and the protrusions 32 and 42 that bulge from the side surface on the opposite side of the recesses 31 and 41 and are hollow inside. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, in the protrusions 32 and 42, the lower lateral fixing portions 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are inserted and attached.

Further, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on their surfaces. With the plurality of grooves, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed or transported in an island facility such as a game hall, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily gripped by the operator's fingers and can be held easily. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be improved.

[2-4. Curtain board member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape whose rear side is open. The curtain plate member 50 has a rearward extending portion 51 extending rearward in the shape of a flat plate near the left end in front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape having a size allowing a game ball to pass from the left end of the rearward extending portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 which is cut out and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 which penetrates vertically with a size allowing a game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension part 51, The standing wall portion 54 extending upward in a flat plate shape from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rearward extending portion 51, and the front surface bulging forward from the vicinity of the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 so that the front surface is upward. And a return portion 55 that is inclined so as to be directed rearward as it goes toward.

The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the front upper surface of the rear extending portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. A horizontal portion 71 described later is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position corresponding to a discharge hole 74, which will be described later, of the outer frame side lower hinge member 60 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 60 when assembled in the outer frame. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52 (see FIG. 18 and the like).

Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined such that the upper surface on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 is lower on the front end side. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface, and a right mounting portion for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. And a part 57. On the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the lower surface of the main body frame 3 is placed via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

As shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Although not shown in the drawings, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs in a lattice pattern to enhance strength and rigidity. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be housed inside.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 has a horizontally extending flat plate shape and a rectangular outer fixing portion 61, and a flat plate shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. Of the front extension portion 62, a bearing groove 63 extending vertically from the right end of the front extension portion 62 to the left and right center of the front extension portion 62, and penetrating vertically. A plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from the end side from the left end to the front end of the front extending portion 62 to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is open. And a flat plate-shaped hanging portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 15B and the like).

In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by a screw (not shown). There is. Further, the front extending portion 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lateral fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 with a screw in a state of being inserted from the upper side into the recess 31 of the outer side surface of the left frame member 30.

The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 to move the main body frame 4 by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63. It can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 15, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a strip-shaped lock main body 66a whose right and left sides extend in the front-rear direction with a predetermined width, and an operation portion which protrudes rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a, and diagonally forward left, and a mounting hole penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by the attachment screw 67.

The rear end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is attached to a position rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. Further, when the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with the portion of the hanging portion 65 of the portion 60 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 17 ).

Further, the tip end of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is biased by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 66d. Therefore, in the normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 17). In this state, a space for accommodating a main body frame upper hinge pin 622, which will be described later, of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a.

The lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c by operating the operation portion 66b. Then, by operating the operating portion 66b to rotate the lock body 66a in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the bearing groove 63 Can be in the state of being fully threaded. Accordingly, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands horizontally from a flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 71 and a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 which is located rearward of the center in the front-rear direction. A rising flat plate-shaped rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a size that allows only one game ball to pass through the horizontal portion 71 in the vertical direction. And a discharge hole 74 for the cage. The outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom side in a plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with its upper end narrowed at an upper portion than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to a position near the front end of the horizontal portion 71 on the left side. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to contact the center portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction and extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right. The discharge hole 74 has substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

In the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the rear extending portion 51 when the outer frame 2 is assembled. However, it is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) that penetrate the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the projecting portion 32 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 is configured such that the outer frame-side lower hinge pin 73 is inserted into a lower-body-frame-side lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame-side lower hinge member 640 of the body frame 4 so that the outer frame-side lower hinge pin 73 is moved upward. The main body frame 4 can be mounted so as to be openable and closable in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

Further, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, a game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the distance between and is gradually narrowed, rolling is performed to the rear side with a wide interval, and the balls can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. By ejecting the game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from rolling rearward of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay in the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connection member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A connecting the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B connecting the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There are a lower left connecting member 85C connecting the 20 and the left frame member 30 and a lower right connecting member 85D connecting the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

The connecting member 85 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 86, a plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. The plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends downward from the same side as the portion of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending in 86. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, in the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are provided spaced apart in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 while being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engaging cutout portion 11 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10. Further, the front lower lateral fixing portions 88 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 projecting portions 32, 42. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 projecting portions 32, 42 and is screwed from the outer side surface. It is fixed to the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40.

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 projects rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends below the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. Further, the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 protruding from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper lateral fixing portion 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed to the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 on the front side of the projecting portions 32, 42. Further, the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right fixing member 88 of the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engaging notches 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surface of the lower frame member 20 in the left-right direction. ..

[2-9. Outer frame side upper hinge member lock mechanism]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, FIGS. It will be described with reference to FIG. 16A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state where the main frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the upper hinge member. FIG. 17 is an explanatory view showing the action of the lock member in the outer frame.

In the state where the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c contacts the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock main body 66a closes a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a V shape, and the tip portion of the lock main body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space into which the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted is formed in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63.

In the support mechanism of the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in the present embodiment, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, and the front end of the lock main body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66a is close to the right side hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right side hanging portion 65, and they are in contact with each other. In a normal shaft support state, the center of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest portion of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock main body 63 are diagonally displaced and face each other. It is in a state.

In this normal axial support state, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 that supports the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63. Little load is applied from 622 to the front end face of the lock member 66a. That is, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not loaded. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 can be smoothly rotated when the operation portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. There is. Further, in the figure, the arc center of the front end face of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is removed along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in the V shape and comes into contact with the arcuate front end surface of the lock main body 66a, the acting force is exerted. F is a component force F1 (the normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the contact portion between the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the arcuate front end surface, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the bearing groove 63. When the force is divided into a component force F2 acting on the abutting portion with the inner surface of one side, the direction of the component force F1 is directed to the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (rotation center of the lock member 66). The moment that causes the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 to rotate away from the right hanging portion 65 does not work, and the main body frame hinge pin 622 causes the front end portion of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and one of the bearing grooves 63 to move. The state of being sandwiched between the inner surface and the inner side surface is retained.

Therefore, even when the lock member 66 is in the normal axial support state or the action force of the main body frame hinge pin 622 is applied, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not always loaded, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation of the elastic portion 66c caused by creep and prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main frame from coming off the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied and the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a comes into contact with the drooping portion 65 and further Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the front extension portion 62.

Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not arcuate, the lock member 66 is positioned such that the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 or the front end portion of the lock member 66 is directed toward the outside of the front protrusion 62. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotation moment for rotation is generated, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 at all times, and the lock is performed. Even if the member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only abuts on the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the front extending portion 62.

When the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. Insert the hinge pin 622. When the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the body frame upper hinge pin 622 comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock body 66a is resisted against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock body 66a that closed the bearing groove 63 retracts to open the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

Then, when the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock body 66a is biased by the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the main body frame hinge pin 622 is in a state of being housed in the space in the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the front end of the lock main body 66 a, and the main body frame hinge pin 622 is rotatable at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. It will be held (locked).

When removing the main body frame hinge pin 622 from the inside of the bearing groove 63, the operating portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left, and the elastic portion. The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c. As a result, the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Crime prevention mechanism and ball bite prevention mechanism at the lower hinge member on the outer frame side]
Prevention of ball biting for preventing a game ball from being caught between the crime prevention mechanism in the outer frame 2 lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The mechanism will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. 18A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 1, and FIG. 18B is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the main body frame is opened together with the door frame with respect to the outer frame in FIG. FIG. 19A is an explanatory view showing a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame by providing a guide vane at a portion of the outer frame-side lower hinge member, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing shown in the state which closed the main body frame with respect to a frame, (c) is the state which opened the main body frame with respect to the outer frame with the guide blade of embodiment different from (a) and (b). FIG. 4D is an explanatory view shown in FIG. 4D in a state where the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame in the embodiment of FIG.

In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 in front view. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 is attached in a state of being mounted on the vicinity of the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the unauthorized tool comes into contact with the standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the unauthorized tool can be prevented from being inserted further rearward. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed via the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

Further, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with the barb portion 55 extending forward, when the illegal tool contacting the standing wall portion 54 is bent upward, the barb portion 55 causes the tip of the illegal tool to be bent. Since it can be folded back further forward, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably prevented.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. When the game ball falls on the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 (horizontal part 71) in the state of being present, the game ball on the horizontal part 71 is discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal part 71 due to the presence of the standing wall part 54. Since it is not carried out, there is a possibility that it may be sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the horizontal hole 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rearward extending portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 have a discharge hole 74 through which a game ball can pass and a right discharge hole 52. , And the left discharge hole 53, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 and the like, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 It is possible to reduce that the game ball is sandwiched between.

Therefore, by sandwiching the game ball between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, and the main body frame 4 does not close in a normal state and the outer frame 2 It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the main body frame 4 and an illegal act using the gap.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the above-described configuration, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls dropped on the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 are discharged from the discharge holes 74 and the like. To facilitate this, as shown in FIG. 19, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 may be provided with guide vanes 95 and 96 for guiding the game balls to the discharge holes 74 and the like.

More specifically, the guide blade 95 shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B has a tip protruding outward from the main body frame 4, and a base end side below the rear end of the left side surface of the main body frame 4. It is attached rotatably around an axis extending vertically on the side, and is formed in a rod shape. The guide blade 95 is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to rotate counterclockwise in a plan view. Then, as shown in FIG. 19( a ), the guide vanes 95 are slightly rearward with respect to the left side surface of the main body frame 4 at the tip end thereof in a state where the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. The turning end in the counterclockwise direction is regulated so that it is in the state of protruding to the right. Therefore, from this state, the guide blade 95 can rotate so that the tip end side moves backward by resisting the biasing force of the spring.

When the main body frame 4 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 in a direction in which the main body frame 4 is closed, the tips of the guide blades 95 contact the right side surface of the rising portion 72 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. The guide vanes 95 rotate in a direction in which the tip moves rearward (clockwise in plan view) around the base end side against the biasing force of a spring (not shown). Then, when the main body frame 4 is further rotated in the closing direction, the guide blades 95 are further rotated to a state in which they are projected rearward from the main body frame 4, and the guide blades 95 do not interfere with the outer frame 2. The main body frame 4 can be closed (see FIG. 19B).

When closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, if a game ball falls on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 70, the guide vanes 95 project obliquely left rearward from the rear end of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be moved to the right side by the left side surface of the main body frame 4 and the guide blades 95, and the game ball is moved to the rear side of the main body frame 4. It is possible to suppress rolling and to guide the game ball to the right side so that it can be guided to the discharge hole 74, and the game ball can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

When the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the guide vanes 95 are rotated counterclockwise in plan view to the state of FIG. 19A by the urging force of a spring (not shown). .. Therefore, the guide blade 95 of the present embodiment is rotated (movable) in accordance with the opening/closing operation of the main body frame 4.

On the other hand, the guide vanes 96 shown in FIGS. 19C and 19D have both ends attached to the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 as shown in the drawing, and the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. The fan-shaped bellows-like bellows-shaped bellows are expanded in a fan-like shape while being inclined rearward so as to be lowered, and are folded when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. The guide blade 96 is movable along with the opening/closing operation of the main body frame 4, similarly to the guide blade 95 described above.

This guide vane 96 is expanded between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the game ball falls onto the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 while the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. By the guide vanes 96 that are present, the game balls that have fallen can be rolled and guided to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and from the discharge hole 74 and the right discharge hole 53 that are open on the rear side of the main body frame 4. The game ball can be discharged downward. Therefore, even with this guide blade 96, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

According to the present embodiment, the guide blades 95, 96 can guide the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 to the discharge hole 74, so that the game ball is discharged from the discharge hole 74 without enlarging the discharge hole 74. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the strength of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 from decreasing due to the increase in the size of the hole (the discharge hole 74) that penetrates the horizontal portion 71. Therefore, even if a tool for performing an illegal act is inserted between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 has sufficient strength, and therefore, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. 70 is less likely to be distorted, and it is possible to prevent a gap from being formed at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, and prevent fraudulent acts.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 26. 20 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, and FIG. 21 is a rear view of the door frame. 22 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear.

The door frame 3 includes a door frame base unit 100 having a quadrangular outer shape in a front view, a dish unit 200 attached to a lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a top attached to an upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100. The unit 350, the left side unit 400 attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100, the right side unit 450 attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100, and the lower right front portion of the door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 500 is attached so as to penetrate the dish unit 200.

Further, the door frame 3 is mounted on the rear surface lower part of the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, the ball feeding unit 540 mounted on the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, and on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. A glass unit 560 that closes the through hole 111 and a security cover 580 that covers a lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 560 are provided.

The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 that has a vertically long rectangular shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction, A cylindrical handle attachment member 120 for attaching the handle unit 500, which is attached to the front lower right corner of the front side of the door frame base 110, and a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110. And a door frame side which is attached to both upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side in a front view and protrudes forward to be rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. An upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150, and a glass unit mounting member 160 rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 for detachably mounting the glass unit 560 are provided. There is.

The plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is vertically arranged in rows and swells forward, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are capable of storing game balls, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202. And a plate-shaped plate unit base 210 attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 attached to the plate unit base 210 on the front side of the upper plate 201 and capable of displaying an image. A production operation unit 220 having a touch panel 246 that can be operated by a player and an upper dish production button 257, a dish unit cover 260 that covers the upper dish 201 and the lower dish 202 from the front side, and a right side of the upper dish 201 when viewed from the front. A lower door right effect unit 270 that has a lower door right rotating body 270A that is arranged and rotates according to a game state, a transparent effect unit cover 300 that covers the lower right door effect unit 270 from the front side, and an upper plate Upper plate ball removing unit 310 for removing the game balls stored in 201 to the lower plate 202, lower plate ball removing unit 320 for removing the game balls stored in the lower plate 202 downward, and game hall In the island equipment, a ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine (not shown, also referred to as a CR unit) arranged adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the upper part of the dish unit base 210. A main dish top decorative member 340 capable of luminescent decoration is mainly provided.

As shown in FIG. 25, FIG. 26, etc., the top unit 350 of the door frame 3 includes a unit base 360 partially attached to the front side of the door frame base unit 100 along the upper side, and a unit base 360 having a light-transmitting property. A front decorative member 370 having a translucent property, which is mounted on the front left and right center of the 360 and bulges forward, and a top speaker which is mounted inside the top decorative member 370 and outputs a sound in a high range ( (Not shown), and a door frame upper decorative substrate 380 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 360 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the left side unit 400 of the door frame 3 includes a flat unit base 410 mounted along the left outer peripheral edge of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a unit. A translucent left side decoration member 420 attached to the front surface of the base 410 and having an upper end extending to the left end of the top decoration member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame on the front side of the left side decoration member 420. 3, a left speaker unit 430 having a left speaker (not shown) attached to the upper left corner of the unit 3, and a door frame attached to the rear side of the unit base 410 and having a plurality of LEDs attached to the front surface thereof. And a left decorative substrate 440.

As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the right side unit 450 of the door frame 3 includes a flat unit base 460 mounted along the right outer peripheral edge of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a unit. A translucent right side decoration member 470 attached to the front side of the base 460 and having an upper end extending to the right end of the top decoration member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame in front of the right side decoration member 470. 3, a right speaker unit 480 having a right speaker (not shown) attached to the position of the upper right corner of the unit 3, a unit base 460, and a right side decoration member 470. And a door frame right decoration board (not shown) to which is attached.

As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the handle unit 500 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached to the handle body 502 attached to the handle attaching member 120 of the door frame base unit 100 and the handle body 502. A handle lever 504 that can be rotated by a player, and a handle cover 506 that is attached to the handle body 502 from the front side of the handle lever 504 and that cooperates with the handle body 502 to rotatably support the handle lever 504. And are equipped with. Although not shown, the handle unit 500 is attached to the handle main body 502 and detects a rotation angle of the handle lever 504, and the handle unit 500 is attached to the handle main body 502 and can be operated by a player. A stop button and a contact detection sensor that is mounted in the handle body 502 and detects contact between the player and the handle lever 504 are provided.

The foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3, as shown in FIGS. 25, 26, 55 to 57, etc., is a shallow box-shaped unit main body that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and has the front side opened. 522 and a flat plate-shaped lid member 524 attached to the front surface of the unit main body 522 are mainly provided. The foul cover unit 520 penetrates forward and backward in the upper left corner of the front view, and a through-ball passage that connects the normal guide path of the lower full-ball path unit 860 of the body frame 4 and the upper-plate ball supply port 210a of the dish unit 200. 526, a full-tank ball receiving opening 528 that is open to the rear on the right side of the through-ball passage 526 when viewed from the front, and is capable of communicating with the full-tank ball guide path of the lower full-tank ball passage unit 860 of the main body frame 4, A foul that receives a game ball (fal ball) that has been opened upward on the right side of the ball receiving port 528 when viewed from the front and that has not been reached into the game area 5a despite being launched by the ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4. The ball receiving port 530 and the full ball receiving port 528 that opens forward in the lower right corner of the front view and the game ball received in the foul ball receiving port 530 are discharged, and the lower plate ball supplying port of the dish unit 200 is released. 210c, and a sphere discharge port 532 that communicates with 210c.

As shown in FIG. 25, FIG. 26, etc., the ball feeding unit 540 of the door frame 3 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 542, which is a box-shaped unit main body 542 that extends left and right and has the rear side opened. A unit cover 544 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the front view of the foul cover unit 520 with the front side open, and the upper plate of the dish unit 200 that opens to the front A ball entrance 546 into which a game ball stored in 201 enters, a ball discharge port 548 which is capable of discharging the game ball entering the ball entrance 546 and is open rearward, and a ball entrance The game ball which entered into 546 can be discharged, and a ball discharge port 550 which is open to the front below the ball entrance 546 is provided. Further, although not shown, the ball feed unit 540 is a ball feed solenoid for releasing the game balls entered from the ball entry port 546 one by one from the ball release port 548, and the game ball entered from the ball entry port 546. And a switching mechanism that switches between the ball discharge port 548 side and the ball discharge port 550 side.

As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the glass unit 560 of the door frame 3 is attached to the frame-shaped unit frame 562 which is larger than the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100, and both front and rear sides of the unit frame 562. A pair of glass plates 564 that closes the inside of the cage unit frame 562 are provided.

[3-1. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 27 to 42. FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the dish unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the production operation unit of the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from the rear. 32 is a perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from above, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from below. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit of the performance operation unit disassembled and viewed from above, and FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit disassembled and viewed from below.

In addition, FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit of the effect operation unit that is disassembled and viewed from above, and FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit that is disassembled and viewed from below. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit of the effect operation unit as seen from above and FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit as seen from below. FIG. 40 is a plan view of the dish unit, FIG. 41 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of a portion of the effect operation unit in the BB section in FIG. 40, and FIG. 42 is an effect operation in the CC section in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site|part of a unit.

Further, FIG. 43(a) is a front view of the lower right door rendering unit of the dish unit, FIG. 43(b) is a right side view of the lower right door rendering unit, and FIG. 44(a) is a lower right door rendering unit. It is the perspective view seen from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right production unit from the back. FIG. 45 is a DD cross-sectional view of the lower right door effect unit of FIG. 43(b). FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the lower right door effect unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the lower right door effect unit disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary body internal unit of the lower right door rendering unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary body internal unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 50(a) is a front view of the lower right door rotor of the lower right door effect unit, and FIG. 50(b) is a front view of the lower right door rotor of which is rearward.

Further, FIG. 51(a) is a perspective view seen from the front in a state where the upper dish ball removing unit of the dish unit is attached to the dish unit base, and FIG. 51(b) is the upper dish ball removing unit attached to the dish unit base. It is the perspective view seen from the back in the state. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the upper dish ball removing unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the upper dish ball removing unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 54A is a perspective view of the lower dish ball punching unit of the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 54B is an exploded perspective view of the lower dish ball punching unit as disassembled and seen from the front.

The dish unit 200 bulges forward from the door frame base unit 100. This dish unit 200 is an upper plate 201 which stores game balls for paying out from the payout device 830 and is driven into the game area 5a, and a game which is arranged below the upper plate 201 and is supplied from the upper plate 201. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing balls. Further, the dish unit 200 is attached to the plate-shaped dish unit base 210 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and is attached to the upper front part of the dish unit base 210, and the left side from the center in the left and right bulges forward to a large extent. And a lower plate body 214 that is attached to the center of the left and right at the lower front of the plate unit base 210 and that bulges significantly forward to form the lower plate 202. ..

Further, the dish unit 200 covers the effect operation unit 220 attached to the front side of the upper dish body 212 and the front surface of the dish unit base 210, the upper dish body 212, the lower dish body 214, and the front and lower sides of the effect operation unit. Dish unit cover 260 attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210, a lower right door production unit 270 arranged on the right side of the production operation unit 220 and attached to the front right part of the dish unit base 210, and a lower right door production unit of the door Performance unit cover 300 that covers the front side of 270 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210, and game balls that are attached so as to sandwich the dish unit base 210 from the front and back and are stored in the upper dish 201 of the upper dish body 212. Upper plate ball removing unit 310 for extracting the lower plate 202, and lower plate ball removing unit for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 202 downward, which are attached to the lower side of the lower plate body 214. And 320.

Further, the dish unit 200 is attached to the upper surface of the production operation unit 220, and a ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine that is arranged adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall, and a plate. The upper plate top decoration member 340, which is attached to the upper part of the unit base 210 and is capable of light emission decoration, and the rear side of the plate unit cover 260, which is attached to the left side of the front face of the plate unit base 210, can emit light forward. The plate unit left decorative substrate 345 including a plurality of LEDs and the rear of the effect unit cover 300 and the lower right of the door lower right effect unit 270 are mounted on the right side of the front surface of the plate unit base 210 and face forward. A dish unit right decorative substrate 346 provided with a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light, and a plate front decorative substrate 233, a plate upper decorative substrate 235, and a plate which are mounted on the rear side of the plate unit base 210 and will be described later. Of the liquid crystal substrate 241, the vibration device 242, the touch panel 246, the effect button decoration substrate 251, the effect button pressing sensor 258, the door lower right relay board 281, the plate unit left decorative board 345, and the plate unit right decorative board 346 and the game board 5. And a dish unit relay board 347 for relaying connection with a peripheral control board (not shown).

[3-1a. Plate unit base]
As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the dish unit base 210 of the dish unit 200 extends to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit base 210 penetrates forward and backward in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front and also has an upper dish ball supply port 210a that extends cylindrically rearward, and penetrates forward and backward under the upper dish ball supply port 210a. And a speaker slit 210b formed of a plurality of elongated holes extending up and down, a lower dish ball supply port 210c penetrating forward and backward in the lower center of the left and right center in a front view, and extending rearward in a tubular shape, and a lower dish. An upper plate ball feed port 210d is provided, which penetrates in the front-rear direction on the upper right side in a front view of the ball supply port 210c, extends vertically, and has an upper portion located at the right end of the upper plate body 212.

Further, the dish unit base 210 has a through hole 210e having a quadrangular inner circumference that penetrates forward and backward on the left side of the upper dish ball sending port 210d in a front view, and a receiving part that projects forward from the lower side of the through hole 210e in a plate shape. The piece 210f, the escape port 210g that penetrates the upper dish ball feed port 210d forward and backward on the upper right side in front view, and the handle mounting member 120 of the door frame base unit 100 that penetrates forward and backward on the lower right corner in front view. Handle insertion opening 210h, a cylinder insertion opening 210i that penetrates the front and rear in the vicinity of the right corner when viewed from the front and through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and the right side of the cylindrical lower dish ball supply opening 210c when viewed from the front. And a cutout portion 210j that is cut out from the rear end toward the front on the side surface of the.

[3-1b. Upper plate body]
As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the upper plate main body 212 of the plate unit 200 is formed in a container shape in which the left side of the center of the left and right when viewed from the front largely bulges forward and is opened upward and backward. ing. The upper plate main body 212 is provided with a guide passage portion 212a which is open only to the left and the rear on the right end side in front view and through which game balls can flow. The upper plate body 212 is inclined such that the bottom surface is generally lower at the right end. More specifically, with the upper plate body 212 attached to the plate unit base 210, the bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is from the lower position of the upper plate ball supply port 210a to the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 210d. It is inclined so as to be slightly lower than the outer diameter of the. As a result, the game ball emitted forward from the upper plate ball supply port 210a can be received and stored in the upper plate body 212, and the received game ball can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 212a. It can be supplied to the delivery port 210d.

Further, the upper plate body 212 is provided with a metal ground metal fitting 212b extending from the left and right center to the vicinity of the right end on the rear end side of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the earth metal fitting 212b is electrically grounded (earthed), and by contacting the game ball, static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

[3-1c. Lower plate body]
As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the lower plate body 214 of the plate unit 200 has a trapezoidal plan view in which the rear end side is longer than the front end side, and is formed in a container shape in which the upper side and the rear side are open. The lower dish main body 214 has a ball-draining hole 214a that penetrates the bottom face vertically and can be closed by the lower-plate ball-draining unit 320. doing. The lower plate main body 214 can receive and store the game balls discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 210c of the plate unit base 210, and can also store the game balls below the plate unit 200 from the ball removing hole 214a. Can be discharged.

[3-1d. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the production operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the attachment base unit 220A and the attachment base unit 220A attached to the dish unit base 210 and the upper dish body 212 at the center of the left and right in a front view. A touch unit 220B, a button unit 220C attached to the attachment base unit 220A on the left side of the touch unit 220B when viewed from the front, and a plurality of cylindrical dampers 222 interposed between the touch unit 220B and the attachment base unit 220A. A unit cover 224 attached to the attachment base unit 220A so as to cover the outer peripheries of the touch unit 220B and the button unit 220C from above, and a decorative member 226 attached to the front end right end of the attachment base unit 220A.

The damper 222 of the effect operation unit 220 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and a groove 222a is formed over the entire circumference at the axial center of the outer peripheral surface. The damper 222 in this embodiment is made of synthetic rubber. The plurality of dampers 222 can alleviate the impact when the touch unit 220B is struck and reduce the load (impact) acting on the mounting base unit 220 or the dish unit base 210 side, and the touch unit 220B will be described later. It is possible to reduce the transmission of the vibration caused by the vibrating device 242 to the mounting base unit 220 or the dish unit base 210 side.

[3-1d-1. Mounting base unit]
As shown in FIGS. 32 to 35, the mounting base unit 220A of the performance operation unit 220 is a shallow box-shaped mounting base 230 that is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and has an open top. A shallow box-shaped unit case 231 that is attached and has a rear end attached to the front end of the upper plate body 212 and is capable of accommodating the touch unit 200B from above, and a horizontally long upper plate attached to the front end of the unit case 231. A front lens member 232, a front plate front decorative substrate 233 arranged between the front plate lens member 232 and the unit case 231, and provided with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and a unit cover that covers the front side of the front plate lens member 232. And a translucent upper plate front decoration member 234 attached to 224.

Further, the mounting base unit 220A is mounted on the rear end of the unit case 231, and has an upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 having a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward, and an upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 upper side. Is placed on the unit cover 224 and is attached to the unit cover 224. The rear plate decorative member 236 having a light transmitting property is sandwiched between the unit cover 224 and the unit case 231 on the front side of the rear plate decorative member 236. Linear light emitting lens member 237 capable of guiding the light of the above to emit light linearly, a cylindrical button mounting member 238 mounted on the unit cover 224 on the right side of the upper plate rear decoration member 236 in front view, and a button mounting member. And an upper dish ball removal button 239 that is slidably attached up and down by the 238.

The mounting base 230 has a flat plate-shaped mounting side receiving portion 230a that is inclined from the center in the front and rear to the front side so as to become lower toward the front, and the mounting base 230 penetrates through the mounting side receiving portion 230a and is separated left and right. It is provided with one through-hole 230b and a tubular receiving portion 230c that extends downward from the peripheral edge of the through-hole 230b. The through hole 230b has a quadrangular inner circumference. The tubular receiving portion 230c is formed in a pyramidal tubular shape so as to narrow as it goes downward (see FIG. 42). More specifically, in the tubular receiving portion 230c, the inner peripheral wall on the front side extends substantially perpendicularly to the surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a, and the inner peripheral wall on the rear side is located below the surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a. As it goes to, it extends so as to go forward. Further, the cylindrical receiving portion 230c extends so that the inner peripheral walls on both the left and right sides are inclined such that the lower ends (tips) thereof are slightly closer to each other with respect to the vertical of the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a.

The unit case 231 is opened upward and accommodates the touch unit 220B. The unit case 231 is spaced forward and backward from the left and right ends of the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a in a front view. A horizontal support pin 231b, a pair of front support pins 231c that are laterally spaced apart from the vicinity of the front end of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, and project upward in a cylindrical shape; It has a central support protrusion 231d protruding upward, and two receiving protrusions 231e protruding in a pyramid shape so as to be narrowed from the lower side of the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a toward the lower side and separated left and right. ..

In addition, the unit case 231 is arranged around the insertion hole 231f through which the lower part of the button unit 220C is inserted, and the insertion hole 231f on the upper surface, which penetrates vertically in a circular shape on the left side of the accommodation recess 231a in a front view. A button unit mounting portion 231g for mounting the button unit 220C, and a linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 that extends leftward and rightward on the rear outer peripheral wall of the housing recess 231a and is recessed downward from the upper end are arranged. And a notch portion 231h.

The accommodation recess 231a of the unit case 231 has a shape in plan view that is a combination of a quadrangle that extends left and right and a trapezoid that protrudes outward from both the left and right sides of the quadrangle. In addition, in the accommodation recess 231a, the bottom surfaces of the quadrangular portions are formed lower than the bottom surfaces of the trapezoidal portions on the left and right sides. The step on the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a is formed to be slightly lower than the height (the axial length) of the damper 222.

The four lateral support pins 231b project upward from the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion of the accommodation recess 231a, and are formed so as to be insertable into the cylindrical damper 222. Further, the lateral support pin 231b is provided with a truncated cone-shaped taper portion 231i on the upper end side, the diameter of which becomes smaller toward the upper end side (see FIG. 41). The lateral support pin 231b has the same distance from the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a to the middle of the tapered portion 231i as the length of the damper 222, and is formed longer than the damper 222 as a whole. The pair of front support pins 231c can be inserted into the cylindrical damper 222, and are formed to be slightly longer than half the length of the damper 222.

The upper end of the central support protrusion 231d projects to the same height as the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion of the accommodation recess 231a. The receiving projection 231e is formed in a truncated cone shape having a quadrangular outer periphery. The two receiving projections 231e are formed at positions corresponding to the two through holes 230b of the mounting base 230. In the receiving projection 231e, the outer peripheral wall on the front side extends substantially perpendicularly to the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, and the outer peripheral wall on the rear side inclines toward the front as it goes downward with respect to the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a. And has been extended. Further, the receiving projection 231e extends so that the outer peripheral walls on the left and right sides are inclined so that their lower ends (tips) are slightly closer to each other with respect to the vertical of the surface of the housing recess 231a. The shape of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e corresponds to the shape of the inner peripheral wall of the tubular receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230. In the assembled state, the receiving protrusion 231e has a lower end inserted into the through hole 230a of the mounting base 231, and a slight gap is formed between the receiving protrusion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c.

The front surface of the upper plate front decoration member 234 is exposed to the outside when the plate unit 200 is assembled. The upper plate post-decoration substrate 235 includes a plurality of decorative LEDs 235a for making the post-upper plate decorating member 236 emit light and a plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b for making the linear light emitting lens member 237 emit light. ..

The linear light-emitting lens member 237 is formed to be longer on the left and right than the upper plate post-decoration member 236, and is arranged above the plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b of the post-upper plate decorative substrate 235, and a light-receiving unit 237a. And a linear light emitting portion 237b in the shape of a flat plate which is continuous with and is fitted into the cutout portion 231h of the unit case 231. In the linear light emitting lens member 237, the linear light emitting portion 237b is fitted into the cutout portion 231h of the unit case 231, so that the front surface of the linear light emitting portion 237a forms a part of the inner peripheral wall of the housing recess 231a. Further, in the linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b is exposed to the outside in a state where the dish unit 200 is assembled. The linear light emitting lens member 237 can receive the light from the peripheral LED 235b by the light receiving portion 237a, and guides the light received by the light receiving portion 237a to the linear light emitting portion 237b to guide the light from the linear light emitting portion 237b. The entire upper end can be illuminated (linearly).

The upper bowl ball removal button 239 is provided with a button attachment member 238 so as to be slidable up and down, and includes an extension piece 239a extending below the button attachment member 238. By pressing the upper plate ball removing button 239 downward, the upper plate ball removing unit 310 is operated to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 from the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202 (pull out. )be able to.

The mounting base unit 220A can elastically support the touch unit 220B by the dampers 222 inserted into the four lateral support pins 231b and the two front support pins 231c, respectively. In addition, the outer peripheral surfaces of the two receiving protrusions 231e protruding downward of the unit case 231 to which the touch unit 220B is attached, and the mounting base 230 into which the lower end of the receiving protrusion 231e is inserted below the unit case 231. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion. Accordingly, when a force (impact) that moves the unit case 231 downward from the touch unit 220B side is applied, the force is not immediately transmitted to the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230, and the unit case 231 is stored. The bottom surface of the recess 231a is bent downward to some extent and the outer peripheral surface at the lower end of the receiving projection 231e contacts the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c, whereby the force is transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. That is, when the force is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, the unit case 231 bends, so that the force can be attenuated to some extent by the bending and transmitted to the mounting base 230.

Further, the receiving projection 231e of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230 have an outer peripheral surface and an inner peripheral surface that are inclined with respect to the surface on which they are formed (the surface parallel to the upper surface of the touch unit 220B). Since the surface is provided, part of the force transmitted from the receiving projection 231e to the tubular receiving portion 230c acts in the direction along the bottom surface of the attachment-side receiving portion 230a provided with the tubular receiving portion 230c. To do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the force from the projecting portion 231e (unit case 231) side from being dispersed, and to prevent a large force from acting on the mounting base 230 in one direction, and the mounting base 230 is less likely to be damaged. ..

[3-1d-2. Touch unit]
As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the touch unit 220B of the effect operation unit 220 includes a shallow box-shaped lower case 240 having an open upper side, an upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 mounted in the lower case 240 from the upper side, Inside the lower case 240, a pair of vibrating devices 242 disposed on the left and right sides of the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and a pair of vibrating devices 242 and the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 are covered and attached to the lower case 240. Of the shallow box-shaped base member 243, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 that is inserted into the base member 243 from the upper side and is capable of displaying an image controlled by the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241. A frame-shaped ground metal fitting 245 that covers the outer circumference, a transparent touch panel 246 that covers the ground metal fitting 245 and the upper surface of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and a lower case that covers the outer circumference of the touch panel 246 from above and through the base member 243. And a frame-shaped upper cover 247 attached to 240.

In addition, the touch unit 220B extends vertically from the lower end of the lower case 240 to the upper end of the upper cover 247 at the rear end surface of the lower case 240, the base member 243, and the upper cover 247 in an assembled state. A waterproof sheet-like waterproof seal 248, which extends over the entire left and right sides of the rear end surface of the case 240 and the like and is attached to the rear end surface of the lower case 240, the base member 243 and the upper cover 247, is provided. ing.

The outer shape of the lower case 240 corresponds to the inner shape of the housing recess 213a of the unit case 231, and is formed so as to be housed in the housing recess 213a. The lower case 240 has a rectangular board mounting portion 240a extending in the left-right direction, a flat plate-shaped projecting portion 240b projecting in a trapezoidal shape from each of the left and right sides of the board mounting portion 240a, and each projecting portion 240b having an outer diameter of the damper 222. And a pair of damper mounting recesses 240c that are vertically penetrated in the same inner shape and partially open to the outside in the left-right direction and are spaced apart in the front-rear direction, and project from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c. And a vibrating device mounting part 240e to which the vibrating device 242 is mounted, which is disposed near the board mounting part 240a between the pair of damper mounting recesses 240c in the projecting part 240b.

The damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 is formed in a C shape in a plan view, and the damper 222 can be inserted from the side where the C shape is open. Further, the flange portion 240d is provided substantially at the upper and lower centers of the damper mounting recess 240c and over the entire circumference of the C-shaped inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c. The flange portion 240d can be inserted into the groove 222a of the damper 222.

The vibration device 242 includes a small vibration drive motor 242a and a weight 242b attached to the rotation shaft of the vibration drive motor 242a with its center of gravity eccentric. The vibrating device 242 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 242b by the vibration driving motor 242a.

The base member 243 has a liquid crystal mounting recess 243a formed in a shallow box shape in which the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is inserted from the upper side, and extending parts 243b extending outward from both left and right sides of the liquid crystal mounting recess 243a. A screw hole 243c is formed at the lower end of the screw hole 243c, the screw hole 243c having a large diameter on the upper side and vertically penetrating at a position corresponding to the damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 at the tip of the extending portion 243b. And a tapered chamfered taper portion 243d (see FIG. 41) whose diameter increases toward the lower end of the cage.

The inner diameter of the lower side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 can pass through the tip end side of the taper portion 231i of the lateral support pin 231b in the unit case 231, and the base end side (lower side) of the taper portion 231i. It is formed in a size that cannot pass through.

The touch panel 246 includes a tempered glass that is resistant to shock and is hard to break, a transparent capacitive sensor sheet provided on the upper surface of the tempered glass, and a frame-shaped protective cover that covers the tempered glass and the outer periphery of the sensor sheet. ing.

In the touch unit 220B, the damper 222 can be attached by inserting the damper 222 from the C-shaped open side into the damper attachment recesses 240c provided in pairs on the left and right sides of the lower case 240. At this time, the flange portion 240d protruding from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c is inserted into the groove 222a of the damper 222. As a result, the damper 222 in the damper mounting recess 240c is restricted from moving in the axial direction. When the damper 222 is mounted in the damper mounting recess 240c, the upper end of the damper 222 contacts the lower surface of the extending portion 243b of the base member 243, and the lower end of the damper 222 moves downward from the lower end (lower surface) of the lower case 240. Project.

Further, in the touch unit 220B, the vibration drive motors 242a of the pair of vibration devices 242 are sandwiched between the lower case 240 and the base member 243. The pair of vibrating devices 242 can independently generate vibration.

In addition, the touch unit 220B can view the image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 through the touch panel 246 from above. Then, an image such as a button is displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the player can operate the button of the image by touching the touch panel 246 like operating the button of the image.

Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B has a water-proof seal 248 attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side, when a liquid such as a drink is spilled on the dish unit 200, the liquid does not enter the touch unit 220B. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the touch unit 220B from being damaged by the infiltration of liquid.

[3-1d-3. Button unit]
As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the button unit 220C of the effect operation unit 220 includes a cylindrical unit body 250 attached to the button unit attachment portion 231g of the unit case 231 of the attachment base unit 220A, and a lower portion of the unit body 250. It is provided with a production button decoration substrate 251 arranged on the side and provided with LEDs on the upper surface, and a substrate cover 252 which covers the lower side of the production button decoration substrate 251 and is attached to the lower side of the unit main body 250.

In addition, the button unit 220C is arranged between the button base 253 and the unit body 250, and has a cylindrical button base 253 that is slidably inserted from the upper side into the unit body 250. A biasing spring member 254, a light guide member 255 that is inserted into the button base 253 and that can guide light from the LED of the effect button decoration substrate 251 upward, and a plurality of minute lights arranged above the light guide member 255. Sheet-shaped diffusing lens member 256 provided with a prism, a translucent upper plate effect button 257 that covers the upper side of the diffusing lens member 256 and is attached to the button base 253, and an upper surface of the effect button decoration substrate 251. And a production button pressing sensor 258 for detecting the movement of the button base 253 to the lower end.

The unit main body 250 includes three attachment pieces 250a extending outward from the lower end of the outer peripheral surface and attached to the button unit attachment portion 231g, and a flange-shaped shelf 250b extending inward from the lower end of the inner peripheral surface. , A pair of through holes 250c penetrating the shelf 250b along the inner peripheral surface.

The button base 253 includes a tubular lower tubular portion 253a inserted into the inner circumference of the shelf portion 250b, a conical tubular upper tubular portion 253b whose diameter increases from the upper end of the lower tubular portion 253a upward, A claw that extends downward from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 253b and has a lower end that can penetrate the through hole 250c of the unit body 250 and that projects outward from the lower end and that can engage (contact) with the lower surface of the unit body 250. And a pair of engaging claw portions 253c, which are radially outwardly shorter than the outer diameter of the upper end from the outer peripheral surface of the upper cylindrical portion 253b, and the lower end of which can abut the upper surface of the shelf portion 250b of the unit main body 250. A plurality of flat plate-shaped contact pieces 253d and a detection piece 253e that extends outward from the outer peripheral surfaces of the lower cylinder portion 253a and the upper cylinder portion 253b in a flat plate shape and is detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258 are provided. ing.

The spring member 254 is a coil spring as illustrated. The lower end of the spring member 254 is in contact with the upper surface of the shelf 250b of the unit body 250, and the upper end is supported by the plurality of contact pieces 253d of the button base 253.

The light guide member 255 extends from the lower surface of the main body portion 255a to the lower end of the lower tubular portion 253a of the button base 253, and a disk-shaped main body portion 255a fitted in the upper portion of the upper tubular portion 253b of the button base 253. And a plurality of cylindrical light guide portions 255b. The plurality of light guides 255b are provided so as to correspond to the LEDs of the effect button decoration substrate 251, and light from the LEDs can be guided and emitted from the entire upper surface of the main body 255a.

In this button unit 220C, a button base 253, a light guide member 255, a diffusion lens member 256, and an upper plate effect button body are integrally assembled, and they can slide up and down in the unit body 250 together. it can. In these button bases 253 and the like, the upper surface of the upper plate effect button 257 projects above the upper end of the unit main body 250 by the biasing force of the spring member 254, and the pair of engaging claw portions 253c of the button base 253 has the unit main body. By engaging with the lower surface of 250, further upward movement is restricted, and the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are positioned at the upper end.

When the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring member 254, the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are lowered, and the detection piece 253e of the button base 253 is detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258, and The pressing operation of the dish effect button 257 is detected. When the button base 253 is lowered by pressing the upper plate effect button 257, the lower ends of the plurality of contact pieces 253d of the button base 253 contact the upper surface of the shelf 250b of the unit main body 250, and further lowering is restricted. The upper plate effect button 257 and the like are positioned at the lower end.

In addition, the button unit 220C can cause the upper plate effect button 257 to be illuminated and decorated by causing the LED of the effect button decoration substrate 251 to emit light. The LED of the effect button decoration substrate 251 is a full-color LED, and the upper plate effect button 257 can be illuminated and decorated in various colors.

[3-1d-4. Features of production operation unit]
As shown in FIG. 41, the effect operation unit 220 of the present embodiment is such that the lower end of the damper 222 attached to the damper attachment recess 240c of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B is lower than the lower surface of the lower case 240 in the assembled state. Since it also projects downward, a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A and the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B. Further, the tip surfaces (upper end surfaces) of the four horizontal support pins 231b of the unit case 231 coincide with the bottom surface of the counterbore of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243, and move upwards of the touch unit 220B with respect to the horizontal support pins 231b. Movement is restricted by a flat washer on the head of the screw 227 screwed into the upper end of the lateral support pin 231b. Further, the tapered portion 231i formed on the upper end side of the lateral support pin 231b and the tapered portion 243d formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 are separated from each other.

In addition, in the effect operation unit 220, as shown in FIG. 42, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted in the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 is slightly smaller than the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a on the side of the horizontal support pin 231b. It projects upward. Further, since a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 and the lower surface A gap is also formed between the lower surface of the case 240 and the case 240. A gap is also formed between the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231d of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240. That is, the touch unit 220B is attached to the attachment base unit 220A with its lower surface floating in the air by the dampers 222 inserted into the left and right lateral support pins 231b.

Further, the effect operation unit 220 is narrowed downward in the unit case 231 in which the touch unit 220B is mounted from the upper side in the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the pyramidal cylinder which is narrowed downward in the mounting base 230 of the mounting base unit 220A. The lower end of the round pyramid-shaped receiving projection 231e is inserted. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c and the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e. As a result, in a normal state, only the vicinity of the outer periphery of the unit case 231 is attached to the attachment base 230 with the inside of the unit case 231 (the central side of the housing recess 231a) floating in the air.

Further, in the effect operation unit 220, as shown in FIG. 31 and the like, the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 is linear (along the rear side near the game area 5a in the touch unit 220B). It is exposed as a strip). The length of the upper end of the linear light emitting unit 237b is about 2/3 of the length of the rear side of the touch unit 220B. The upper plate rear decorative member 236 is arranged on the rear side of the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b exposed along the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Further, an upper plate ball removal button 239 is arranged on the right side of the upper plate rear decorative member 236 in front view. Further, a button unit 220C is arranged on the left side of the touch unit 220B when viewed from the front.

The effect operation unit 220 can present various effects to the player according to the game state that changes by hitting a game ball in the game area 5a. For example, by displaying an image on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, the image (effect image) can be presented to the player through the transparent touch panel 246 to entertain the player.

As an image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, an image simulating an operation button is displayed, and the detection of a touch by the sensor sheet 246b of the touch panel 246 can be accepted, so that the image can be displayed to the player. The operation buttons can be operated, and the effect using the touch panel 246 can be enjoyed. The image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 at the time of presentation using the touch panel 246 is not limited to the operation button, and various images can be displayed.

Further, in the effect operation unit 220, since the touch unit 220B is supported by the plurality of dampers 222 in a state of being floated from the unit case 231, the touch unit 220B is moved by operating the vibrating device 242 according to the game state. Can be vibrated. When the touch panel 246 (touch unit 220B) is vibrated by the vibrating device 242 at the time of effect using the touch panel 246, the vibration of the vibrating device 242 is applied to the finger or hand of the player in contact with the touch panel 246. By transmitting it, the player can be surprised by the illusion that he/she is operating an actual operation button despite operating the image operation button. It is possible to prevent the player from entertaining and deteriorating the interest.

Furthermore, since the production operation unit 220 includes the button unit 220C on the left side of the touch unit 220B when viewed from the front, the player is made to press the upper plate production button 257 in accordance with the game state, and the upper plate production button 257 is operated. You can entertain the operation. More specifically, since the image operation buttons on the touch panel 246 only touch the touch panel 246, they may lack a sense of operation compared to the actual operation buttons, but the upper plate effect button 257 should be actually pressed. Therefore, it is possible to comfortably entertain the operation of the upper plate production button 257 without giving a sense of incongruity to the operation of the upper plate production button 257, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. ..

Since this effect operation unit 220 is arranged at the portion where the upper plate 201 is provided in the plate unit 200 that bulges forward, the game is performed even during the effect using the touch unit 220B or the button unit 220C. There is a possibility that a person may hit the touch unit 220B or the like from above. On the other hand, in the effect operation unit 220, since the touch unit 220B is supported by the damper 222 in a state of floating from the lower unit case 231, even if the touch unit 220B is struck from above, the elasticity of the damper 222 is increased. The impact can be absorbed to some extent by the force. More specifically, when the touch unit 220B is hit or a shock (load) acts from above, the left and right lateral support pins 231b are transmitted to the inserted damper 222, and the touch unit 220B descends while the damper 222 is descending. Is compressed. The damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b is compressed, so that the impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed.

Then, when the touch unit 220B further descends due to the impact, the lower surface of the lower case 240 contacts the upper end of the damper 222 into which the front support pin 231c is inserted, and is supported by the front support pin 231c as the touch unit 220B descends. The damper 222 being compressed is compressed downward. As a result, the shock from the touch unit 220B is absorbed not only by the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b but also by the damper 222 supported by the front support pin 231c.

When the touch unit 220B further descends due to the impact acting on the touch unit 220B, the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B comes into contact with the bottom surfaces on the left and right sides of the housing recess 231a in the unit case 231 and the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231d. As a result, the impact from the touch unit 220B directly acts on the unit case 231 from the touch unit 220B without passing through the plurality of dampers 222.

Further, when the touch unit 220B descends, the load from the central support protrusion 231d causes the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 to bend so that the center moves downward. The impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the elastic force due to the bending of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a. By bending the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, the pair of receiving projections 231e protruding downward from the lower side of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a descend. When the receiving projection 231e is further lowered by the impact from the touch unit 220B, the lower end side of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e contacts the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230, and the touch unit 220B receives The shock is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230.

Since the outer peripheral wall of the receiving portion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the tubular receiving portion 230c are formed in the shape of a pyramid that narrows downward, respectively, from the receiving protrusion 231e to the tubular receiving portion 230c (mounting base 230 side). The transmitted load is dispersed and transmitted in the direction along the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 and in the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface. As described above, since the structure that absorbs the impact applied to the touch unit 220B to the mounting base 230 is arranged in multiple layers, the impact applied to the touch unit 220B is sufficiently absorbed. The touch unit 220B, the unit case 231, the mounting base 230, and the like are less likely to be damaged by the impact.

In addition, in the effect operation unit 220, the linear light emitting portion of the linear light emitting lens member 237 extending along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B by the peripheral LED 235b of the upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 according to the game state. The upper end of 237b can be made to emit light linearly. As a result, the player's interest can be attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 in the touch unit 220B, the touch effect using the touch panel 246, and the like are enjoyed, and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Further, according to the game state, the decoration LED 235a of the upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 causes the upper plate rear decoration member 236 arranged on the rear side of the touch panel 220B (the rear side of the linear light emitting section 237b) to emit light. be able to. By illuminating and decorating the decorative member 236 after the upper plate, like the light emission of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237, the player's interest is attracted to the effect operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the effect presented by the effect operation unit 220 and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, the touch unit 220B provided with the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is mounted on the plate unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 and the unit case 231 of the plate unit cover 260, which will be described later. And a waterproof seal 248 is attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Accordingly, in the upper plate 201, even if the water (water droplets) condensed on the surface of the upper plate body 212 or the game ball by touching the outside air flows to the lower side of the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262). It is possible to prevent dew condensation water from entering the touch unit 220B, and prevent troubles in the touch unit 220B.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 42, since the upper plate post-decoration substrate 235 for emitting and decorating the upper plate post-decoration member 236 and the linear light emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201, Since the upper plate 201 is not exposed to water droplets that have condensed, it is possible to prevent problems such as short circuits and corrosion in the upper plate rear decorative substrate 235.

[3-1e. Dish unit cover]
As shown in FIGS. 27 to 30, the plate unit cover 260 of the plate unit 200 extends in the left-right direction, and the center of the left-right side bulges forward, and is formed in a shell shape opened rearward. .. The plate unit cover 260 has a lower plate opening 261 that opens forward at approximately the center of the left and right and has a rear end closed by the plate unit base 210, and the top plate side (upper side) of the inner peripheral wall of the lower plate opening 261. Which is formed on the left side of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 that covers the lower side of the upper plate main body 212 and the effect operation unit 220 and the lower plate opening portion 261 when viewed from the front, and the bass sound of the speaker unit 920 of the main body frame 4. A speaker grill 263 for transmitting sound from the speaker, a plate unit left decorative member 264 arranged above the speaker grill 263 and light-emitted by the plate unit left decorative substrate 345, and arranged on the right side of the lower plate opening 261 in front view. A handle port 265 through which the rear part of the handle body 502 of the handle unit 500 passes, a bottom plate portion 266 that forms the bottom surface of the dish unit cover 260 and covers the lower side of the lower dish body 214, and a bottom plate at the center of the left and right sides. And a bottom plate opening 267 that penetrates the portion 266 vertically and is closed by the lower dish ball removing unit 320.

The bottom plate opening 261 is closed by the bottom plate body 214 on the bottom plate side (lower side) of the inner peripheral wall. The speaker grill 263 and the dish unit left decorative member 264 are made of punching metal in which a plurality of holes are provided in a metal plate.

The dish unit cover 260 has a smooth surface on the left side when viewed from the front, whereas it has a rugged surface on the right side. In addition, the right side of the front view has translucency almost entirely.

The plate unit cover 260 is formed in a state where it can be gripped with one hand between the upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 when assembled in the plate unit 200. Accordingly, when the player touches the touch unit 220B, by grasping the upper side of the lower plate opening 261, it is possible to stabilize the finger (hand or arm) to be touched, and the touch operation of the touch unit 220B. Can be done easily.

More specifically, in the assembled state, the thickness between the front end upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper plate lower cover portion 262 is about 25 mm, and the rear end upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the upper plate lower cover portion 262 are approximately 25 mm. The thickness between the lower surface and the lower surface is approximately 50 mm, and the front-rear distance from the front end of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 to the rear end of the touch unit 220B is approximately 60 mm. Further, the upper surface of the touch unit 220B is inclined about 20 degrees with respect to the horizontal. This allows the player's hand to grip between the upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262.

[3-1f. Right lower door production unit]
As shown in FIGS. 43 to 50, the lower right door production unit 270 of the dish unit 200 is arranged on the upper side of the handle unit 500 and on the right side of the production operation unit 200, and rotates according to the game state. It is provided with a spherical lower right rotating body 270A for light emission decoration. The lower right door effect unit 270 is attached to the unit base 271 and a unit base 271 that is attached so as to close the escape port 210g on the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and rotatably supports the lower right door rotator 270A. A door lower right drive motor 272, a drive gear 273 fixed to a rotation shaft of the door lower right drive motor 272, a driven gear 274 meshing with the drive gear 273 and attached to the door lower right rotation body 270A, and a driven gear And a shaft member 275 rotatably supporting the gear 274 and attached to the unit base 271.

Further, the lower right door effect unit 270 is attached to the opposite side of the lower right door rotor 270A from the driven gear 274, and the rotor side bearing member 276 rotatably supported by the unit base 271 and the lower right door. A base side bearing member 277 that rotatably supports the rotator 270A on the side opposite to the driven gear 274 in cooperation with the unit base 271, and the rotation of the door lower right rotator 270A attached to the unit base 271. Two rotation detection sensors 278 capable of detecting a position, a decorative member 279 attached to the unit base 271 on the front left side of the lower right door 270A of the door, and a rear member attached to the front side of the unit base 271. A door lower right base decorative board 280 having a plurality of LEDs, a door lower right drive motor 272 attached to the rear side of the unit base 271, a rotation detection sensor 278, a door lower right base decorative board 280, and a door described later. A lower right relay board 281 for relaying the connection between the lower right rotating body decoration board 291 and a peripheral control board (not shown) is provided.

The lower right door 270A of the door constitutes an outer shell, and is disposed between the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286, each of which has a hemispherical shell shape, and between the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. And a rotating body internal unit 290. The front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are each formed with semicircular cutouts 285a, 286a around the rotation axis. The front outer shell member 285 has a band-shaped decoration 285b that has a metallic luster and extends in a band shape in the circumferential direction on a translucent hemispherical shell-shaped surface, and a heart shape that is arranged at the center of the band decoration 285b. Heart decoration 285c. On the other hand, the rear outer shell member 286 is provided with a band decoration 286b which has a metallic luster and extends in a band shape in the circumferential direction on the surface of a translucent hemispherical shell. When the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are combined, the belt decoration 285b of the front outer shell member 285 and the belt decoration 286b of the rear outer shell member 286 are formed so as to be connected.

As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the rotating body internal unit 290 is a disk-shaped lower door right rotating body decoration substrate 291 provided with a plurality of LEDs on both sides, and a center of the lower door right rotating body decoration substrate 291. The first fixed shaft member 292 and the cylindrical first fixed shaft member 292, which are attached to the right lower rotary body decoration substrate 291 and extend perpendicularly to the surface of the door lower right rotary member decoration substrate 291 and whose front end is attached to the shaft member 275. Cylindrical shape that is attached to the opposite side of the lower right door rotating body decoration substrate 291 and extends perpendicularly to the surface of the lower right door rotating body decoration substrate 291 and has its tip attached to the unit base 271 and the base side bearing member 277. Second fixed shaft member 293 of FIG. Although illustration is omitted, inside the second fixed shaft member 293, a wiring cord for connecting the lower right door relay board 281 and the lower right door rotary body decoration board 291 is inserted.

Further, the rotary body internal unit 290 is arranged on both sides of the door lower right rotary body decoration substrate 291 and is attached to the insides of the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286, and is a flat plate-shaped and transparent reflector base 294. The first reflector 295 is attached to the reflector base 294 and has an annular shape and opens outward in the axial direction. The first reflector 295 is attached to the reflector base 294 through the inside of the ring of the first reflector 295 and has a hexagonal shape at the center. And a second reflector 296 having a through hole 296a. The first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plating layer having a metallic luster on their surfaces, and can reflect light from the door lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291. In addition, the first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plurality of radially extending flat plate-shaped ribs.

In this rotary body internal unit 290, a door lower right rotary body decoration substrate 291, a first fixed shaft member 292, and a second fixed shaft member 293, a reflector base 294, a first reflector 295, and a second reflector 296 are provided. Separated from each other for relative rotation.

The unit base 271 is in the form of a flat plate that extends forward from a portion diagonally upper right in a front view with respect to the center of the ring portion 271a on the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a and the annular ring portion 271a arranged on the rear side of the door lower right rotating body 270A. Of the first projecting piece 271b, the second projecting piece 271c projecting forward in a flat plate shape from a portion of the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a opposite to the first projecting piece 271b, and the second projecting piece 271c. And a bearing groove 271d into which a U-shaped recess is formed rearward from the front end and into which the tip of the second fixed shaft member 293 is inserted.

The door lower right drive motor 272 is attached to the outer side surface (right side surface) of the first projecting piece 271b in a state where the rotating shaft penetrates. The driven gear 274 is formed to have a larger diameter than the driving gear 273. The shaft member 275 includes a mounting portion 275a mounted on the front end of the first projecting piece 271b, and a tubular shaft portion 275b projecting from the mounting portion 275a in a tubular shape. The shaft member 275 can rotatably support the driven gear 274 by the outer periphery of the tubular shaft portion 275b, and can non-rotatably support the tip of the first fixed shaft member 292 by the inner periphery of the tubular shaft portion 275b.

The rotating body side bearing member 276 includes a bearing hole 276a into which the second fixed shaft member 293 is rotatably inserted, and a flat plate-shaped detection piece 276b extending outward. The base side bearing member 277 is attached to the front end of the second projecting piece 271c so as to close the open front end side of the U-shaped bearing groove 271d at the front end of the second projecting piece 271c in the unit base 271. The two rotation detection sensors 278 are symmetrically attached to the second protruding piece 271c with the rotation axis of the lower right door 270A in between. The two rotation detection sensors 275 are a rotation position in which the heart decoration 285c of the lower right door 270A faces forward (see FIG. 50(a)) and a rotation position in which the heart decoration 285c faces rear (FIG. 50(b)). And) can be detected respectively.

The lower right door effect unit 270 of the present embodiment can rotate the lower right door rotating body 270A by the lower right door driving motor 272 according to the game state, and stops so that the heart decoration 285c faces forward. Whether or not a chance is coming can be suggested to the player depending on whether or not the player is able to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, since the lower door right lower rotary member 270A has the lower door right lower rotary member decorative substrate 291 mounted non-rotatably, the lower right door rotary member 270A is not rotated while the lower right door rotary member 270A is rotating. When the lower rotating body decoration substrate 291 (the LED thereof) is caused to emit light, the position of the light emitted from the lower door right rotating body decoration substrate 291 moves as the door lower right rotating body 270A rotates, and the first reflector 295 and Since the direction of the light reflected and guided by the two reflectors 296 changes, even if the LED of the door lower right rotating body decoration substrate 291 does not blink, the door lower right rotating body 270A emits light as if the light was blinking. By irradiating light of various colors from the LEDs, the lower right door 270A of the door can be illuminated and decorated in a rainbow color, which can entertain the player.

[3-1 g. Performance unit cover]
As shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, the rendering unit cover 300 of the dish unit 200 includes a hemispherical transparent rotating body cover portion 301 that covers the front side of the spherical lower door right rotating body 270A of the lower door right producing unit 270. The decorative portion 302 formed on the outer periphery of the rotating body cover portion 301 and continuous with the decoration on the right side of the plate unit cover 260 in front view, and the lower right portion of the rotating body cover portion 301, which penetrates in the front and rear direction to lock the locking unit 700. And a cylinder insertion port 303 through which the key cylinder 710 is inserted.

The effect unit cover 300 is in the shape of a container with the entire rear open, and has translucency. In the effect unit cover 300, the upper side of the rotary body cover section 301 is light-emitted and decorated by the lower right door base decorative board 280 of the lower right door effect unit 270, and the lower side of the rotary body cover section 301 is a dish unit right decorative board 346. Is decorated with luminous.

[3-1h. Upper plate ball removing unit]
As shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, the upper dish ball removing unit 310 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210 so as to cover the through hole 210e and the receiving piece 210f of the dish unit base 210 from the front side. A cover 311 having an opening 311a through which the extending piece 239a of the upper dish ball removal button 239 can be inserted, and a through hole 210e of the dish unit base 210 in the cover 311. A front base member 312 attached to the upper left position in the front view, a pressure transmission member 313 rotatably supported by the front base member 312 and rotated by pressing the upper bowl ball removing button 239, and a pressure transmission member. A first spring member 314 for urging the upper plate bowl removing button 239 in a direction in which the upper plate ball removing button 239 rises.

The upper dish ball removing unit 310 includes a rear base member 315 attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 210 so as to close the upper dish ball feed port 210d of the dish unit base 210 from the rear side, and a rear base member. 315 and the dish unit base 210, and is mounted by the rear base member 315 so as to be able to move up and down, and the upper dish ball removing slider 316 in contact with the pressure transmitting member 313 from the upper side, and the upper dish ball removing And a second spring member 317 that biases the slider 316 upward.

The front base member 312 extends in parallel to the front surface of the dish unit base 210, and has a flat plate-shaped base portion 312a that is attached to the cover 311, and a pair of extending portions that extend forward from both left and right sides of the base portion 312a in a flat plate shape. The projecting piece 312b, the shaft supporting part 312c recessed rearward from the front end of the extending part 312b, and the rear end of the first spring member 314 are provided near the lower end of the front surface of the base part 312a. And a hook-shaped spring locking portion (not shown).

The pressing force transmitting member 313 has a horizontally elongated cylindrical shaft portion 313a rotatably inserted into the pair of shaft supporting portions 312c of the front base member 312, and a rearward extending plate-shaped rearward extending from the shaft portion 313a. An upward extending piece 313c which extends upward in a flat plate shape from the vicinity of the left end in front view on the upper surface of the extending piece 313b and the rearward extending piece 313b so that the lower end of the extending piece 239c of the upper dish ball pulling button 239 can abut. A downwardly extending piece 313d that extends downward from the right end in front view on the lower surface of the rearwardly extending piece 313b, and a first spring that protrudes downward from the lower side near the left end in front view of the shaft portion 313a. And a hook-shaped spring locking portion 313e to which the front end of the member 314 is locked. The downward extending piece 313d is formed in a triangular shape that extends downward as it extends rearward, and the lower end thereof is capable of contacting the upper dish ball removing slider 316.

The rear base member 315 extends in a flat plate shape in parallel with the rear surface of the dish unit base 210 and is provided with a base portion 315a attached to the dish unit base 210 and a front side of the base portion 315a, which are separated from each other in the left and right directions. The slider support portion 315b slidably supporting both left and right ends of the ball removing slider 316, and the front end is opened at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the upper dish ball feed port 210d of the dish unit base 210 at the upper end of the base portion 315a. It is provided with an upper entrance 315c which opens downward on the rear side of the base portion 315a and through which game balls can flow.

In addition, the rear base member 315 extends to the rear side of the base portion 315a continuously downward from the upper inlet 315c and is opened rearward, and the lower end thereof is curved rearwardly. An L-shaped second guide path 315e, which extends downward from the lower side of the first guide path 315d, then extends leftward in front view, is open at the left end to the left, and is open rearward as a whole, A plate-shaped passage cover 315f closing the rear end side of the leftward extending portion of the guide passage 315e and a base portion 315a in the front-back direction so that two sides are surrounded by the L-shaped second guide passage 315e. An opening 315g penetrating therethrough and a spring locking portion 315h protruding forward from the front surface of the base portion 315a in a boss shape and to which the upper end of the second spring member 317 is locked are provided.

The L-shaped second guide path 315e of the rear base member 315 is inclined such that the portion extending leftward becomes lower as it goes leftward. As shown in FIG. 51(b), the left end of the second guide path 315e is inserted into the cutout portion 210j of the cylindrical lower dish ball supply port 210c of the plate unit base 210, and is connected to the second guide path 315e. The lower dish ball supply port 210c communicates with each other.

The upper dish ball removing slider 316 is a flat plate-shaped slider base 316a whose left and right ends are slidably supported by the slider support portions 315b of the rear base member 315, and a plate from the left side to the front side in the front view at the upper end of the slider base 316a. The transmission piece 316b, which extends to the upper side of the receiving piece 210f through the through hole 210e of the unit base 210 and can abut the lower end of the downward extending piece 313d of the pressing transmission member 313, and the slider below the transmission piece 316b. A triangular operation transmitting portion 316c protruding rearward from the rear side of the base 316a, and a hook-shaped spring member protruding from the front surface of the slider base 316a to which the lower end of the second spring member 317 is locked. And a stop 316d.

In the upper dish ball removing unit 310, the upper inlet 315c of the rear base member 315 is opened at the lower end on the right end side of the guide passage portion 212a of the upper plate body 212 in the front view when the dish unit 200 is assembled. As a result, the game balls in the upper plate 201 can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 540 from the upper entrance 315c via the first guide portion 315d on the rear side of the base portion 315a.

Further, when the upper bowl ball pulling button 239 is pressed downward, the upper plate ball punching unit 310 causes the pressing transmission member 313 to resist the urging force of the first spring member 314 by the extending piece 239a of the upper plate ball punching button 239. Then, the lower end of the downward extending piece 313d rotates about the shaft portion 313a in a direction of moving downward. When the lower end of the downward extending piece 313d moves downward with the rotation of the pressure transmitting member 313, the upper dish ball is removed by the transmitting piece 316b of the upper dish ball removing slider 316 with which the lower end of the downward extending piece 313d is in contact. The slider 316 slides downward against the biasing force of the second spring member 317.

When the upper bowl ball removing slider 316 slides downward, the operation transmitting portion 316c operates the switching mechanism of the ball feeding unit 540 to switch the flow path in the ball feeding unit 540, and the first guide path. The 315d side is in communication with the second taxiway 315e side. Thereby, the game ball in the upper plate 201 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 210c to the lower plate 202 through the upper entrance 315c, the first guide path 315d, the ball feeding unit 540, and the second guide path 315e. The game ball in the upper plate 201 can be pulled out.

When the downward pressing of the upper bowl ball removal button 239 is released, the upper bowl ball removal slider 316 and the upper bowl ball removal button 239 are raised by the urging force of the first spring member 314 and the second spring member 317. You can return to the original state.

[3-1i. Lower plate ball removing unit]
As shown in FIG. 54 and the like, the lower dish ball removing unit 320 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the lower side of the lower dish body 214 so as to close the bottom plate opening 267 of the dish unit cover 260, and is a ball of the lower dish body 214. A flat plate-shaped lower dish ball removing base 321 having an opening 321a that coincides with the hole 214a, and a flat plate-like slide lid 322 capable of sliding left and right on the lower dish ball removing base 321 to close the opening 321a. A knob 323 attached to the front end of the slide lid 322 and exposed to the outside from the front of the dish unit cover 260, and a spring urging the slide lid 322 in the direction of closing the opening 321a by the slide lid 322. A member 324 and a holding device 325 that holds the slide lid 322 at a position where the opening 321a is opened against the biasing force of the spring member 324 are provided.

The opening 321a of the lower dish ball removal base 321 is formed at a position closer to the right side from the center in the left and right in a front view. By attaching the lower dish ball removing base 321 to the lower dish body 212, the slide lid 322 can be slidably supported from side to side between the lower dish ball removing base 321 and the lower dish body 212. The slide lid 322 includes a holding protrusion 322a held by a holding device 325 on the left end side in front view.

The holding device 325 includes a main body 325a attached to the lower dish ball removing base 321, and a pair of holding claws 325b that can open and close from the main body 325a and can hold the holding projection 322a. When the holding projection 322a is inserted between the pair of open holding claws 325a and pressed toward the main body 325a, the holding device 325 closes the pair of holding claws 325b and holds the holding projection 322a, and at the same time, holds the pair of holding pieces. The claw 325b is maintained in the closed state. In this state, when the holding protrusion 322a is moved to the main body 325a side, the pair of holding claws 325a is opened and the holding protrusion 322a is released.

In the lower dish ball removing unit 320, the slide lid 322 is provided between the opening 321a and the ball removing hole 214a of the lower dish main body 214 when the knob 323 (slide lid 322) is moved to the right when viewed from the front. Positioned, the game ball in the lower plate 202 does not come out downward from the ball removal hole 214a, and the game ball can be stored in the lower plate 202.

From this state, by operating the knob 323 to the left, the slide lid 322 slides to the left, and the opening 321a and the ball hole 214a communicate with each other. As a result, the game ball in the lower plate 202 comes out through the ball removing hole 214a and the opening 321a to the lower side of the plate unit 200, and the game ball in the lower plate 202 can be removed. At this time, since the holding projection 322a of the slide lid 322 is held by the pair of holding claws 325b of the holding device 325, the slide lid 322 remains open even when the operation of the knob 323 is stopped, and the lower plate 202 You can continue to pull out the game ball inside.

To close the slide lid 322, the knob 323 is slightly operated to the left to open the pair of holding claws 325b to release the holding projection 322a, and the slide lid 322 slides to the right by the biasing force of the spring member 324. Then, the ball removing hole 214a is closed. In this way, by operating the knob portion 323 of the lower plate ball removing unit 320, it is possible to store the game balls in the lower plate 202 or remove the game balls stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-1j. Ball rental operation unit]
As shown in FIG. 29, FIG. 30, etc., the ball lending operation unit 330 of the dish unit 200 has a translucent unit case 331 attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit 220 near the right end in front view, and a unit. A ball lending button 332 that is exposed on the upper surface of the case 331 and can be operated by the player, and a return button 333 that is exposed on the upper surface of the unit case 331 behind the ball lending button 332 and that can be operated by the player, A display section 334 that is visible from the player side through the upper surface of the unit case 331 behind the return button 333 is provided.

This ball lending operation unit 330, when the cash or prepaid card is inserted into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, and then the ball lending button 332 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the dish unit. It is possible to lend (pay out) into the upper plate 201 of 200, and when the return button 333 is pressed, the balance of the cash inserted and the prepaid card are returned after subtracting the remaining amount of the loan. Further, the display unit 334 displays cash or the number of prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine, an error code when the ball lending machine fails, or the like.

[3-1k. Upper plate top decorative material]
As shown in FIG. 29, FIG. 30, etc., the upper plate top decoration member 340 of the plate unit 200 is attached to the upper left and right center of the upper end of the plate unit base 210 and has a translucent upper plate top lens extending in the left and right bands. 340a, and an upper plate top decorative substrate 340b mounted on the lower side of the upper plate top lens 340a and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on its upper surface.

The upper plate top decoration member 340 can make the upper plate top lens 340a emit light in a band shape by causing the LED of the upper plate top decoration substrate 340b to emit light. Since the upper plate top decoration member 340 is disposed on the rear side of the effect operation unit 200, the upper plate top decoration member is similar to the light emitting decoration such as the upper plate rear decoration member 236 and the linear light emitting lens member 237. By illuminating and decorating 340, the player's interest can be attracted to the effect operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B, and the effect presented by the effect operation unit 220 is prevented from deteriorating the interest. be able to.

[3-1l. Characteristic effect of dish unit]
The dish unit 200 of the present embodiment is the touch unit 220B of the effect operation unit 220 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 having the upper dish 201 that stores the game balls on the lower side of the game region 5a, and the game ball in the game region 5a. When an image is displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 according to the game state that changes by hitting, a strip shape is formed along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 near the game area 5a. Since the linear light-emitting lens member 237, the upper plate rear decoration member 236, the upper plate top decoration member 340, etc. can be made to emit light, even if the player's line of sight is concentrated in the game area 5a, the line of sight (field of view) It is possible to notice the light of the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like entering from the outside, and to attract the player's line of sight (interest) to the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like, that is, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 side. Therefore, in the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, when the effect such as an image is presented according to the game state, the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like is caused to emit light, so that the player can use the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. It is possible to make the presentation of the presentation noticeable, and it is possible to prevent the production by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 from being enjoyed and prevent the interest from being lowered.

Further, since the plate unit 200 is provided with the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 capable of displaying an image according to the game state, when the image indicating the arrival of the opportunity is displayed, the plate unit 200 is arranged outside the game area 5a. Since the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 that is displayed indicates the arrival of a chance, the player plays the game in the game area 5a and the effect on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 outside the game area 5a. Both can be cared for. Therefore, by paying attention to the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a (the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244), a tight game with a sense of speed can be enjoyed, and the interest of the player is reduced. It is possible to prevent the player from moving to the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 by causing the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like to emit light when displaying an image suggesting the arrival of a chance on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. It is possible to make the player pay attention, and to surely recognize the arrival of the opportunity to entertain the player. In this case, depending on the player, both the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a may cause the player to be unable to concentrate on either of them, which may reduce the interest. Since the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light in response to the arrival, it is possible to concentrate in the game area 5a until the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light, and entertain the game in the game area 5a. At the same time, it is possible to entertain the effect on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 when the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light, and it is possible to keep the game clear and to prevent getting bored.

Further, since the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is provided in the plate unit 200 which bulges toward the player side below the game area 5a, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is arranged at a position closer to the player. Become. This makes it easier for the player located in front of the pachinko machine 1 to hide the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and makes it difficult for the player to be able to see the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 next to or next to the other player. The effect presented by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed only by the player. Therefore, while enjoying the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and deteriorating by being watched by another player, and at the same time, the upper plate liquid crystal display device can be reduced. Since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light when the effect is displayed by 244, it is possible to make it difficult to miss the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and entertain the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are made to emit light in a band shape, the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like can be made more conspicuous as compared with the case of emitting light in a dot shape, and the player Even if the consciousness of the above is concentrated in the game area 5a, it is possible to easily notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like, and entertaining the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and the touch panel 246 and the like. It is possible to suppress the decrease. Further, since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like are made to emit light in a band shape, a light-emitting mode different from that of other light-emitting decorations and the like can be obtained, and it is possible to reduce erroneous recognition as light-emission of light-emitting decorations and the like. The light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like can be surely noticed.

Further, since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are arranged at a rear side position near the game area 5a on the outer peripheral edge of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, when the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light, The light from the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily made visible to the player, and the effect of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed by noticing the light emission from the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like.

Further, the plate operation unit 200 having the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and the like is provided on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 having the upper plate 201 and the like, and the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is set within the game area 5a. Since the player turns his or her line of sight to check the amount of game balls to be inserted at a certain frequency, when the line of sight is directed to the upper plate 201, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the linear light emitting lens member 237, etc. It is easy to enter the field of view, and it becomes easy to notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237. In addition, since the player turns his or her line of sight to the upper plate 201 with a certain frequency, it is easy to direct the line of sight from within the game area 5a to the upper plate 201 (upper plate liquid crystal display device 244). Therefore, when the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like is noticed, it is possible to immediately shift the line of sight to the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the entertainment presented by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is enjoyed and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Furthermore, when the production operation unit 200 is arranged below the game area 5a and the light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like is radiated to the player from below, when arranged above the game area 5a. Compared with the above, it is possible to make it easier for the player to enter the eyes and to notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like, and it is possible for the player to surely pay attention to the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. It is possible to entertain the effect by the operation unit 200 and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the effect operation unit 200 (upper plate liquid crystal display device 244) is arranged at a position corresponding to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, the center of the player's line of sight is located at any position in the game area 5a. However, the light from the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily noticed, and the player can be surely focused on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the effect by the effect operation unit 200 can be enjoyed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the effect operation unit 200 is provided with the touch panel 246, in addition to the effect by the image, the effect of causing the player to operate the touch panel 246 can be performed, and the player can be entertained with various effects. By causing the player to operate the touch panel 246, the player can participate in the effect, and it is possible to prevent the player from actively entertaining the effect and deteriorating the interest.

Further, the linear light emitting lens member 237 (the linear light emitting portion 237b) arranged along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B moves the game ball in the upper plate 201 to the ball feeding unit 540 (ball launching device 680). Along with the guide passage portion 212a for feeding, an upper dish ball removing button 239 for operating the upper dish ball removing unit 310 is provided between the guide passage portion 212a and the guide passage portion 212a. That is, the linear light emitting lens member 237 is provided in the vicinity of the place where the player confirms the game ball necessary for the game, and the linear light emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position the player cares about even during the game. Therefore, the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 can be noticed, attracting the interest of the player to the touch unit 220B, and the effect by the touch unit 220B (effect image by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, touch panel 246). It is possible to make it easier to notice the timing of touch operation, etc.).

Further, the touch unit 220B provided with the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is mounted on the upper plate lower cover portion 262 of the plate unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 of the mounting base unit 220A and the unit case 231. Since the waterproof seal 248 is attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B, the upper plate body 212 and the surface of the game ball are exposed by touching the outside air in the upper plate 201. Even if the condensed water (water droplets) flows to the lower side of the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262), it is possible to prevent the condensed water from entering the touch unit 220B, and thus the touch unit 220B. It is possible to prevent problems from occurring in

In addition, as shown in FIG. 42, since the upper plate post-decoration substrate 235 for emitting and decorating the upper plate post-decoration member 236 and the linear light emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201, Since the upper plate 201 is not exposed to water droplets that have condensed, it is possible to prevent problems such as short circuits and corrosion in the upper plate rear decorative substrate 235.

Further, in the effect operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200, when the vibrating device 242 vibrates the touch unit 220B including the touch panel 246 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, a plurality (two) of touch units 220B are provided. Since the damper 222 is attached to the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A in a floating state, the vibration of the touch unit 220B (vibrating device 242) is absorbed and attenuated by the damper 222 and is transmitted to the mounting base unit 220A. This means that the vibration of the mounting base unit 220A can be reduced. Accordingly, when the touch device 220B is vibrated by the vibrating device 242 when the touch panel 246 of the touch unit 220B is touch-operated, only the touch unit 220B vibrates, so that the touch panel of the touch unit 220B is presented to the player. The operation feeling of 246 can be sufficiently given, and it is possible to prevent the player from delighting the touch operation of the touch panel 246 and deteriorating the interest.

Moreover, since the touch unit 220B can be vibrated by the vibrating device 242, in addition to the operation feeling of the touch panel 246, the player is surprised by the vibration of the touch unit 220B or suggests the timing of operating the touch panel 246. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the entertainment from being deteriorated by delighting the operation effect of the touch panel 246 of the touch unit 220B.

Further, since the touch unit 220B is supported by the plurality of dampers 222 from the lower side, even if a shock or load is applied to the touch unit 220B by hitting or strongly pressing the touch unit 220B from the upper side, the damper 222 is used. Since it is possible to absorb the impact or the like, it is possible to reduce damage to the touch unit 220B, the mounting base unit 220A, or the like due to the impact or the like, and the game is interrupted due to the damage of the touch unit 220B or the like. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

In addition, since the touch panel 246 is used as the operation unit of the touch unit 220B, the touch panel 246 is touched for a longer time when the player operates the button than when the button is pressed. When the vibrating device 242 vibrates the touch unit 220B when touching 246, the vibration can be reliably transmitted to the player's finger (hand). Therefore, the player's finger can vibrate to make the player feel that he/she is operating the touch panel 246, so that a sufficient operation feeling can be given and the player can enjoy the operation of the touch panel 246. It is possible to prevent the interest from decreasing.

Further, by changing the image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, it is possible to easily change the type of touch operation (button), and it is possible to deal with various effects. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and the interest of the player from decreasing due to various effects. Further, since the touch unit 220B is provided with the touch panel 246, compared to the conventional push button, touch, tap (single tap, double tap), drag, flick, pinch (pinch out, pinch in), swipe, touch and touch. Various operations such as hold can be performed. As a result, more various operation effects can be performed, and it is possible to prevent the player from being entertained and reduce the interest.

Further, the touch unit 220B is attached to the attachment base unit 220A (unit case 231) so as not to move upward and to move downward, and the elastic force (biasing force) of the plurality of dampers 222 causes the touch unit 220B. Is pressed against the upper moving end, the touch unit 220B can be made difficult to move during the operation of the touch panel 246, and the operation of the touch panel 246 can be facilitated accurately. Further, since the touch unit 220B becomes difficult to move, it is possible to make the player think that the touch unit 220B does not move, and the touch unit 220B, which was thought not to move, is vibrated according to the game state. By vibrating by the device 242, the player can be surprised, and it is possible to suppress the entertaining and deteriorating the interest of the player.

Further, since the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the plurality of vibrating devices 242 that are separated from each other, for example, by driving the vibrating device 242 at a position close to a portion operated by the player on the touch panel 246, it is possible to make the touch unit 220B strong. Vibration can be transmitted. Therefore, when the player operates a position different from the position to be operated on the touch panel 246, the vibration transmitted to the player is different, so that the player is informed that the operation is wrong. Therefore, it is possible to make the player perform a correct operation, and it is possible to prevent the operation effect using the touch panel 246 from being enjoyed and prevent the interest from being lowered.

Further, since a plurality of vibration devices 242 separated from each other are provided, a resonance phenomenon is generated at an arbitrary position of the touch panel 246 by appropriately controlling the frequency and intensity of vibration of each vibration device 242. You can Therefore, by controlling the respective vibrating devices 242 so that the resonance phenomenon occurs at an arbitrary position operated by the player, it is possible to give a further operation feeling or to greatly surprise the player. It is possible to entertain the player and prevent the interest from being lowered.

Further, when the touch unit 220B is hit or strongly pressed from above and a shock or load is applied to the touch unit 220B, the left and right ends of the touch unit 220B are attached to the unit case 231 with the damper 222 interposed therebetween. Therefore, the damper 222 and the bending of the touch unit 220B can absorb (attenuate) an impact or the like from the upper side to some extent and transmit it to the unit case 231 side. Further, on the unit case 231 side, since the outer edge of the unit case 231 is attached to the lower mounting base 230, an impact or load from the touch unit 220B side via the unit case 231 is applied to the mounting base 230. Can be widely dispersed and transmitted. At this time, the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e protruding downward from the lower surface of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c in which the receiving projection 231e is inserted in the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230. Since a gap is formed between the inner circumferential wall and the inner peripheral wall, the receiving projection 231e and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c come into contact with each other after the unit case 231 bends downward due to the impact or load from the touch unit 220B. The shock or the like is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, and the shock or the like is further attenuated by the bending of the unit case 231 and is transmitted to the mounting base 230. Since the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the tubular receiving portion 230c are narrowed downward, when the receiving projection 231e and the tubular receiving portion 230c contact each other, the receiving projection 231e (unit case 231) is transmitted in an oblique direction to the bottom surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230, and the impact and load from the side of the mounting base 230 are perpendicular to the bottom surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 and along the bottom surface. As a result, the force in the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface (downward direction) that causes the mounting base 230 to bend becomes smaller and is transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. Therefore, even if the touch unit 220B is struck or strongly pressed from above, the shock and the like can be effectively attenuated by the plurality of dampers 222, the unit case 231, and the mounting base 230, and the touch unit 220B and It is possible to prevent the mounting base unit 220A from being damaged.

[3-2. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57. 55A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 55B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 56A is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the front with the lid member removed, and FIG. 56B is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear with the lid member removed. Further, FIG. 57 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed.

As shown, the foul cover unit 520 of this embodiment is attached to the front side of the unit body 522 and a shallow box-shaped unit body 522 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and the front side is open. And a plate-shaped lid member 524. The foul cover unit 520 penetrates in the front-rear direction in the upper left corner of the front view, and connects the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 with the upper bowl ball supply port 210a of the dish unit 200. A passage 526, and a full-bulb ball receiving opening 528 that is open to the rear on the right side of the through-ball passage 526 when viewed from the front and is capable of communicating with the full-tank guiding passage 862 of the lower full-bulb ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4, Is equipped with.

In addition, the foul cover unit 520 does not reach the inside of the game area 5a despite being launched by the ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4 on the right side of the full-ball receiving port 528 when viewed from the front side. A foul ball receiving port 530 for receiving a game ball (fal ball), and a game ball received in the full ball receiving port 528 and the foul ball receiving port 530, which are opened forward in the lower right corner when viewed from the front, are released. In addition, a ball discharge port 532 that communicates with the lower plate ball supply port 210c of the plate unit 200 is provided.

Further, the foul cover unit 520 is formed between the full ball receiving port 528, the foul ball receiving port 530, and the ball discharging port 532 by the unit main body 522 and the lid member 524, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls. A storage passage 533 having a possible width, a flat plate-shaped movable piece 534 which constitutes a part of an inner wall of the storage passage 533 and has a lower end rotatably attached to the unit main body 522, A full tank detection sensor 535 that detects rotation of the piece 534 in a direction away from the storage passage 533, and a spring 536 that urges the movable piece 534 toward the center of the storage passage 533 are provided.

In the foul cover unit 520, the inside of the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game balls, and when the game balls are not discharged from the ball discharge port 532 to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 520 is stored in the storage passage 533 to some extent. The number of game balls can be stored. Then, when a certain number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 533, the movable piece 534 is rotated so that the upper end of the movable piece 534 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 533 due to the weight of the game balls, The rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 535. As a result, it is possible to determine that the lower plate 202 is full of game balls, and when a full tank detection sensor 535 detects that the tank is full, further game balls are stopped from being dispensed, This can be notified to the player or a person in charge at the game hall to urge the lower plate 202 to be filled.

Further, the foul cover unit 520 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 522 and below the through-ball passage 526, and the guide passage opening/closing door of the lower full tank ball passage unit 860 in the payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 described later. The door opening/closing contact portion 537 is provided with which the operating protrusion 863e of 863 can contact (see FIG. 80). The door opening/closing contact portion 537 is inclined so that the rear surface thereof moves forward as it goes downward. The door opening/closing contact portion 537 is formed so that the actuating protrusion 863e of the guideway door member 863 comes into contact when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. When the actuating protrusion 863e of the guideway opening/closing part 863 abuts on the door opening/closing abutting part 537, the guideway door member 863 rotates and the downstream ends (front opening) of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862. ) Can be opened.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61. 58 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 59 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated inside. The main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. It can be opened and closed.

The main body frame 4 of the present embodiment has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600, a part of which can be inserted into the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side in front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and at the same time, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are respectively rotatably attached are provided, and the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the front side left side surface of the main body frame base 600. ..

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the lower front surface of the main body frame base 600, and a ball launching device 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a right side surface of the main body frame base in front view. The outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and the locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the main frame base 600 are attached to the rear side along the upper side and the left side in front view. An inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 for paying out game balls to the player side, a substrate unit 900 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a main body which is openably and closably attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. The back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the frame base 600 is provided.

[4-1. Body frame base]
The main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangular shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front, as shown in FIGS. 58 to 61. This main body frame base 600 penetrates back and forth within a height range of about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end, and a game board insertion port 601 into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and a game. The game board mounting portion 602 which forms the lower side of the board insertion opening 601 and on which the game board 5 is mounted, and the left and right ends of the lower end of the game board 5 which protrude upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board mounting portion 602. And a game board regulation unit 603 that regulates the backward movement.

Further, the main body frame 4 is a launching device mounting portion 604 for mounting a ball launching device 680 formed on the lower right side of the game board mounting portion 602 in a front view, and a front and rear side on the right side of the launching device mounting portion 604 in a front view. Cylinder insertion opening 605 that penetrates through the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700, and the bass speaker of the board unit 900 that penetrates forward and backward from the center of the game board mounting portion 602 in the front view left and right to the left. And a circular opening 607 for a speaker, which penetrates forward and backward on the lower left side in a front view of the game board mounting portion 602 and which faces the speaker unit 920 in the board unit 900 forward. And are equipped with.

Further, the main body frame 4 extends backward from the right side of the game board insertion opening 601 in a plate shape, and the locking unit 700 is attached to the right side surface thereof, and the back cover 980 is rotatably attached to the rear end thereof. And a rearward extending portion 608. Further, the main body frame 4 is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower end portions at the left end in front view on the rear surface, and has an upper hinge attachment portion 609 and a lower hinge for attaching the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. A mounting portion 610 is provided.

Further, the main body frame 4 is rotatably attached to an opening cover 615 that closes the connection opening 606 so as to be openable and closable, and a position slightly lower than the left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 in a front view, The game board lock member 616 capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 601 is provided.

[4-2. Body frame upper hinge member and body frame lower hinge member]
The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 609 and the lower hinge mounting portion 610 of the main body frame 4.

The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 includes an upper hinge main body 621 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent downward in an L shape, and a columnar shape protruding upward from a front end of the upper hinge main body 621. The main frame upper hinge pin 622 pivotally supported by the cage outer frame upper hinge member 60, and the upper hinge main body 621 penetrates on the left side of the main frame upper hinge pin 622 in a front view, and pivotally supports the door frame upper hinge member 140. And an upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame. The body frame side upper hinge member 620 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 of the body frame 4 at a portion of the upper hinge body 621 that is bent downward.

The main body frame side lower hinge member 640 penetrates up and down at a front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 and a lower hinge first main body 641 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. An outer frame lower hinge hole (not shown) axially supported by the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and a flat plate that is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 641 and extends horizontally. -Shaped plate material is bent upward in an L-shape to penetrate the lower hinge second main body 643 and the front end of the lower hinge second main body 643 up and down so that the lower hinge member 150 of the door frame 3 on the door frame side is opened. A door frame lower hinge hole 644 for pivotally supporting the door frame and a door frame lower hinge hole 644 in a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643 extend rearward from the left end and extend upward. And a restriction piece 645 for restricting the rotation range of No. 3 of FIG.

The lower hinge second main body 643 has a horizontally extending portion with a certain space above the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 641 and a portion bent upward has a lower hinge first portion. The main body 641 is in contact with the front surface of the upwardly bent portion. The main body side lower hinge member 640 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 610 of the main body frame 4 at a portion where the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge second main body 643 are bent upward.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The reinforcing frame 660 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in a plan view whose right side is open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. Further, in the reinforcing frame 660, on the rear side of the portion extending to the right from the front end, the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 601 of the main body frame base 600 is restricted from moving forward and downward. A pair of left positioning members 661 are attached vertically apart from each other.

This reinforcement frame 660 can reinforce the hinge side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600, and from the left side through the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 into the main body frame 4 (game board 5). It is possible to prevent unauthorized insertion of tools.

[4-4. Ball launcher]
The ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58, 60 and 61. The ball launching device 680 is a device for driving the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. In the ball launching device 680, the driving strength of the game ball changes according to the turning angle of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launching device 680 is mounted on the launching device mounting portion 604 of the body frame base 600, and a flat plate-shaped launching base 681. A firing solenoid 682 consisting of a rotary solenoid penetrating and extending forward, a batting mallet 683 having a base end attached to the rotation axis of the firing solenoid 682, and a diagonally upward leftward extension from the vicinity of the tip of the batting mallet 683. It is equipped with a launch rail 684 which is attached to the front surface of the launch base 681 and on which a game ball can roll.

In this ball launching device 680, the game balls are supplied from the ball feeding unit 540 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 684, and the game balls are supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 684. Then, when the handle lever 504 is rotated, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with a strength according to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball is hit by the hitting mallet 683. Then, the game ball hit by the hitting mallet 683 is guided into the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 684 and is driven into the game area 5a.

In addition, when the hit game ball does not reach within the game area 5a due to the hitting strength of the game ball or the like, between the launch rail 684 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002). From the above, it falls to the foul ball receiving port 530 of the foul cover unit 520 below, passes through the foul cover unit 520, and is discharged to the lower tray 202.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the main body frame 4 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61. The locking unit 700 of the present embodiment is attached to the main body frame 4, and can lock the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 includes a unit base 701 that is attached to the right side surface of the rearward extension 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extends vertically, and a plurality of locking units 700 that project forward from the unit base 701 and can be locked with the door frame 3. Door frame hooks 702, a plurality of outer frame hooks 703 projecting rearward from the unit base 701 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and a columnar projecting forward from the lower portion of the unit base 701 to the front side. A key cylinder 710 that unlocks either the door frame hook 702 or the outer frame hook 703 depending on the direction of rotation of the inserted unlocking key.

[4-6. Dispensing unit]
The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 73. 62 is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 63 is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the rear. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the back. 66A is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit. 68A is a perspective view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 68B is a perspective view of the dispensing device as seen from the rear. 69 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as disassembled and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 71(a) is a front view of the dispensing device, and FIG. 71(b) is a sectional view taken along line EE in (a). Further, FIG. 72(a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removing passage is closed by the ball removing movable piece in the dispensing device, and FIG. 72(b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removing passage is opened by the ball removing movable piece. Is. FIG. 73 is an explanatory view showing, in an enlarged manner, the portion of the payout blade in the payout device.

Further, FIG. 74(a) is a perspective view of the upper full-ball path unit in the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 74(b) is a perspective view of the upper full-ball path unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 75(a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper tank bulb path unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 75(b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper tank bulb path unit disassembled and seen from the rear. is there. Further, FIG. 76(a) is a perspective view of the lower full-ball path unit in the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 76(b) is a perspective view of the lower full-ball path unit as seen from the rear. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full-ball-ball path unit disassembled as seen from the front, and FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full-ball path unit disassembled as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 79(a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the taxiway opening/closing door is closed in the lower tank ball path unit, and FIG. 79(b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the taxiway opening/closing door is opened. .. FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full ball path unit. FIG. 81 is an explanatory view showing a taxiway opening/closing door of an embodiment different from those of FIGS. 76 to 80. Further, FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game balls in the payout unit.

As shown in FIG. 62, FIG. 63, etc., the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment is attached to an upper portion of the payout unit base 801 and an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. It is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802, which stores game balls supplied from the island facility of a game hall (not shown) that extends to the left and right and is opened upward. It is provided with a tank rail 803 extending left and right for guiding the game ball in the cage ball tank 802 to the left when viewed from the front. In the tank rail 803, while guiding the game balls to the left, they are aligned in two rows in the front and rear by the ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 82) hanging swingably from above.

Further, the payout unit 800 is mounted on the rear surface of the upper left side in the front view of the payout unit base 801, and guides the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and below the ball guide unit 820. A payout device 830 that is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 and pays out the game balls guided by the ball guiding unit 820 one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board housed in the payout control board box 950. , Are provided. From the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, game balls are distributed in two rows, and from the payout device 830, the game balls are paid out one by one.

Furthermore, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801, guides the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 to the lower side, and according to the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the game balls. Is discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank ball route unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801. A normal guiding path 861 for guiding the game ball forward to the front end to the through-ball passage 526 of the door frame 3 and a game ball discharged from the full tank discharge port 850e for guiding the game ball forward from the front end to the door frame 3 A guideway opening/closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end openings of the full tank guideway 862 and the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 that guide to the full tank receiving port 530, according to the opening and closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. And a lower full ball path unit 860 having a.

[4-6a. Sphere guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The ball guiding unit 820 includes a box-shaped front case 821 that extends vertically and has a rear side opened, a box-shaped rear case 822 that is attached to the rear side of the front case 821 and has a front side opened, and a front case. 821 and the rear case 822, which are mounted between the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and partition the front case 821 and the rear case 822. A rod-shaped shaft member 824 attached, and a pair of movable piece member front 825 and movable piece member rear 826 that are rotatably attached by the shaft member 824 and are respectively arranged in the front case and the rear case. A ball breakage detection sensor 827 mounted in the front case 821 and capable of detecting the rotational positions of the pair of movable piece member front 825 and the pair of movable piece member rear 826.

The front case 821 has a ball guide inlet 821a that allows the game ball to pass through at the upper portion of the right side surface and a ball guide outlet that allows the game ball to pass through at a position to the right of the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. 821b, the ball guide inlet 821a and the ball guide outlet 821b are connected to each other, and a guide passage 821c through which a game ball can flow is provided. The guide passage 821c extends obliquely from the ball guide inlet 821a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height from the guide portion 821d along the left side of the front case 821. It is composed of a detection portion 821e that extends straight downward to the vicinity, and a meandering portion 821f that extends in a meandering shape from the detection portion 821d to the left and right widths of the front case 821. Further, the front case 821 is provided with a cutout portion 821g on the wall on the right side in front view of the detection portion 821e in the guide passage 821c.

The rear case 822 has a ball guiding inlet 822a that is open to allow the game balls to pass in the upper portion of the right side surface, and a ball guiding outlet that is open to allow the game balls to pass to the right of the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. 822b, a ball guide inlet 822a and a ball guide outlet 822b are connected to each other, and a guide passage 822c through which a game ball can flow is provided. The guide passage 822c extends obliquely from the ball guide inlet 822a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of the height from the guide portion 822d along the left side of the rear case 822. It is composed of a detection portion 822e that extends straight downward to the vicinity, and a meandering portion 822f that extends in a meandering shape from the detection portion 822d to the left and right widths of the rear case 822. Further, the rear case 822 is provided with a cutout portion 822g on the wall on the right side in front view of the detection portion 822e in the guide passage 822c.

The rear case 822 is formed substantially symmetrically to the left and right with respect to the front case 821. The rear case 822 is formed so that the guide passage 821c and the guide passage 822c are aligned in the front-rear direction when the ball guide unit 820 is assembled. There is.

The shaft member 824 has front and rear ends attached to positions below the upper ends of the cutouts 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the guide passages 821c and 822c.

The movable piece member front 825 has a vertically extending flat plate-shaped movable piece 825a, a shaft hole 825b which penetrates the front and rear at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 825a and through which the shaft member 824 is inserted, and the movable piece 825a. An extending portion 825c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 825a at a right angle to the right surface of the movable piece 825a, the extending portion 825c and the movable piece 825a are connected to each other, and extends in a fan shape around the shaft hole 825b. The connecting portion 825d, the weight attaching portion 825e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the upper portion of the extending portion 825c and the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d, and has a through hole that penetrates back and forth, and the extending portion 825c. A detection piece 825f that extends outward from the right end in a flat plate shape and that can be detected by the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, and a flat plate shape that extends outward from a position near the movable piece 825a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d. And a stopper piece 825g.

When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 825b, the movable piece member front 825 is rotated by its own weight so that the weight attaching portion 825e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d is positioned immediately below the shaft hole 825b. Then, the movable piece 825a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in a state where the ball guiding unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 825d is inserted into the notch portion 821g of the front case 821, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is projected into the guiding passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g is The outer wall of the guide passage 821c (detection unit 821e) is in contact with the outer wall. The stopper piece 825g comes into contact with the outer wall of the guide passage 821c, so that the lower end of the movable piece 825a is restricted from further rotating in the direction of protruding into the guide passage 821c (left direction in front view). Further, when the lower end of the movable piece 825a is rotated in the direction of approaching the wall of the guide passage 821c (right direction when viewed from the front), the movable piece member front 825 causes the left side surface of the movable piece 825a to move toward the guide passage 821c. It matches the inside. In this state, the detection piece 825f in front of the movable piece member 825 is in a non-detection state with respect to the out-of-ball detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guide passage 821c, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 becomes non-detection.

The movable piece member rear 826 includes a movable piece 826a having a flat plate shape extending vertically, a shaft hole 826b through which the shaft member 824 is inserted and which penetrates forward and backward at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 826a, and the movable piece 826a. An extending portion 826c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 826a at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 826a, the extending portion 826c is connected to the movable piece 826a, and extends in a fan shape around the shaft hole 826b. The connecting portion 826d, the weight attaching portion 826e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the upper part of the extending portion 826c and the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d, and has a through hole that penetrates back and forth, and the extending portion 826c. A detection piece 826f that extends outward from the right end in a flat plate shape and can be detected by the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, and a flat plate shape that extends outward from a position near the movable piece 826a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d. And a stopper piece 826g.

When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 826b, the movable piece member rear 826 is rotated by its own weight so that the weight attaching portion 826e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d is positioned immediately below the shaft hole 826b. Then, the movable piece 826a extends obliquely downward from the shaft hole 826b. Therefore, when the ball guiding unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the notch portion 822g of the rear case 822, the lower end of the movable piece 826a projects into the guiding passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g is removed. The state is in contact with the outer wall of the guide passage 822c (detection unit 822e). The stopper piece 826g comes into contact with the outer wall of the guide passage 822c, so that the lower end of the movable piece 826a is restricted from further rotating in the direction of protruding into the guide passage 822c (left direction in front view). Further, when the lower end of the movable piece 826a is rotated in the direction of approaching the wall of the guide passage 822c (right direction when viewed from the front), the movable piece member front 826 causes the left side surface of the movable piece 826a to move toward the guide passage 822c. It matches the inside. In this state, the detection piece 826f in front of the movable piece member 826 is not detected by the out-of-ball detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guide passage 822c, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 becomes non-detection.

The ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment is supplied in a state in which a plurality of game balls are lined up in a row by the tank rail 803, and the front case 821 and the rear case are arranged in a state where the game balls are lined up in a row. By 822, it is possible to guide the dispensing device 830 below in a two-row state (see FIG. 82). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are partitioned by the partition plate 823, the game balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c and 822c do not interfere with each other and can flow well. You can

Further, when the game sphere flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c of the ball guiding unit 820, the game sphere comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a are formed. The front movable piece member 825 and the rear movable piece member 826 rotate in a direction coinciding with the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821c and 822c. As a result, the detection pieces 825f, 826f of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 are not detected by the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, and it is understood that there is a game ball in the guide passages 821c, 822c.

When the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guiding unit 820 pays out the game balls or the like, the game balls in the guide passages 821c and 822c will flow downstream. When the game ball flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c, the momentum of the game ball flowing through the introduction parts 821d and 822d becomes strong, and the game ball flowing through the introduction parts 821d and 822d is a movable piece above the detection parts 821e and 822e. It bounces back to the side of 825a, 826a and comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Since the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate due to the contact of the game ball, the vibrations cause the movable pieces 825a and 826a to be sandwiched or intruded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the cutouts 821g and 822g of the guide passages 821c and 822c. Dirt, dust, and the like that have accumulated can be removed, and the movable pieces 825 and 826a can satisfactorily rotate due to their own weight and the like.

Further, the ball guiding unit 820 is configured to detect the game balls circulating in the respective guiding passages 821c and 822c by the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member 826, respectively, and the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member front 825. Since each of the detection pieces 825f and 826f after the one-side member 826 is detected by the one ball breakage detection sensor 827, when the game balls in any of the guide passages 821c and 822c are exhausted, the movable one side member 825 is detected. Or, the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member rear 826 rotate so as to project into the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the detection pieces 825f and 826f on the side where the game ball has disappeared are detected by the out-of-ball detection sensor 827. .. Therefore, it is possible to detect the out-of-ball of the game ball early, so that the game ball can be quickly replenished, and the time when the game is interrupted is shortened as much as possible, thereby reducing the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

Furthermore, by screwing and attaching metal screws as weights to the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, the weights of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 and the weight are set. With the above, the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily rotated in the directions projecting into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached outside the guide passages 821c and 822c so that the lower ends thereof project into the guide passages 821c and 822c, the dust inside the guide passages 821c and 822c is reduced. No dust or the like adheres to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a, 826a rotate toward the walls of the guide passages 821c, 822c, dust, dust, and the like do not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a, 826a and the walls, so that the self-weight etc. With this, it is possible to satisfactorily rotate, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the movable pieces 825a and 826a do not rotate.

In this way, the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment has movable pieces 825a, 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 whose lower end projects into the guiding passages 821c, 822c through which the game balls flow due to their own weight. By attaching a weight made of a metal screw to the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e on the opposite side of the surface contacting the game ball, the movable piece 825a is moved by the weight of the weight and the weight of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member 826. , 826a can be easily rotated (projected) into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passage 822c so that the lower ends thereof project into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt inside the guide passages 821c and 822c are not formed. Does not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a, 826a rotate toward the walls of the guide passages 821c, 822c, dust, dust, and the like do not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a, 826a and the walls, so that the self-weight etc. This allows the movable pieces 825a and 826 (the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826) to be prevented from rotating, thereby preventing a problem from occurring.

Further, since the metal screw as the weight is screwed into the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e which are formed as the through holes, the weight is attached even if the front movable piece member 825 and the rear movable piece member 826 are frequently rotated. The movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 (weight attachment portions 825e, 826e) do not come off, and the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 can be maintained in a good state for a long time. .. In addition, the weight can be easily attached to the front movable piece member 825 and the rear movable piece member 826 by simply screwing a metal screw into the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e, thus simplifying the work of attaching the weight. Therefore, the cost for assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, in the guide passages 821c and 822c, since the movable pieces 825a and 825c are provided with an introduction portion 822d that guides the game ball toward the movable pieces 825a and 825c, on the upstream side of the site where the movable pieces 825a and 825c project inside, the guide is provided. By the game ball flowing in the passages 821c and 822c, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a, so that the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be vibrated by the contact of the game balls. Therefore, the vibrations of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can remove dust, dust, and the like that are sandwiched between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c, and that are invaded. The front one piece member 825 and the rear one piece movable piece 826 can be rotated favorably.

Therefore, since the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 can be rotated favorably, the state (presence or absence) of the game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected, and the game ball It is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects due to erroneous detection and the like. In addition, even if the gaming balls supplied to the payout device 830 disappear from the guide passages 821c and 822c, it is possible to reliably detect the presence or absence of the guide passages 821c and 822c through the movable pieces 825a and 826a. The game balls can be replenished to the player, and the time during which the game is interrupted can be shortened as much as possible, so that the interest of the player can be prevented from decreasing.

[4-6b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 830 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 73. The payout device 830 has a box-like shape with an open rear side, and a payout opening 831a in which a game ball is opened in the center of the upper surface in the left-right direction and a game ball is opened in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the bottom surface. A payout exit 831b, a ball removal exit 831c in which a game ball is opened near the right end in a front view on the bottom surface, and a payout passage 831d that communicates the payout entrance 831a and the payout exit 831b. , And a front box 831 having a ball removal passage 831e that branches from the middle of the payout passage 831d and communicates with the ball removal outlet 831c and through which game balls can flow, and is attached to the rear side of the front box 831. A box-like opening with the front side open, and a payout opening 832a in the center of the top surface that allows the game ball to pass through in the left-right direction, and a payout in the bottom surface that allows the game ball to pass near the left end in front view. An outlet 832b, a ball removal outlet 832c that is open in the vicinity of the right end of the bottom surface when viewed from the front, a payout passage 832d that communicates the payout opening 832a and the payout exit 832b, and payouts. A rear box 832 is provided which has a ball removal passage 832e that branches from the middle of the passage 832d and communicates with the ball removal outlet 832c and through which game balls can flow.

In addition, the dispensing device 830 is attached to the front side of the front box 831 and has a shallow box-shaped front cover 833 whose rear side is open, and the rotation shaft which is attached to the front box 831 and penetrates the front box 831. And a drive motor 834 attached to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 834, and the drive gear 835 meshes with each other so that the front box 831 and the front cover 833 can rotate. A spur gear-shaped intermediate gear 836 attached to the intermediate gear 836, a driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and a driven gear 837 rotatably passing therethrough, the front end of which is attached to the front cover 833 and A shaft member 838 whose end penetrates the front box 831 and is attached to the rear box 832, and a shaft member 838 which is rotatably mounted through the shaft member 837 and is provided with payout passages 831d and 832d of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. A payout blade 839 that is disposed inside and rotates integrally with the driven gear 837; and a blade rotation detection sensor 840 that is mounted between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839. ing.

Further, the dispensing device 830 is mounted between the front box 831 and the rear box 832, and has a flat partition plate 841 for partitioning the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832, and the front box 831. And a rear box 832, which is attached between the payout vane 839 and the payout detection sensor 842, which detects the game balls discharged from the payout exits 831b and 832b, and the payout passages 831d and 832d. 831e and 832e are rotatably attached by a front box 831 and a rear box 832 at a branching point, and a ball removing movable piece 843 that can close the ball removing passages 831e and 832e and the front box 831 and the rear box 831. The box 832 is provided with a ball removing lever 844 that is attached so as to be slidable up and down on the right side of the front view and that allows the ball removing movable piece 843 to rotate or not rotate.

The payout passage 831d of the front box 831 extends obliquely to the lower right in a front view from the payout entrance 831a toward the ball outlet 831c, and is downward at a height about 1/3 of the total height of the front box 831. Bends so as to extend vertically to the left, and bends so as to extend substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the entire height, and then extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 of the left and right widths of the front box 831 from the left end. As described above, it is bent in a crank shape so as to be located immediately above the dispensing outlet 831b at a height about 1/4 of the bottom of the front box 831 and extends vertically to the dispensing outlet 831b. The payout vane 839 is arranged at a portion bent in a crank shape in the payout passage 831d.

On the other hand, the ball-out passage 831e is a mode in which the portion of the payout passage 831d that extends obliquely from the payout opening 831a to the lower right is further extended, and the height from the upper surface is about 1/3 of the total height of the front box 831. There are branches up to the height near the center.

Further, the front box 831 is formed in an upper part of the right side surface in front view, and a guide shelf 831f projecting rearward as it goes downward in a portion extending vertically toward the payout outlet 831b in the payout passage 831d. And a lever mounting portion 831g for mounting the ball removing lever 844 slidably up and down.

The payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 extends obliquely to the lower right in a front view from the payout entrance 832a toward the ball outlet 832c, and is downward at a height of about ⅓ of the total height of the rear box 832. Bends so as to extend vertically, and bends so as to extend substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the overall height, and then extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 of the left and right widths of the rear box 832. As described above, it is bent in a crank shape so as to be located immediately above the dispensing outlet 832b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom with respect to the entire height of the rear box 832 and extends vertically to the dispensing outlet 832b. The payout vane 839 is arranged at a portion bent in a crank shape in the payout passage 832d.

On the other hand, the ball removal passage 832e is a form in which the portion of the delivery passage 832d that extends obliquely downward and to the right from the delivery opening 832a is further extended, and the height from the upper surface is approximately 1/3 of the total height of the rear box 832. There are branches up to the height near the center.

Further, the rear box 832 is formed at a portion vertically extending toward the dispensing outlet 832b in the dispensing passage 832d, and a guide shelf 832f projecting forward as it goes downward, and an upper part of the right side surface in front view. And a lever mounting portion 832g for mounting the ball removing lever 844 slidably up and down.

The payout passages 831d and 832d and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e of the front box 831 and the back box 832 are formed in the same shape. The dispensing passages 831d and 832d are partitioned by a partition plate 841 up to the upstream side of the portion where the dispensing blade 839 is arranged. Further, a payout detection sensor 842 is attached between the guide shelves 831f and 832f and the payout outlets 831b and 832b. In other words, the game ball that has flowed through the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the game ball that has flowed through the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 are located before and after the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the respective guide shelves 831f and 832f. The payout detection sensor 842 is moved to the vicinity of the boundary and is detected.

The driven gear 837 radially protrudes from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a at intervals of an angle of 60 degrees from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840. It is provided with a plurality of detection pieces 837b and a connecting portion 837c projecting rearward from the center of the gear portion 837a in a cylindrical shape and having irregularities formed on the peripheral surface at the rear end and capable of being connected to the payout blade 839. ..

The payout blade 839 extends in the front-rear cylindrical shape and has a base tubular portion 839a through which the shaft member 838 is inserted, and a base tubular portion 839a protruding from the front end of the base tubular portion 839a at a constant interval in the circumferential direction in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the base tubular portion 839a. A plurality of (three) front blades 839b and a plurality of front blades 839b projecting in the direction orthogonal to the axis of the base tubular portion 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction so that the front blade 839b is staggered from the rear end. 3) The rear blade 839c and the connected portion that is formed in a tubular shape from the front end of the base tubular portion 839a to the front and has an unevenness that is connectable to the connecting portion 387c of the driven gear 837 on the peripheral surface of the front end. 839d.

Each of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c of the payout blade 839 is provided at three intervals at an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the rear blade 839c and the rear blade 839c are arranged so as to be staggered. It is offset at an angle of 60 degrees in the direction and extends outward. In the payout vane 839 of the present embodiment, the three front vanes 839b (rear vanes 839c) are connected by an arc depressed toward the center side, and the diameter of the arc is the same as or slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c), a ball storage portion 839e that can store only one game ball is formed.

Further, the three front blades 839b and the rear blade 839c are formed such that their outer diameters D1 around the axis of the base tubular portion 839a are 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. Further, the diameter D2 about the axis of the base tubular portion 839a up to the portion closest to the axis of the base tubular portion 839a in the arcuate portion (sphere housing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (the rear blades 839c). Is formed to be about 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball (see FIG. 73). That is, the depth [(diameter D1−diameter D2)/2] from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c to the most recessed portion of the sphere accommodating portion 839e is 0.1 to 0. It is quadrupled.

Therefore, about 3/10 (between 1/4 and 1/3) of the outer circumference of the game ball can be held by the arcuate portion (ball housing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blade 839c). it can. In other words, the depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the game ball can be accommodated. Thereby, the game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be quickly accommodated between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) (ball accommodating portion 839e).

In the dispensing blade 839 of the present embodiment, the front blade 839b is located in the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the trailing blade 839c is located in the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832 in a state where the dispensing device 830 is assembled. The game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be paid out, respectively. Further, the payout blade 839 is arranged in the payout passages 831d and 832d at a portion that is bent in a crank shape below the center of the total height of the front box 821 and the rear box 832. Specifically, in the payout passages 831d and 832d, the center of rotation of the payout vane 839 is located immediately below the portion vertically extending downward from the vicinity of the center of the total height of the front box 821 and the rear box 832. Then, in the crank-shaped bent portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d, the wall (inner wall) on the side far from the payout blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the payout blade 839, and from the outer circumference of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It is formed in an arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball (see FIG. 62). In this embodiment, the distance S is set to 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In other words, the distance from the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e to the arcuate portion of the payout passages 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the game ball. ..

As a result, the payout device 830 can pass through the crank-shaped bent portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d when the game balls flowing down onto the payout blade 839 come into contact with the outer circumferences of the front blades 839b and 839c. Therefore, it is not discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. On the other hand, when the game ball is stored in the ball storage portion 839e, it moves with the rotation of the payout blade 839, and can pass through the crank-shaped bent portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d, and from the payout exits 831b and 832b. It is released downward.

Further, in the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c is set to about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball, and the outer diameter of the game ball is set to 1 by the ball housing portion 839e. Since the depth of /7 to 1/4 is accommodated, the time required for accommodating the game balls can be shortened while the outer diameter of the payout blade 839 is made as small as possible. Thereby, even if the payout blade 839 is rotated quickly, the game ball can be stored in the ball storage portion 839e and sent to the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Therefore, the number of payouts of game balls per unit time can be increased as compared with the conventional case, and the time taken to pay out the game balls can be shortened.

The ball-removable movable piece 843 extends vertically and longitudinally in a plate shape, and has a body portion 843a whose lower portion is bent and is formed in a character shape in a front view, and a cylindrical portion extending forward and backward at an upper end of the body portion 843a. A shaft cylinder portion 843b, both ends of which are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832, a projecting portion 843c projecting from an upper portion of an outer side surface of the main body portion 843a bent in a V shape, and a main body portion 843c. And a weight attachment portion 843d (see FIG. 72) formed of a through hole penetrating forward and backward in a lower portion bent in a V shape.

In the state where the dispensing device 830 is assembled, the ball-removing movable piece 843 is oriented such that the lower portion of the main body portion 843a extends obliquely to the lower left when viewed from the front, and the shaft cylinder portion 843b at the upper end is configured to dispense the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the passages 831d and 832d, it is possible to rotate at a position that extends obliquely from the payout entrances 831a and 832a to the lower right in the front view, and at a position outside the wall on the right side in the front view that is slightly above the part that bends downward. Installed on.

In the normal state, the dispensing device 830 of the present embodiment is in a state in which the ball-pulling lever 844 is slid downward, and the lower part of the ball-pulling lever 844 hits the protrusion 843c of the ball-pulling movable piece 843 from the right side in front view. Touching. As a result, the ball-removable movable piece 843 is restricted from rotating counterclockwise in a front view (see FIG. 72A).

In this normal state, in the main body portion 843a of the ball-moving movable piece 843 that is bent in a dogleg shape, the upper side of the bent portion extends vertically, and the lower side of the bent portion is diagonally lower left in front view. Extending to. The lower end of the main body portion 843a is located in the vicinity of the portion where the payout passages 831d and 832d and the ball passage passages 831e and 832e branch. Therefore, the ball-removing movable piece 843 (main body 843a) closes the ball-removing passages 831e and 832e, and the left-side surface of the main body 843a forms part of the walls of the payout passages 831d and 832d. doing.

In the normal state, the ball-stripping movable piece 843 of the present embodiment is formed such that the center of gravity of the ball-shedding movable piece 843 is located on the left side in a front view of a vertical line passing through the center of the shaft tube portion 843b. Although a force to rotate counterclockwise as viewed from the front is exerted, a normal state is maintained because the counterclockwise rotation is restricted by the ball pulling lever 844.

When the ball removing lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower part of the ball removing lever 844 is separated from the protruding portion 843c of the ball removing movable piece 843, and the ball removing movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front. Movement restrictions are lifted. Therefore, the ball-removing movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise by its own weight so that the center of gravity is located immediately below the shaft tube portion 843b. It should be noted that the ball-removable movable piece 843 should be rotated counterclockwise until the right side surface of the lower portion of the main body section 843a comes into contact with the left side surfaces of the members forming the right side surfaces of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (See FIG. 61(b)). As a result, the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are opened, and the game balls that have entered from the payout entrances 831a and 832a come into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d and 832d. The ball removing movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front to open the ball removing passages 831e and 832e, flows through the opened ball removing passages 831e and 832e, and is discharged downward from the ball removing outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

In the present embodiment, since the ball-moving movable piece 843 is provided with the weight attaching portion 843d, the weight of the metal screw is screwed into the weight attaching portion 843d so as to slide the ball-removing lever 844 upward. Then, when the regulation of the counterclockwise rotation in front view is released, the lower end of the ball-removing movable piece 843 is projected into the ball-removing passages 381e and 832e by the weight of the ball-removing movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. Direction (counterclockwise when viewed from the front) can be easily rotated.

Further, in a normal state in which the ball pulling lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e, the game ball that has entered from the payout ports 831a and 832a is transferred to the main body portion 843a of the ball pulling movable piece 843. Since they are in contact with each other, the ball-removing movable piece 843 can be vibrated by the contact of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to remove dust, dust, or the like, which is sandwiched between the lower end of the ball-removing movable piece 843 and the inner surfaces of the ball-removing passages 831e and 832e, by the vibration of the ball-removing movable piece 843. It is possible to prevent the ball-removing movable piece 843 from being unable to rotate due to biting of dust or the like.

Further, since the metal screw as the weight can be screwed into and attached to the weight attaching portion 843d formed as the through hole, even if the ball removing movable piece 843 is frequently rotated, the weight is removed by the ball removing movable piece 843. The ball-removing movable piece 843 can be maintained in a good state for a long period of time without coming off from the (weight attachment portion 843d). Further, since the weight can be easily attached to the ball-removing movable piece 843 simply by screwing a metal screw into the weight attaching portion 843d, the labor for attaching the weight can be simplified and the pachinko machine 1 can be assembled. The cost related to can be reduced.

By the way, if the ball removing passages 831e and 832e are closed for a long period of time by the ball removing movable piece 843, fine dust adheres to the rotating shaft of the ball removing movable piece 843 or the rotating shaft rusts, and The removal movable piece 843 may be difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the game balls that have entered from the payout ports 831a and 832a come into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball-removing movable piece 843, the ball-removing movable piece 843 removes the ball-removing passage 831e. , 832e from the closed state, when the ball pulling lever 844 for releasing the closing is slid upward and unlocked, the game ball comes into contact with the ball removing movable piece 843, so that by the impact of the contact. The ball-removing movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball-removing passages 831e and 832e can be reliably opened.

Therefore, when the ball removal lever 844 is operated to open the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, the ball removal movable piece 843 can rotate favorably, and thus the game ball removal work can be reliably performed. It is possible to improve workability in maintenance and the like.

[4-6c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 850 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. The upper tank bulb path unit 850 is attached to a position below the payout device 830 in the payout unit base 801. This upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the payout unit base 801 and has a box-shaped upper full tank base 851, and the upper full tank base 851 is attached to the rear side and the front side is open. A box-shaped upper full tank cover 852 and a dispensing device pressing member 853 rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper full cover 852 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 830 upward are provided.

Further, the upper tank ball path unit 850 is an upper payout ball receiving port 850a that is open upward so that a game ball can pass through at the left side portion from the left-right center in the front view on the upper surface, and the right side from the left-right center in the front view on the upper surface. The upper ball removal inlet 850b, which is open upward so that the game balls can pass in the region, and is formed between the upper full tank base 851 and the upper full tank cover 852, and received by the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. An upper sphere storage passage 850c of a predetermined size through which game balls circulate, a normal discharge opening 850d that opens downward at a position immediately below the upper payout sphere receiving opening 850a at the lower end of the upper sphere storage passage 850c, and the upper sphere storage A full tank discharge port 850e that opens downward at a position excluding the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the passage 850c, and an upper ball storage passage that projects upward from between the normal discharge port 850d and the full tank discharge port 850e. And a partition 850f partitioning the lower part inside 850c into right and left.

In addition, the upper full ball passage unit 850, the upper ball removal passage 850g that guides the game ball that has entered from the upper ball removal inlet 850b downward, and the upper portion that opens downward at the lower end of the upper ball removal passage 850g. And a ball removal outlet 850h. The upper tank full ball path unit 850 has a normal discharge port 850d, a full tank discharge port 850e, and an upper ball discharge outlet 850h arranged in order from the left side in a front view, and opens downward. The upper tank full ball path unit 850 includes a back cover mounting portion 854 for mounting the back cover 980 on the right end of the upper tank base 851.

In the state in which the upper full tank ball path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is located immediately below the payout port 831b of the payout device 830, and the upper ball extracting port 850b is It is located directly below the ball removal outlet 831c of the dispensing device 830. Further, in the state where the upper full-ball path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, the normal discharge port 850d, the full-color discharge port 850e, and the upper-ball removal port 850h are the normal guideways of the lower full-ball path unit 860. Each of 861, the full tank guide path 862, and the lower ball removing guide path 865 has an opening right above the rear end opening (see FIG. 82).

In the upper tank ball path unit 850, the game balls that are paid out by the payout device 830 and are discharged downward from the payout outlet 831b enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. In a state where the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c is not closed, the game ball that has entered the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is opened immediately below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. It is emitted from the normal emission port 850d.

When the upper tray 201 of the door frame 3 is filled with game balls and cannot store the game balls, and further, the normal guideway 861 of the lower tank ball path unit 860 is filled with the game balls, it is normally released. The outlet 850d is closed. When the game ball enters the upper ball storage passage 850c in this state, it is stored above the normal discharge port 850d. Then, when the amount of game balls stored above the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than the partition 850f, the game ball newly entering the upper ball storage passage 850c gets over the partition 850f and becomes full. It will be discharged downward from the tank discharge port 850e, and will be sent to the lower plate 202 through the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full tank ball path unit 860.

In this way, the upper tank ball path unit 850 automatically lowers the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper plate 201 in accordance with the amount of the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 in the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the dish 202.

[4-6d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower tank ball path unit 860 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81. The lower tank full ball path unit 860 is attached to the lower side of the upper tank ball path unit 850 in the payout unit base 801. The lower tank ball path unit 860 is a normal guide path 861 for guiding the game ball discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper tank ball path unit 850 forward and guiding it from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3. And, a full tank guide path 862 that guides the game balls discharged from the full tank discharge port 850e of the upper tank ball path unit 850 to the front and guides the game balls to the full tank receiver 530 of the door frame 3 from the front end, normally. A guideway opening/closing door 863 that opens and closes front end openings of the guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 in accordance with opening and closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and a guideway opening/closing door 863 that is a normal guideway 861 and a full tank guideway 862. And a closing spring 864 that urges the front end opening in a direction to close the opening.

In addition, the lower full tank path unit 860 guides the game balls emitted from the upper ball removal outlet 850h of the upper full ball path unit 850 to the front, and from the center right end in the front-rear direction on the board unit base 910 of the board unit 900. A lower ball guide path 865 for discharging to

In the lower tank full ball path unit 860, a normal guide path 861, a full tank guide path 862, and a lower ball guide path 865 are sequentially arranged from the left side to the right side in a front view. The normal guide path 861, the full tank guide path 862, and the lower ball removing guide path 865 have rear ends that open upward. Further, the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 have a width in which a plurality of game balls are arranged on the left and right, and extend forward to the vicinity of the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side becomes low. Further, the full tank guideway 862 extends forward at a position lower than the normal guideway 861. The normal guide path 861, the full guide path 862, and the lower ball guide path 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 that are vertically separable, as shown in the drawing.

The guide path opening/closing door 863 is rotatably attached to the front end of the lower case 867 between the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862, and is closed by a closing spring 864 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Being energized. More specifically, at the front end of the lower tank ball path unit 860, the full tank guide path 862 opened to the right of the front end opening of the normal guide path 861 in front view is one game with respect to the normal guide path 861. It is placed at a position lower by the height of the ball. The guideway opening/closing door 863 is attached to the lower side of the normal guideway 861 and on the left side of the full tank guideway 862 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

The taxiway opening/closing door 863 includes a disk-shaped base portion 863a that is rotatably attached, and a first door plate portion 863b that extends from the base portion 863a obliquely to the upper left side in a flat plate shape and can close the front end opening of the taxiway channel 861. A second door plate portion 863c extending from the base portion 863a to the right side in a flat plate shape and capable of closing the front end opening of the full tank guideway 862, and an extending portion 863d extending from the base portion 863a to the lower left side in a flat plate shape. , And an operating projection 863e that projects forward from the front surface of the tip of the extending portion 863d and that can come into contact with the door opening/closing abutting portion 537 of the foul cover unit 520 in the door frame 3.

Here, closing the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 does not need to seal the openings, and it suffices that the game ball cannot pass through. The operating protrusion 863e is formed in a short arc shape centering on the base 863a when viewed from the front, and the front end face is inclined so as to protrude forward as it approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. doing.

The guide path opening/closing door 863 is biased in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by the closing spring 864, and the second door plate portion 863c is provided below the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862 at the front end of the lower cover 867. By contacting the boss portion 867a protruding forward, the clockwise rotation is restricted.

In the lower full ball path unit 860 of the present embodiment, the front end of the lower full ball path unit 860 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1 has a through ball passage 526, a full ball receptacle 530, and a door opening/closing member in the foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3. It is attached at a position facing the contact portion 537 (see FIG. 80). The guideway opening/closing door 863 has no contact with the operating protrusion 863e when the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the guideway opening/closing door 863 is biased by the closing spring 864. Is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the second door plate portion 863c is stopped in a state of being in contact with the boss portion 867a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are located in front of the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862, and close the front end openings (FIG. 79). (See (a)). Therefore, in this state, the game ball in the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 cannot move forward from the front end opening, and even if the door frame 3 is opened, the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guide No game balls will spill out of the path 862.

Then, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening/closing abutting portion 537 of the foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front end surface of the actuating protrusion 863e of the guideway opening/closing door 863 to operate. Due to the inclination of the front end surface of the protrusion 863e, a force acts against the biasing force of the closing spring 864 to rotate the guide path opening/closing door 863 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. As a result, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c that have closed the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 rotate in the direction away from the front end opening, and the normal guide path 861. Also, the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862 is opened (see FIG. 79(b)). In this state, as shown in the drawing, the first door plate portion 863b is located below the front end opening of the normal guideway 861 and the second door plate portion 863c is located above the front end opening of the full tank guideway 862. ..

When the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 are opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal guide path 861 and the full tank path are full. The penetrating ball passage 526 and the full tank receiving port 528 of the foul cover unit 520 in the door frame 3 are located on the front side of the front end opening of the guide path 862. The game ball can be handed over to the ball passage 526 and the full tank receiving port 528 side.

In this way, the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 are changed in the vertical direction, and the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 are opened by rotating the guide path opening/closing door 863. Since the door is opened and closed, the operating range of the guideway opening/closing door 863 can be narrowed as much as possible, and the opening/closing mechanism for the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 can be downsized. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively widened, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be used more effectively.

In the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 201 of the door frame 3 is filled with the game balls, and the game balls cannot be discharged to the upper plate 201. When is paid out, the game balls can be stored until the inside of the normal guide path 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with the game balls. Then, when the game ball is further paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the normal guideway 861 is filled with the game ball, the game ball is normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper tank ball path unit 850. If it stays above the outlet 850d and exceeds the partition 850f, it will flow to the full tank discharge port 850e side, and from the full tank discharge port 850e, the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full tank ball path unit 860, The payout of game balls is automatically switched to the lower plate 202 through the foul cover unit 520. After that, when the game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830 and the lower plate 202 in addition to the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls and cannot be supplied to the lower plate 202, the foul cover unit 520. The game balls are stored in the storage passage 533. When the movable balls 534 are rotated by the game balls being stored in the storage passage 533 and detected by the full tank detection sensor 535, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are full of game balls. Is notified, and the payout of the game balls by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 534 by the full tank detection sensor 535 is released.

The stop of the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 in response to the detection of the movable piece 534 by the full tank detection sensor 535, for example, the game ball is stored until the movable piece 534 is detected in the storage passage 533 of the foul cover unit 520. The number of fillings of the storage passage 533 on the upstream side, the full tank guiding passage 862 of the lower full tank ball path unit 860, and the upper spherical storage passage 850c of the upper full ball ball path unit 850 in the state of being maintained. When the game ball is paid out, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 may be stopped. As a result, it is possible to store more game balls than the conventional pachinko machine, so in the gaming state where a large number of game balls are paid out, such as during a big hit game, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are paid out by the game balls being paid out. It is possible to reduce the need to worry about being full of game balls, and allow the player to concentrate on the big hit game and entertain.

As described above, in the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment, it is possible to store more game balls than the conventional pachinko machine in the upper tank ball path unit 850 and the lower tank ball path unit 860. When a lot of game balls are stored in the upper tank full ball path unit 850 and the lower tank full ball path unit 860 when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the frame 4, the load of these game balls is normally guided. This greatly affects the guideway opening/closing door 863 that closes the front end openings of the passage 861 and the full tank guideway 862, and the guideway opening/closing door 863 may be easily damaged. Therefore, the guideway opening/closing door 870 of the embodiment as shown in FIG. 81 may be used.

A guideway opening/closing door 870 shown in FIG. 81 is a disc-shaped base 870a that is rotatably attached, and a first door that extends from the base 870a obliquely to the upper left side in a flat plate shape and that can close the front end opening of the normal guideway 861. A plate portion 870b, a second door plate portion 870c extending from the base portion 870a to the right side in a flat plate shape and capable of closing the front end opening of the full tank guideway 862, and an extension extending from the base portion 870a to a diagonally lower left side in a flat plate shape. An extension (not shown) and an operation protrusion 870e that protrudes forward from the front surface of the tip of the extension and is capable of contacting the door opening/closing contact 537 of the foul cover unit 520 in the door frame 3 are provided. ing. Further, the guideway opening/closing door 870 is provided with a plurality of recesses 870 in which a part of the game balls fits on the rear surfaces of the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c.

As illustrated, the rear surfaces of the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c of the taxiway opening/closing door 870 are obliquely inclined so as to move backward as the distance from the base portion 870a increases. Therefore, when the game ball rolling forward in the normal guideway 861 or the full guideway 862 comes into contact with the rear surface of the first door plate portion 870b or the second door plate portion 870c, the inclination of the rear surface causes It will roll to the base portion 870a side, and the game balls stored in the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 can be moved to the base portion 870a side. Thereby, the load of the game balls stored in the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 is applied to the base portion 870a attached to the lower case 867 in the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c. Since the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c are made to act in a close position, the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c are less likely to be deformed, and the taxiway opening/closing door 870 is less likely to be damaged, and durability can be improved.

Further, as shown in the drawing, the plurality of recesses 870d of the guideway opening/closing door 870 are held at positions where the game balls are close to the base portion 870a on the rear surfaces of the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c. Are arranged as follows. As a result, by fitting the game ball that has flowed through the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 into the recess 870d, the game ball can be reliably positioned closer to the base portion 870a, and the same as above. It is possible to obtain the action and effect.

Although not shown, the concave portion 870d extends in an arc shape around the base portion 870a so that the guideway opening/closing door 870 can be rotated even when the game ball is fitted.

In this case, it is desirable that the left and right widths W of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 be different from an integral multiple of the diameter of the game ball. As a result, with respect to the game balls that are brought closer to the base 870a side by the rear surfaces of the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c, the game balls that are in contact with the rear side are the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path. When contacting the inner wall on the left and right sides of 862, the direction of the load acting from the game ball on the rear side is directed diagonally forward toward the base portion 870a side, and the load is applied to the base portion 870a side attached to the case 867. Can be made to act in large numbers, and the above-described effects can be reliably exhibited.

[4-7. Board unit]
The board unit 900 of the body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61. The board unit 900 of the body frame 4 has a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600, and a bass speaker inside the board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 in front view. The speaker unit 920, the power supply board box 930 in which the power supply board is housed in the rear side of the board unit base 910, which is mounted on the right side when viewed from the front, and the interface control inside which is installed in the rear side of the speaker unit 920. An interface control board box 940 accommodating a board, a power supply board box 930, and a payout control board box mounted across the interface control board box 940 and accommodating a payout control board for controlling the payout of game balls inside. And 950.

The payout control board housed in the payout control board box 950 controls the payout device 830.

[5. Overall structure of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 83 to 90. FIG. 83 is a front view of the game board. 84 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front right, and FIG. 85 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front left. Further, FIG. 86 is a perspective view of the game board as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 87 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main structure and seen from the front, and FIG. 88 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main structure and seen from the rear. 89 is a front perspective view showing only the front component members and the game panel of the game board, and FIG. 90 is a rear perspective view showing only the front component member and the game panel of the game board.

As shown in the figure, the game board 5 of the present embodiment has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by the player operating the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500. Further, the game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and the front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game region 5a and has an outer shape of a substantially quadrangular shape in a front view. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 for partitioning, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear part of the game panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 are driven by driving the game balls into the game area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board for controlling the contents of the game. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion inside the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (not shown).

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board, and a function display unit 1400 visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component member 1000, and a game panel 1100. A central liquid crystal display device 1500 that is visibly attached to the rear side from the front side, a peripheral control unit 1600 that is attached to the rear side of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and a front unit 2000 that is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100. And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100.

The game panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery thereof is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110, and the front component member 1000. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120, which is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached, is provided on the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 is capable of accepting game balls that have been driven into the game area 5a, and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 at different positions within the playing area 5a. A first starting opening 2002 that is always open to receive a game ball, a gate unit 2003 that is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003. The second starting opening 2004 that allows the game balls to be accepted according to the result of the ordinary drawing by doing the first and the first starting opening 2002 or the first drawing that is accepted by receiving the game balls into the second starting opening 2004. It is provided with a lower major prize opening 2005 and an upper major prize opening 2006, which allows the game balls to be accepted in either the special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

Further, a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2002 attached directly above the out opening 1111 in the center of the technique area 5a in the left-right direction, and an inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting opening unit 2100 when viewed from the front. And a side unit 2200 having a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, and a second starting opening that are mounted on the right side of the starting opening unit 2100. 2004 and an attacker unit 2300 having a lower special winning opening 2005, a starter opening unit 2100, a side unit 2200, and a frame having an upper special winning opening 2006 attached above the attacker unit 2300. And a center accessory 2500.

The back unit 3000 is mounted on the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-shaped back box 3010 whose front is open, and a lock for mounting the central liquid crystal display device 1500 detachably on the back surface of the back box 3010. A mechanism 3020, a lower left ball passage unit 3030 mounted near the lower left front end of the back box 3010, and a lower right ball passage unit 3040 mounted near the lower right front end of the back box 3010 are provided.

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a lamp drive board 3060 mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 to the left of the opening 3010a in rear view, a lamp drive board cover 3061 covering the rear of the lamp drive board 3060, and a back box 3010. A motor drive board 3062 mounted on the rear surface below the rear side of the opening 3010a, a motor drive board cover 3063 covering the rear of the motor drive board 3062, and a rear surface of the back box 3010 mounted on the lower left corner of the rear view. And a panel relay board 3064 which is installed.

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back edge decoration unit 3080 mounted on the front end of the back box 3010 along the upper side and the left side, and a back movable production unit mounted in the back box 3010 above the opening 3010a. 3100, a lower back front movable production unit 3200 attached below the opening 3010a near the front end in the back box 3010, and a back right movable production attached to the right of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The unit 3300, the back left movable effect unit 3400 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and the unit 3300 below the opening 3010a and behind the back lower front movable effect unit 3200 in the back box 3010. A rear lower movable production unit 3500, and a rear four corner movable production unit 3600 attached to the left and right sides of the rear upper movable production unit 3100 and the lower rear movable production unit 3500, respectively. ing.

[5-1. Previous component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 90. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has an inner shape that penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in a circular arc shape from a lower end on the left side to a left side in a front view in a clockwise direction and extends in an arc shape in a clockwise circumferential direction. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged inside the front component member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from a lower center in the left-right direction in a front view to a diagonally upper left portion in a front view, and a lower end of the inner rail 1002 on the right side in a front view. And an out guide portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position in the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

Further, the front constituent member 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 which are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end in front view of the out guiding portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front constituent member 1000. From the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper part is curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. The upper end of 1001 is connected, and the stop part 1006 with which the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 abuts is provided. This stop portion 1006 acts as a cushioning member that loosens and relieves the momentum of the game ball that has been driven into the game area 5a, and is formed of rubber or the like in this example. The material of the stopper 1006 is not limited to rubber as long as it acts as a cushioning member.

The front component 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the outer rail 1001. A backflow preventing member that is rotated in a rotating direction to be rotatable only between an open position in which the outer rail 1001 and the outer rail 1001 are opened and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 90. The game panel 1100 has a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer periphery is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and which is formed of transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120, which is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface. On the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, an out port 1111 penetrating in the front and back is formed at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of mounting openings 1112 (see FIGS. 89 and 90, etc.) penetrating in the front-rear direction and for mounting the front unit 2000.

The panel holder 1120 holds the panel plate 1110 detachably from the rear side. Further, the panel holder 1120 has a plurality of mounting holes for mounting the back unit 3000 and a plurality of positioning holes formed on its rear surface.

In the state where the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, the out port 1111 of the panel board 1110 is opened to the rear side of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component member 1000. As a result, the game ball flowing down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1111 by the out guiding portion 1003, and can be discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 90. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box whose upper side and front side are open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to decrease toward the center in the left-right direction. This substrate holder 1200 can cover the lower portion of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side when assembled to the game board 5. As a result, it is possible to receive all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the outlet 1111 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and are formed on the bottom surface. The discharged portion 1201 (see FIG. 87) can be discharged downward.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 90. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board (not shown) that controls game contents and payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board and is attached to the board holder 1200. I have it.

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Therefore, a trace of opening/closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, the unauthorized opening/closing of the main control board box 1320 can be found by looking at the traces of opening/closing, and the deterrence against the illegal act on the main control board is enhanced.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 90. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 1). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs to display a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator including one LED for displaying a game status, and two for displaying a normal lottery result selected by a game ball passing through a gate portion described later. A normal symbol display consisting of LEDs, a normal holding display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings relating to the passage of the game ball to the gate, and a lottery by accepting the game ball into the first starting opening described later. A first special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result, and a first special reservation number display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls into the first starting opening. , A second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game balls into the second starting port, which will be described later, and a hold regarding the acceptance of the game balls into the second starting port A second special holding number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number, and opening and closing of the upper special winning opening and lower special winning opening described later when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" etc. It mainly comprises a round display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of times the pattern is repeated (the number of rounds).

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holdings, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on/off, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Central liquid crystal display]
Next, the central liquid crystal display device 1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 90. The central liquid crystal display device 1500 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the approximate center. The central liquid crystal display device 1500 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The central liquid crystal display device 1500 is a full-color display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display a still image or a moving image.

As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the central liquid crystal display device 1500 includes two left fixing pieces 1501 protruding outward from the left side surface in front view and a right fixing piece 1501 protruding outward from the right side surface in front view. And 1502. This central liquid crystal display device 1500 has a back box in which two fixing grooves are opened in a left inner peripheral surface in a front view in a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion of a back box 3010, which will be described later, with a liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1501 obliquely from the rear of 3010, the right fixing piece 1502 side is moved forward, the right fixing piece 1502 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism, and the lock mechanism is slid downward. As a result, it is attached to the back box 3010.

[5-7. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 90. The peripheral control unit 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. Although not shown, the peripheral control unit 1600 controls the peripheral control board that controls the effect presented to the player based on the control signal from the main control board, and displays the effect image displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. An image display control board to be controlled, a ROM board having a ROM in which effect images, effect sounds, effect control programs, etc. are stored; And a control board box 1620.

[5-8. Overall structure of table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 97. FIG. 91 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 92 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the back. Further, FIG. 93(a) is a perspective view of the starting opening unit of the front unit viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 93(b) is a perspective view of the starting opening unit viewed from the lower back. In addition, FIG. 94(a) is a perspective view of the side unit of the front unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 94(b) is a perspective view of the side unit viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 95(a) is a perspective view of the attacker unit of the front unit viewed from the front upper side, FIG. 95(b) is a perspective view of the attacker unit viewed from the upper rear side, and FIG. 95(c) is the rear lower position of the attacker unit. It is the perspective view seen from. 96 is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 97 is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit viewed from the rear.

The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the mounting port 1112. And the panel plate 1110 projects rearward from the rear surface. In the table unit 2000 of the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are capable of accepting game balls that have been driven into the gaming area 5a and are always open, and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 are within the gaming area 5a. The first starting opening 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball at different positions, the gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball is the gate The second starting port 2004 that allows the game balls to be accepted according to the result of the normal lottery that is selected by passing through the section 2003, and the lottery by accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. There is a lower special winning opening 2005 and an upper special winning opening 2006 that allow the game balls to be accepted in either of the first special drawing result or the second special drawing result.

A plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged in the lower portion of the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged on the right side in the game area 5a, downward from the center in the vertical direction. The second starting port 2004 is arranged directly below the gate unit 2003. The lower special winning opening 2005 is arranged below the second starting opening 2004 near the lower end of the game area 5a. The special winning opening 2005 is arranged near the upper end of the game area 5a above the second starting opening 2004.

Further, the table unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1111 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and has a starting port unit 2100 having a first starting port 2002, and the starting port unit 2100 is viewed from the front left. Side unit 2200 which is attached along the inner rail 1002 and has a plurality of (here, three) general winning openings 2001, and one general winning which is installed on the right side of the starting opening unit 2100. An attacker unit 2300 having a mouth 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a lower special winning opening 2005, a starting opening unit 2100, a side unit 2200, and an attacker unit 2300. It has a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a special winning opening 2006.

[5-8a. Starter unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIG. 93 and the like. The starting opening unit 2100 is arranged immediately above the out opening 1111 in the vicinity of the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The starting opening unit 2100 has a first starting opening 2002.

The starting opening unit 2100 includes a unit base 2101 attached to a panel plate 1110, a ball receiving member 2102 attached to an upper front portion of the unit base 2101 and protruding forward to form a first starting opening 2002. A box frame-shaped front decoration base 2103 that is attached to the front surface of the unit base 2101 below the ball receiving member 2102, projects forward, and extends to the left and right, and the unit base 2101 inside the front decoration base 2103. A front central decoration substrate 2104 mounted on the front surface and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The starting opening unit 2100 is attached to the front surface of the front decoration base 2103 and is given a predetermined decoration. The front decoration member 2105 is light-emitted by the front central decoration board 2104, and the rear side of the unit base 2101. The guide passage member 2106 attached to the first starting opening 2002 and guiding the game ball received downward to the first starting opening 2002, and the game ball received in the first starting opening 2002 attached to the guide passage member 2106 are detected. And a first starting port sensor 2107.

The ball receiving member 2102 is formed in a container shape that is open at the top and the rear, and can receive a game ball from above as the first starting port 2002 and guide it backward. The front decoration base 2103 extends evenly left and right around the ball receiving member 2102 (first starting port 2002), and the upper surface is inclined so as to decrease toward the left and right ends. The front decoration member 2105 extends to the left and right, and has a fake portion 2105a formed in a plate shape having substantially the same size and shape as a lower special winning opening door member 2352 that opens and closes a lower special winning opening 2005 described later. ing. By this fake part 2105a, it is possible to make the player illusion that there is a big winning opening below the first starting opening 2002.

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIG. The side unit 2200 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting opening unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 has three general winning openings 2001.

The side unit 2200 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and a flat unit base 2201 that extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002, and is attached near the upper edge of the lower front surface of the unit base 2201. Together with the two first ball receiving members 2202 that project forward and form the general winning opening 2001, the front of the unit base 2201 is attached to the left from the center in the left-right direction and also projects forward. The second ball receiving member 2203 forming 2001, the side decoration board 2204 arranged behind the unit base 2201 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the side decoration board 2204 so as to cover the side decoration board 2204 from the rear side. And a substrate cover 2205 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2201.

The unit base 2201 extends in an arc shape so that the height increases toward the left side when viewed from the front. In addition, the unit base 2201 has a first shelf portion 2201a that is inclined so as to become lower toward the right in a portion that is on the left side and above the portion to which the second ball receiving member 2203 is attached. It has a protruding portion 2201b protruding inward. The unit base 2201 has a light-transmitting property and is light-emitted and decorated by the side decoration substrate 2204.

The first ball receiving member 2202 is formed in a container shape with an open upper part and a rear part, and can receive a game ball from above as a general winning opening 2001 and guide it backward.
The second ball receiving member 2203 is formed in a box shape with an open rear, and has a second shelf 2203a inclined downward on the upper surface and a second shelf 2203a. And a ball receiving portion 2203b forming a general winning opening 2001 on the left side.

The substrate cover 2205 is formed in a shallow box shape having an open front, and is opened upward at a site behind the ball receiving portions 2203b of the two first ball receiving members 2202 and 2203. In addition, it has a gutter-shaped guide portion 2205a that extends back and forth and guides the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear.

The side unit 2200 is mounted on the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), the substrate cover 2205 is inserted into the mounting port 1112, and the game ball received in the general winning port 2001 is paneled by the guiding portion 2205a. It can be guided behind the plate 1112.

[5-8c. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIG. The attacker unit 2300 is arranged in the lower right corner in the front view in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The attacker unit 2300 has one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a lower special winning opening 2005. Specifically, the second starting opening 2004 is arranged to the right of the general winning opening 2001, the gate portion 2003 is arranged immediately above the second starting opening 2004, and further, the general winning opening 2001 and the The lower special winning opening 2005 is arranged below the second starting opening 2004. The lower major winning opening 2005 extends leftward and rightward from right below the second starting opening 2004 to rightward beyond right below the general winning opening 2001.

The attacker unit 2300 has a general winning opening 2001 and a gate portion 2003, is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front, and a unit base 2301 is attached to the front upper portion of the unit base 2301 and is in front of the second starting opening 2004. A starter opening front member 2302 to be decorated, a shelf member 2303 attached to a front surface of the unit base 2301 between the starter opening front member 2302 and the lower special winning opening 2005, and protruding forward, and a unit base 2301. A ball guide member 2304 attached to the rear side for guiding the game ball received in the second starting port 2004, and a gate sensor 2305 attached to the unit base 2301 for detecting passage of the game ball through the gate portion 2003. , Are provided.

Further, the attacker unit 2300 is arranged on the rear side of the unit base 2301 at a portion corresponding to between the starting opening front member 2302 and the shelf member 2303, and the lower attacker decorative substrate 2306 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. And a substrate cover 2307 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2301 so as to cover the rear of the lower attacker decoration substrate 2306, and a lattice frame-shaped light shield attached between the lower attacker decoration substrate 2306 and the unit base 2301. And a member (not shown).

The attacker unit 2300 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2301 and opens and closes the second starting port 2004, and the second start port unit 2320 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2301 and has a lower special winning opening 2005. And a lower special winning opening unit 2350 for opening and closing.

In the unit base 2301, the gate portion 2003 projects forward from the upper end portion, and one general winning opening 2001 projects forward from the lower left portion of the gate portion 2003 in front view. In addition, the unit base 2301 is provided with a gutter-shaped gutter portion 2301a that guides the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear. The unit base 2301 has a light-transmitting property.

The starting port front member 2302 includes a pair of side wall parts 2302a (see FIG. 175(a)) extending forward along both left and right sides of the second starting port 2004 and an upper end of the side wall part 2302a on the left side in front view. A guide portion 2302b extending toward the left side, and a flat plate-shaped outer wall portion 2302c extending forward from the right side wall portion 2302a in front view with a distance allowing the game balls to pass rightward. , A pair of side wall portions 2302a, a guide portion 2302b, and a flat plate-shaped front plate portion 2302d that connects the front ends of the outer wall portions 2302c. The left end of the guide portion 2302b extends to the left of the gate portion 2003.

As shown in FIG. 175(a) and the like, the upper surface of the shelf member 2303 extends from directly below the right side wall portion 2302a of the starting opening front member 2302 to directly below the left/right center of the general winning opening 2001 so that the left end becomes lower. ing. Accordingly, when the game ball is rolled on the upper surface of the shelf member 2303 and discharged from the left end while the lower prize hole 2005 is in an open state, the game ball is received by the lower prize hole 2005 with an extremely high probability. The ball guiding member 2304 is attached to the rear surface of the substrate cover 2307. In addition, the ball guiding member 2304 passes the game ball received in the second starting opening 2004 behind the unit base 2301 between the second starting opening unit 2320 and the lower special winning opening unit 2350, and the lower large winning opening. It is formed so as to be guided to the rear of the unit 2350 and then discharged downward.

The second starting port unit 2320 has a front case 2321 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2301 with a second starting port 2004 opened at the front end, and a rear case 2322 attached to the rear side of the front case 2321. , A second starting port door member 2323 supported in the front case 2321 so as to project forward of the second starting port 2004 so as to be slidable forward and backward, and a second starting port door member 2323 is slid forward and backward. A starting opening solenoid 2324 installed in the case 2322 and a second starting opening sensor 2325 which is installed so as to be sandwiched between the front case 2321 and the rear case 2322 and detects the game ball received in the second starting opening 2004. And are equipped with.

In the state where the second starting opening unit 2320 is assembled to the attacker unit 2300, the front end of the front case 2321 penetrates the unit base 2301 from the rear side and is positioned substantially on the same plane as the front surface of the unit case 2301. As a result, the second starting port 2004 opens forward. Then, in a normal state where the starting opening solenoid 2324 is not energized, the second starting opening door member 2323 is retracted in the front case 2321, and the game ball flowing down in front of the second starting opening 2004 is the second starting opening. Without passing through 2004, it passes through the second starting port 2001 and flows downward. On the other hand, when the starting opening solenoid 2324 is energized, the second starting opening door member 2323 is in a state of protruding further forward than the second starting opening 2004. In this state, when the game ball flows down in front of the second starting port 2004, the gaming ball comes into contact with the second starting port door member 2323 and the flow direction changes from the lower side to the rear side to the second starting port 2004. Accepted. The game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2325, then guided by the ball guiding member 2304 and discharged downward.

The lower special winning opening unit 2350 is a unit case 2351 that is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2301 and has a rectangular lower special winning opening 2005 that extends left and right on the front surface, and a unit case that allows the lower special winning opening 2005 to be opened and closed. A horizontally elongated rectangular flat plate-shaped lower special winning opening door member 2352 rotatably attached to 2351 and a lower large winning opening door member 2352 mounted in the unit case 2351 and opened and closed according to a game state. Lower special winning opening solenoid 2353, lower special winning opening sensor 2354 that is attached to the unit case 2351 and detects the game ball accepted by the lower special winning opening 2005, and is attached to the lower surface of the unit case 2351 and is on the upper surface. A lower special winning opening decoration board 2355 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, a lower special winning opening solenoid 2353, a lower special winning opening sensor 2354, a starting opening solenoid 2324, a second starting opening sensor 2325, and the like, and a main control board. And an attacker unit relay board 2356 that relays the connection.

The lower special winning opening 2005 opens toward the front. The lower special winning opening door member 2352 capable of opening and closing the lower special winning opening 2005 is rotatably attached to the left and right ends of the lower side by the unit case 2351, and is rotated so that the upper side moves forward and downward. By doing so, the lower special winning opening 2005 can be changed from the closed state to the open state.

In the lower special winning opening unit 2350, in a normal state where the lower special winning opening solenoid 2353 is not energized, the lower special winning opening door member 2352 stands upright to close the lower special winning opening 2005. When the lower special winning opening solenoid 2353 is energized in accordance with the game state, the lower special winning opening door member 2352 rotates so that the upper side moves forward and downward, and the upper side moves slightly above the lower side. It will be located. That is, the lower special winning opening door member 2352 is in a state of being inclined so as to be higher from the lower side of the lower special winning opening 2005 toward the front.

In this state, when the game ball flows down in front of the lower special winning opening 2005 and comes into contact with the lower large winning opening door member 2352, the distribution direction changes from the lower side to the rear due to the inclination of the lower large winning opening door member 2352, It will be accepted in the lower major prize hole 2005. Then, the game ball received in the lower special winning opening 2005 is detected by the lower special winning opening sensor 2354 and then discharged downward from the lower surface of the unit case 2351.

[5-8d. Center goods]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. The center accessory 2500 is arranged in the game area 5a above the starting opening unit 2100 and the attacker unit 2300 and slightly above the center in a front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the center liquid crystal display device 1500 arranged behind the game panel 1100 can be viewed from the front through the frame. The center accessory 2500 has an upper special winning opening 2006 that allows a game ball to be accepted according to the game state. As shown in FIG. 83 and the like, a part of the lower side of the center accessory 2500 extends between the starting opening unit 2100 and the attacker unit 2300 and extends downward to the vicinity of the lower right rail 1004. In other words, this center accessory 2500 divides the game area 5a into right and left.

The center accessory 2500 is a flat plate frame-shaped flange portion 2511 that abuts the front surface of the panel plate 1110 along the periphery of the mounting opening 1112 that is largely open in the center of the panel plate 1112, and projects forward from the flange portion 2511. A frame-shaped center base having a front peripheral wall portion 2512 that blocks intrusion of game balls into the cage frame, and a rear peripheral wall portion 2513 that projects rearward from the flange portion 2511 and is inserted into the mounting port 1112. 2510.

The front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center base 2510 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the flange portion 2511 except for a part of the lower side. The position of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 is slightly higher to the left of the center in the left-right direction on the upper side.

Further, the center accessory 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 and the warp entrance 2520 in which a game ball in the game area 5a is opened so that the outer peripheral surface of the lower left side of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center base 2510 can enter. In the frame of the center base 2510, the warp passage 2521 for guiding the game ball to the vicinity of the left end in front view of the lower side, the warp outlet 2523 opened at the downstream end of the warp passage 2521 so that the game ball can pass, and the warp outlet 2523. The game ball released from is rollable, and extends to the left and right along the lower side in the frame of the center base 2510, and is provided with a stage 2530 that releases the supplied game ball into the game area 5a. ing.

The stage 2530 is curved so that both the left and right ends are high and the left and right sides of the part corresponding to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction are the lowest, and the part between the lowest parts bulges to be slightly higher. There is. This stage 2530 is formed in a portion corresponding to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and is formed with a central guiding groove 2531 notched rearward from the front end, and two lowermost portions, respectively. And a fan-shaped side guide groove 2532 that lowers toward the left and expands to the left and right. In the state where the game board 5 is assembled, the first starting port 2002 is located immediately below the central guiding groove 2531, and the gaming ball released from the central guiding groove 2531 into the game area 5a is the first with a very high probability. Accepted in the start port 2002.

Further, the center accessory 2500 is attached to the front end of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 at the right end in front view, and guides the game ball that abuts against the hitting portion 1006 and bounces back toward the upper game space 2541 described later. The unit 2540 is provided. The guide portion 2540 is formed as a member different from the center accessory 2500 and is attached to the center accessory 2500 to extend the right end in front view of the upper side of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 in the right direction in front view. In addition, the guide portion 2540 is made of a resin having higher strength than the center accessory 2500. Specifically, the center accessory 2500 is made of PC resin (polycarbonate resin), but the guide portion 2540 is made of POM resin (polyacetal resin) having higher durability than PC resin.

As described above, when the game ball driven into the game area 5a comes into contact with the hitting portion 1006, the game ball looses its momentum, but a part of the game ball is hit by the hitting portion 1006 and the front peripheral wall of the center accessory 2500 is moved. The part 2512 is repelled in the direction of the upper side. Further, most players turn the handle lever 504 to hit the game ball in order to bring the game ball into contact with the stopper 1006, and thus the momentum of the game ball to be launched is toward the first starting opening 2002. It is stronger than the normal game for winning. When the game ball hit in this way is bounced back by the stopper 1006, the center accessory 2500 may be damaged by being frequently dropped onto the upper side of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500. Therefore, the front end right end portion of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 in front view is attached to the center role object 2540 as a guide part 2540 as a separate member, and the center role object 2540 is prevented from being damaged by being formed of POM resin having excellent durability. ing. In addition, in this example, only the guide portion 2540 is formed of the POM resin without forming the center accessory 2540 entirely of the POM resin. Therefore, even if the guide portion 2540 is damaged, only the guide portion 2540 should be replaced. It can be repaired by, and even when damaged, it can be easily repaired.

Further, as shown in FIG. 176 described later, the guide portion 2540 is attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to have a step with the front peripheral wall portion 2512. In this example, the upper side of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 is attached so as to be higher than the upper side of the guiding portion 2540 in a front view. As a result, when the game ball bounced back by the stopper 1006 reaches this step, it is returned to the upper game space 2541 without going over the step. In addition, the friction coefficient of the upper side of the guide portion 2540 is low due to the smooth mirror finish, and the game balls that have not exceeded the step between the front peripheral wall portion 2512 and the guide portion 2540 are quickly flowed down to the upper game space 2541. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging caused by the game balls staying on the upper side of the guide portion 2540.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 176 described later, the upper side of the guiding portion 2540 is formed by a three-dimensional member that is longer than the right side (left and right sides). The upper side of the guiding portion 2540 requires a certain length or more to receive the game ball bounced by the hitting portion 1006, but by setting the upper side and the right side (left and right sides) to be approximately the same space in the game area 5a. Becomes narrower, and the degree of freedom in designing game machines is reduced. Therefore, by forming the right side (left and right sides) of the guide portion 2540 shorter than the upper side, a space in the up and down direction of the game area 5a in front view is ensured and the degree of freedom in designing the game machine is not lowered.

Further, the center accessory 2500 is sandwiched between the guide portion 2540 and the stop portion 1006, and the upper right entrance where the game ball in the game area 5a is open so that the game ball can enter, and the upper side of the center base 2510 below the upper right entrance. Along the right side of the center base 2510 from the right end in front view at the bottom of the upper game space 2541, and an upper game space 2541 formed in the right part of the front view with the upper prize hole 2006 open on the left side in front view. Is provided with a right passage 2542 that extends downward and has a lower end bent to the left and through which game balls can flow, and a lower right outlet 2543 that opens downward at the lower end of the right passage 2542. ..

The upper right entrance extends vertically with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the upper part widens upward. The upper game space 2541 is formed in such a size that the game balls can be moved sufficiently in the vertical and horizontal directions. In this upper game space 2541, an upper special winning opening 2006 is opened to the left in front view than the upper right entrance. Further, the upper game space 2541 has a guide portion 2541a that is inclined rightward when viewed from the front so as to be lower right below the upper right entrance. By this guide portion 2541a, the game ball that has fallen through the upper right entrance is rolled along the bottom surface of the upper game space 2541 without bouncing up in the upper game space 2541, and is smoothly guided to the right passage 2542. Can be made.

The right passage 2542 is provided with a plurality of protruding ridges 2542a extending leftward and rightward on the front and rear wall surfaces alternately in the up-down direction. When the game spheres abut on the respective protruding ridges 2542a, the flow speed of the game spheres is reduced. Can be attenuated. The lower right outlet 2543 is opened immediately above the gate portion 2003 in the attacker unit 2300 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. Although illustration is omitted, in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), a plurality of obstacle nails are also implanted between the lower right outlet 2543 and the gate portion 2003.

Further, the center character 2500 includes an upper special winning opening door member 2550 that closes the upper special winning opening 2006 and an upper special winning opening solenoid 2551 that drives the upper special winning opening door member 2550 to open and close according to the gaming state. , A special winning opening sensor 2552 for detecting a game ball received in the special winning opening 2006, and a backward guiding path 2553 for guiding the game ball detected by the upper winning opening sensor 2552 rearward of the flange portion 2511 ( (See FIG. 175), and a rear discharge port 2554 that is opened at the rear end of the rear guiding path 2553 and through which a game ball can pass, and is branched from the middle of the rear guiding path 2553 on the right side of the center base 2510 in front view. It is provided with an escape passage 2555 that guides the game ball downward along with a discharge port 2556 that is open at the lower end of the escape passage.

The upper special winning opening door member 2550 opens and closes the upper special winning opening 2006 that is open to the left in front view from the upper right entrance in the upper game space 2541. The upper special winning opening door member 2550 is rotatably attached to an axis extending forward and backward near the bottom of the upper gaming space 2541 at the lower end to the left of the upper right entrance, and the upper end in an upright state. It extends to near the ceiling of the upper gaming space. The upper special winning opening door member 2550 is upright in a normal state and closes the upper special winning opening 2006. When the upper special winning opening solenoid 2551 is energized according to the game state, the upper end is rotated so as to move to the right in front view, and the upper special winning opening 2006 is opened so that the game ball can be received. Open. In this state, the upper end of the upper special winning opening door member 2550 is higher than the lower end and is positioned to the right in front view from the upper right entrance. Therefore, the game ball that has fallen to the upper special winning opening door member 2550 through the upper right entrance is guided by the upper special winning opening door member 2550 and is received in the upper special winning opening 2006.

The game sphere received in the upper special winning opening 2006 is detected by the upper special winning opening sensor 2552 arranged at the lower left of the upper special winning opening door member 2550, and then to the rear of the flange portion 2551 by the rear guiding path 2553. Be induced. The rear discharge port 2554 opened at the rear end of the rear guide path 2553 is normally formed by the outer peripheral surface of the first decorative surface 3310a of the back right rotating decorative body 3310 in the back right movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 described later. It is closed. Therefore, when the game ball is not discharged from the rear discharge port 2554, the game ball enters the escape passage 2555 branched immediately before the rear discharge port 2554, and is discharged downward from the discharge port 2556 through the escape passage 2555. ..

Further, the center accessory 2500 includes a front movable production unit 2560 attached to the upper side of the center base 2510 and a front movable production unit 2570 attached to the lower side of the center base 2510. The front movable art production unit 2560 of the center accessory 2500 is mounted so as to be able to move up and down within the frame of the center base 2510, and the front movable articulation body 2561 which is decorated according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1, A front movable decorative body decorative board (not shown) mounted on the rear side of the upper movable decorative body 2561 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a game state mounted on the rear side of the center base 2510. And a front drive motor 2563 for moving the front movable ornament 2561 up and down according to the above.

The front and bottom movable effect unit 2570 is attached to a portion of the lower side of the center base 2510 that extends below the stage 2530, and is a flat plate-shaped and light-transmitting front surface that is decorated. The lower decorative body 2571, the first rotary decorative body 2572, the second rotary decorative body 2573, and the third rotary decorative body 2574 that are rotatably attached to the front lower decorative body 2571, and the rear of the center base 2510. The underside drive motor 2575 attached to the side and rotating the first rotating decoration body 2572, the second rotating decoration body 2573, and the third rotating decoration body 2574 according to the game state, and the rear side of the underside decoration body 2571. And a front and bottom movable decorative body decorative substrate 2576 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface.

In the front and bottom movable effect unit 2570, the first rotation decoration body 2572, the second rotation decoration body 2573, and the third rotation decoration body 2574 are formed in a shape simulating a shuriken, and are driven by the front and bottom drive motor 2575. , Rotate in the same direction.

[5-9. Overall configuration of back unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 98 to 101. 98 is a perspective view of the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 99 is a perspective view of the back unit seen from the back. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the back. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. A central liquid crystal display device 1500 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000.

The back unit 3000 is mounted on the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape having an open front, and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and a back box 3010 mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 at the center. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the liquid crystal display device 1500, and a game ball which is attached near the lower left front end of the back box 3010 and is received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 is guided downward to the substrate. The lower left ball passage unit 3030 that discharges onto the holder 1200, the game ball that is attached to the lower right front end of the back box 3010 near the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2300, and the upper winning opening 2006 is received. Guide the game ball discharged from the discharge port 3303a of the back lower right base 3303 and the game ball discharged from the discharge port 2556 of the escape passage 2555 of the center role object 2500 in the back right lower movable production unit 3300 described later to the lower side. A lower right sphere passage unit 3040 for discharging onto the substrate holder 1200, a lower left sphere passage unit 3030 and a lower right sphere passage unit 3040, respectively, and a general winning hole sensor for detecting a game ball received in the general winning hole 2001. 3050 and.

The back unit 3000 is mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 to the left of the opening 3010a in a rear view and drives the respective decoration boards based on a control command from the peripheral control board. A lamp drive board cover 3061 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear of the board 3060, and a control command from the peripheral control board attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010a in rear view. A motor drive board 3062 for driving each drive motor based on the above, a motor drive board cover 3063 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear of the motor drive board 3062, and a rear view of the back box 3010 on the rear surface. A panel relay board 3064 mounted at the lower left corner and relaying the connection between the main control board and each winning opening sensor, each winning opening solenoid, etc. is provided.

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back edge decoration unit 3080 mounted on the front end of the back box 3010 along the upper side and the left side, and a back movable production unit mounted in the back box 3010 above the opening 3010a. 3100, a lower back front movable production unit 3200 attached below the opening 3010a near the front end in the back box 3010, and a back right movable production attached to the right of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The unit 3300, the back left movable effect unit 3400 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and the unit 3300 below the opening 3010a and behind the back lower front movable effect unit 3200 in the back box 3010. A rear lower movable production unit 3500, and a rear four corner movable production unit 3600 attached to the left and right sides of the rear upper movable production unit 3100 and the lower rear movable production unit 3500, respectively. ing.

[5-9a. Back box]
Next, the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 98 to 101 and the like. The back box 3010 has a box-shaped opening 3010a that is open at the front and penetrates the rear wall in a square shape, and a frame-shaped liquid crystal mount that is spaced apart from the peripheral edge of the opening 3010a and projects backward in a flat plate shape. The part 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c recessed from the inner side to the outer side on the right side of the liquid crystal mounting part 3010b in rear view and into which the left fixing piece 1501 of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is inserted, and the rear view of the liquid crystal mounting part 3010b. A cutout portion 3010d cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 is provided at the center of the left side in the up-down direction.

The opening 3010a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in such a size that the central liquid crystal display device 1500 can be fitted in the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the rear surface of the notch 3010d on the rear surface so as to be vertically slidable.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixing piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 in a state where the front surface is in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100.

Although not described in detail, the back box 3010 has bosses and mounting holes for mounting the movable effect units and the like formed at appropriate positions.

[5-9b. Lower left ball passage unit]
Next, the lower left ball passage unit 3030 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 98 to 101 and the like. The lower left ball passage unit 3030 is attached to a rear box 3010 at a portion corresponding to the rear of the side unit 2200. The lower left spherical passage unit 3030 is formed in an L shape in which a side extending vertically in a front view is shorter than a side extending left and right, and the inside is formed hollow. The lower left sphere passage unit 3030 is provided with three entrances 3031 that are open to the front on the front side and through which game balls can pass. These three entrances 3031 are formed at positions corresponding to the three guiding parts 2205a in the side unit 2200.

This lower left sphere passage unit 3030 has a hollow interior that is inclined so as to be lowered toward the right side when viewed from the front, and the game balls that have entered from the three entrances 3031 are discharged downward near the right end of the lower surface. It A general winning opening sensor 3050 is attached to the lower left sphere passage unit 3030, and a gaming ball entering the inside from the entrance 3031 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3050. That is, the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3050 attached to the lower left ball passage unit 3030.

[5-9c. Lower right ball passage unit]
Next, the lower right ball passage unit 3040 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 98 to 101 and the like. The lower right ball passage unit 3040 is attached to the rear box 3010 at a portion corresponding to the rear of the attacker unit 2300. This lower right sphere passage unit 3040 is open toward the front and has a first entrance 3041 into which a game sphere received in the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2300 can enter, and a back right movable effect unit 3300 described later. The second entrance 3042 that opens upward immediately below the discharge opening 3303a that opens on the lower surface of the second opening, and the second entrance 3042 that opens upward and to the right and upward in front view of the second entrance 3042. It is provided with a third entrance 3043 through which the game ball discharged through the discharge port 2556 flowing through the escape passage 2555 of the accessory 2500 can enter.

This lower right ball passage unit 3040 discharges the game balls that have entered the first entrance 3041, the second entrance 3042, and the third entrance 3043 downward through independent passages. A general winning opening sensor 3050 for detecting a game ball that has entered the first entrance 3041 is attached to the lower right ball passage unit 3040. That is, the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2300 is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3050 attached to the lower right ball passage unit 3040.

[5-9d. Back edge decoration unit]
Next, the back edge decoration unit 3080 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 98 to 101 and the like. The back peripheral decoration unit 3080 is attached along the upper side and the left side of the front end of the back box 3010 at portions corresponding to the upper, left, and lower left of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a. This back edge decoration unit 3080 is attached to the rear side of the back edge decoration member 3081 and a rear edge decoration member 3081 having a light-transmitting property extending in a C shape, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. And a substrate cover 3083 that covers the back of the back edge decoration substrate 3082 and is attached to the rear side of the back edge decoration member 3081.

This back edge decoration unit 3080 can cause the back edge decoration member 3081 to emit light by appropriately causing the LEDs of the back edge decoration substrate 3082 to emit light. Further, when the game board 5 is assembled, the front surface of the back peripheral edge decoration member 3081 can be seen from the player side through the transparent panel plate 1110, and the outside of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a is decorated.

[5-9e. Back movable production unit]
Next, the back-up movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 102 to 116. FIG. 102(a) is a perspective view of the back upper movable effect unit in the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 102(b) is a perspective view of the back upper movable effect unit seen from the back. FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper movable effect unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper movable effect unit disassembled and seen from the rear. In addition, FIG. 105 is an exploded perspective view of the back decorative body unit of the back movable art production unit as seen from the front, and FIG. It is the exploded perspective view seen. Further, FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back upper subsidiary decoration in the back upper movable decoration unit. FIG. 108 is a front view showing the state of the internal mechanism of the back side movable effect unit when the back side decorative body unit is in the retracted position, and FIG. FIG. 110 is a front view showing the state of the internal mechanism at the appearance position, and FIG. 110 is a front view showing the state of the internal mechanism at the second appearance position of the back side decorative body unit of the back side movable effect unit.

In addition, FIG. 111(a) is a front view showing a part of the internal mechanism of the back-and-forth movable effect unit, and FIG. , (C) are perspective views of (b) viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram showing a part of the movement of the internal mechanism of the back-up movable effect unit. Further, FIG. 113(a) is an explanatory view showing a state of main members constituting the internal mechanism in the retracted position, and FIG. 113(b) shows a state in which the first transmission member rotates from the state of (a) and FIG. 114(c) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the transmission of rotation to the transmitted member is started, and FIG. 114(c) shows a state in which the first transmitted member further rotates together with the first transmitted member from the state of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the upper decorative body unit is descending toward the 1st appearance position from a retracted position, (d) further rotates a 1st transmission member with a 1st transmission member from the state of (c). It is an explanatory view showing a state in which the transmission of rotation to the first transmitted member is completed and the back decorative body unit has reached the first appearance position.

Further, in FIG. 115(e), the second transmission member of the transmission mechanism that has been rotating together with the first transmission member from the state of FIG. 114(d) is further rotated, and the rotation is transmitted to the second transmitted member. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which was started, (f) is a 2nd transmission member and a 2nd transmission member rotate from the state of (e), and a back decoration unit is a 2nd appearance position from a 1st appearance position. FIG. 116(g) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the second transmitted member and the second transmitted member rotate from the state of FIG. 115(f) by rotating while descending toward FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the body unit is further lowering and rotating toward the 2nd appearance position, (h) is a 2nd transmission member and a 2nd to-be-transmitted member further rotates from the state of (g). FIG. 7 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the transmission of rotation to the second transmitted member is completed and the back decorative body unit reaches the second appearance position by a half rotation while descending from the state of the first appearance position.

The back-up movable effect unit 3100 is mounted in the back box 3010 above the opening 3010a. The back-up movable effect unit 3100 forms a space between a unit base 3101 mounted in the back box 3010 and extending left and right, and a unit base 3101 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 3101. A rear cover 3102, and a back drive motor 3103 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3101 near the right end in front view and having a rotation shaft penetrating the unit base 3101 and projecting between the unit base 3101 and the rear cover 3102. , Are equipped.

Further, the back side movable effect unit 3100 includes a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3104 fixed to the rotation shaft of the back side drive motor 3103, and a spur gear-shaped first large diameter gear 3105a meshing with the drive gear 3104. , And a first small diameter gear 3105b which is smaller in diameter than the first large diameter gear 3105a and rotates integrally with the first large diameter gear 3105a on the rear side of the first large diameter gear 3105a. Of the first driven gear 3105 arranged on one side, a second large diameter gear 3106a in the form of a spur gear that meshes with the first small diameter gear 3105b of the first driven gear 3105, and a smaller diameter than the second large diameter gear 3106a. Has a second small diameter gear 3106b that rotates integrally with the second large diameter gear 3106a on the front side of the second large diameter gear 3106a, and is disposed on the left side of the first driven gear 3105 in front view. 3106 and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3107a that meshes with the second small-diameter gear 3106b of the second driven gear 3106. The first transmission gear 3106 is arranged to the left of the second driven gear 3106 in a front view. It has a transmission member 3107 and a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3108a that meshes with the first transmission gear 3107a of the first transmission member 3107, and is arranged to the left of the first transmission member 3107 in front view. And a second transmission member 3108 (see FIG. 111(a) and the like).

The first driven gear 3105, the second driven gear 3106, the first transmission member 3107, and the second transmission member 3108 are rotatable by the unit base 3101 and the rear cover 3102 between the unit base 3101 and the rear cover 3102. Installed.

The first transmission member 3107 includes a cylindrical first transmission pin 3107b protruding forward from the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge on the front surface of the spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3107a, and a revolution of the first transmission pin 3107b. Between the disk-shaped first lock protrusion 3107c protruding forward from the front surface of the first transmission gear 3107a concentrically with a radius smaller than the radius, and between the first lock protrusion 3107c and the first transmission pin 3107b, On the outer peripheral surface of the first lock protrusion 3107c, from an even range to both sides with an axis connecting the center of the first transmission gear 3107a and the center of the first transmission pin 3107b as boundaries, toward the center of the first lock protrusion 3107c. And a first cutout portion 3107d that is cut out in a fan shape.

The second transmission member 3108 is a cylindrical second transmission pin 3108b that protrudes forward from the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge in the front surface of the spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3108a and parallel to the rotation axis, and the revolution of the second transmission pin 3108b. Between the disk-shaped second lock protrusion 3108c, which protrudes concentrically forward from the front surface of the second transmission gear 3108a with a radius smaller than the radius, and between the second lock protrusion 3108c and the second transmission pin 3108b, On the outer peripheral surface of the second lock protrusion 3108c, from an even range to both sides with an axis connecting the center of the second transmission gear 3108a and the center of the second transmission pin 3108b as a boundary toward the center of the second lock protrusion 3108c. And a second cutout portion 3108d that is cut out in a fan shape.

The first transmission gear 3107a and the second transmission gear 3108a of the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 are formed to have the same diameter. The first transmission pin 3107b and the second transmission pin 3108b of the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 have the same cylindrical diameter and the same revolution radius. The first locking protrusion 3107c and the second locking protrusion 3108c of the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 are formed to have the same diameter. Furthermore, the first notch portion 3107d and the second notch portion 3108d of the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 are 72 degrees with respect to the circumferences of the first lock protrusion 3107c and the second lock protrusion 3108c. It is formed in a fan shape within the angle range.

Further, the back-up movable effect unit 3100 has a cylindrical slide shaft 3109 having a lower end attached to the unit base 3101 on the front surface near the left end in front view of the unit base 3101 and extending vertically, and an upper end of the slide shaft 3109. A shaft mounting member 3110 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3101, a left slider 3111 mounted on a slide shaft 3109 so as to be slidable up and down, and having a flat plate-shaped detection piece 3111a extending rearward, A rear up/down detection sensor 3112 that detects the detection piece 3111a of the left slider 3111 and is attached to the unit base 3101, and an upper portion on the front side of the unit base 3101 that is on the left side of the rear drive motor 3103 in front view are attached. It has a rail bracket 3113 that extends vertically so that its lower end projects downward from the lower surface of the unit base 3101, and a right slider 3114a that is attached to the left side surface of the rail bracket 3113 in front view and slides vertically. A slide rail 3114, a rack member 3115 attached to the right slider 3114a of the slide rail 3114 and having a rack gear 3115a extending vertically, and left and right ends attached to the left slider 3111 and the rack member 3115, respectively. And a first movable base 3116 having a flat plate shape.

In addition, the back-up movable effect unit 3100 has a flat plate-shaped first substrate portion 3117a formed in a droplet shape, and a cylindrical first portion projecting forward from a droplet-shaped tip of the first substrate portion 3117a. It has an action pin 3117b and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3101 so that the first action pin 3117b revolves at a position on the front surface of the unit base 3101 to the right of the first transmission member 3107 in a front view. The first transmitted member 3117 capable of transmitting the rotation of the first transmission member 3107 and the first bearing pin 3117b of the first transmitted member 3117 are inserted in the first bearing slit 3118a so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. And a bearing member 3118 attached to the rear surface of the first movable base 3116.

The first movable base 3116 has an opening 3116a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending from the lower end to the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction. On the rear surface of the first movable base 3116, a rack member 3115 is attached to the right of the opening 3116a in a front view. The rack gear 3115a of the rack member 3115 extends along the opening 3116a with the addendum facing leftward when viewed from the front.

The first movable base 3116 is attached so as to be vertically slidable (movable up and down) by a slide shaft 3109 and a slide rail 3114 via a left slider 3111 and a right slider 3114a. Further, the position of the first movable base 3116 in the vertical direction is regulated by the first action pin 3117b of the first transmitted member 3117 inserted in the first bearing slit 3118a of the bearing member 3118. Therefore, when the first actuated member 3117b is rotated to revolve the first action pin 3117b and the vertical position of the first action pin 3117b is changed, the first action pin 3117b moves in the first bearing slit 3118a. The first movable base 3116 slides in the vertical direction while sliding in the horizontal direction. That is, when the first transmitted member 3117 is rotated, the first movable base 3116 slides up and down.

The first substrate portion 3117a of the first transmitted member 3117 has a base circle whose front view has a diameter substantially the same as the root diameter of the gear teeth of the second large diameter gear 3106a of the second driven gear 3106, and its base circle. Is formed in a shape (so-called drop shape) mainly composed of two sides extending so as to contact from outside. The first transmitted member 3117 has a center of a base circle in the first base portion 3117a as a rotation center, and this rotation center is arranged coaxially with the center of the second driven gear 3106. The first action pin 3117b projects from the vicinity of the intersection (two drops of a tip) of the first substrate portion 3117a, which is in contact with the base circle.

The first transmitted member 3117 has a cylindrical first transmitted body portion 3117c having the same diameter as the base circle of the first substrate portion 3117a and protruding rearward from the rear surface of the first substrate portion 3117a; A first transmission slit 3117d which is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 3117c toward the center and into which the first transmission pin 3107b is slidably inserted, and a first transmission slit 3117d on the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted main body portion 3117c. And a pair of first lock recesses 3117e that are recessed in an arc shape from the outer peripheral surface toward the center on both sides.

The first lock recess 3117e is recessed with an arc having a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the first lock protrusion 3107c of the first transmission member 3107. The pair of first lock recesses 3117e are formed so that the lines connecting the centers of the respective arcs of the recesses and the rotation center of the first transmitted member 3117 intersect at an angle of 90 degrees.

The first transmitted member 3117 has a first transmitted main body portion 3117c, a first transmission pin 3107b and a first lock protrusion 3107c of the first transmission member 3107, in a state in which the back movable production unit 3100 is assembled. The position in the front-back direction is the same. Accordingly, the first transmission pin 3107b can be inserted into the first transmission slit 3117d, and the rotation can be transmitted via the first transmission pin 3170b and the first transmission slit 3117d. In addition, a part of the first lock protrusion 3107c can be inserted into the first lock recess 3117e, and a part of the first lock protrusion 3107c is inserted into the first lock recess 3117e. The rotation of the transmitted member 3117 can be restricted (locked).

Further, the back movable production unit 3100 has a second bearing slit 3119a penetrating forward and backward at the upper end and extending left and right, and a bearing hole 3119b penetrating forward and backward at approximately the center in the vertical direction. The second movable base 3119 is slidably mounted on the rear surface of the first movable base 3116 so that the bearing hole 3119b faces forward from the opening 3116a, and the second movable base 3119 is arranged in front of the first movable base 3116. In addition, there is a shaft portion 3151a that is rotatably inserted into the bearing hole 3119a of the second movable base 3119, and a backside decorative body that imitates the head including the face of a predetermined character according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1. A spur gear-shaped ornament rotation that is attached to the rear end of the shaft 3151a of the unit 3150 and the back ornament unit 3150 penetrating the second movable base 3119 and meshes with the rack gear 3115a of the rack member 3115. The gear 3120 and a flat plate-shaped gear cover 3121 attached to the rear surface of the second movable base 3119 so as to cover the rear of the ornamental body rotation gear 3120 are provided.

When the second movable base 3119 is slid relative to the first movable base 3116, the back decoration unit 3150 attached to the bearing hole 3119b of the second movable base 3119 also moves together with the second movable base 3119. Slide to. At this time, since the rack gear 3115a of the rack member 3115 attached to the first movable base 3116 is meshed with the ornament rotating gear 3120 attached to the shaft portion 3151a of the back ornament unit 3150, When the second movable base 3119 slides, the ornament rotating gear 3120 rotates together with the back ornament unit 3150.

Further, the back-up movable effect unit 3100 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3101 below the second transmission member 3108 in front view and in front of the unit base 3101 so that the rotation of the second transmission member 3108 can be transmitted. A second transmitted member 3122, a rotary link member 3123 mounted on the front surface of the second transmitted member 3122 so as to be slidable in a direction along the rotation surface, and a second transmitted member on the front surface of the rotary link member 3123. 3122 is slidably mounted in a direction intersecting the sliding direction with respect to 3122, and is rotatably mounted behind the first movable base 3116, and projects rearward from a position eccentric to the rotation center. The second movable base drive member 3124 having a cylindrical second action pin 3124a slidably inserted into the second bearing slit 3119a of the second movable base 3119, and the second movable base drive member 3124 A shaft member 3125 rotatably attached to one movable base 3116.

The second transmitted member 3122 includes a disk-shaped second substrate portion 3122a that is rotatably attached to the unit base 3101 and a cylindrical second transmitted body portion 3122b that projects rearward from the peripheral edge of the second substrate portion 3122a. And a second transmission slit 3122c which is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the second transmitted main body portion 3122b toward the center and into which the second transmission pin 3108b is slidably inserted, and an outer peripheral surface of the second transmitted main body portion 3122b. On both sides of the second transmission slit 3122c in, a pair of second lock recesses 3122d that are recessed in an arc shape from the outer peripheral surface toward the center, and a pair of second lock recesses 3122d that are recessed rearward from the front surface of the second base plate portion 3122a and with respect to the rotation axis. And a groove-shaped first transmission guide portion 3122e that extends at a right angle and has one end opening to the outer peripheral surface of the second substrate portion 3122a (FIGS. 111(b) and 111(c)). Etc.).

In the second transmitted member 3122, the radius of the second substrate portion 3122a (second transmitted main body portion 3122b) is shorter than the distance from the rotation center to the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108, and the second lock protrusion It is formed longer than the distance to the outer peripheral surface of 3108c. The second lock recess 3122d is recessed with an arc having a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the second lock protrusion 3108c of the second transmission member 3108. Further, the pair of second lock recesses 3122d are formed such that the lines connecting the centers of the respective recessed arcs and the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3122 intersect at an angle of 90 degrees.

The first guide transmission portion 3122e extends at an angle of 54 degrees with respect to the extending direction of the second transmission slit 3122c. In addition, the first guide transmission portion 3122e opens on the peripheral surface in a direction opposite to the direction in which the second transmission slit 3122c opens on the peripheral surface.

The rotary link member 3123 has a flat plate-shaped link body portion 3123a and a flat plate-shaped link body portion 3123a that projects from the rear surface of the link body portion 3123a and is slidably inserted into the first transmission guide portion 3122e of the second transmitted member 3122. The pair of first transmitted guide portions 3123b, the front protrusion 3123c protruding from the front surface of the link body portion 3123a, and the first transmitted guide portion 3123b extending backward from the front surface of the front protrusion 3123c. And a groove-shaped second transmission guide portion 3123d that extends in a direction intersecting the direction in which both ends are open to the outer peripheral surface of the front protrusion 3123c (FIGS. 111B and 111B). See c) etc.).

The pair of first transmitted guide portions 3123b of the rotary link member 3123 are provided symmetrically with respect to an axis passing through the center of the link body portion 3123a, and are provided eccentrically from the center. The second transmission guide portion 3123c is provided on an axis passing through the center of the link body portion 3123a. The first transmitted guide portion 3123b and the second transmitted guide portion 3123c extend in directions intersecting at an angle of 95 degrees.

The second movable base drive member 3124 projects rearward from a position where the second action pin 3124a is eccentric with respect to the rotation center, and a drive main body 3124b rotatably attached to the first movable base 3116 and a drive main body. The second transmitted guide portion that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the portion 3124b, passes through the rotation center, extends at a right angle to the rotation axis, and is slidably inserted into the second transmission guide portion 3123d of the rotation link member 3123. 3124c (see FIGS. 111(b) and 111(c), etc.).

As shown in FIG. 105, FIG. 106, etc., the underside decorative body unit 3150 includes a decorative body base 3151 having a flat plate-shaped shaft portion 3151 a protruding from the center of the rear surface in a cylindrical shape, and a decorative body base 3151. Is attached to the front surface of the decoration base 3151 and the back decoration 3152 which has three oval openings 3152a and imitates the head of a predetermined character three-dimensionally. And a C-shaped rear upper decorative body substrate 3153 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface.

Further, the back decoration unit 3150 is arranged behind the back decoration 3152 at substantially the center of the front surface of the decoration base 3151, and has a cylindrical guide shaft 3154 extending left and right, and both ends of the guide shaft 3154. A pair of shaft brackets 3155 attached to the front surface of the ornament base 3151, and a guide shaft 3154 that is attached so as to be able to be guided left and right, and has a guide slit 3156a that extends vertically in the lower center of the left-right direction. A slider 3156 for a flat ornamental body and a pair of openings 3152a of the back ornament 3152 attached to the front surface of the slider 3156 for a subordinate ornament are closed, and an ellipse is formed in a portion facing the opening 3152a. Back side sub-decoration body 3157 having a sub-decoration 3157a and a back side attached to the front side of the sub-decoration body slider 3156 behind the back top sub-decoration body 3157 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side. And an upper sub-decorative substrate 3158.

Further, the back side decorative body unit 3150 is attached to the back side sub-driving motor 3159, which is mounted near the lower end of the front surface of the decoration body base 3151 so that the rotation shaft extends left and right, and the rotation axis of the back side sub-driving motor 3159. The worm gear 3160, which is provided with the worm gear 3160, and the disk-shaped main body 3161a rotatably attached to the ornament base 3151 above the worm gear 3156, extend along the outer peripheral surface of the main body 3161a, and mesh with the worm gear 3160. The gear portion 3161b, the extending portion 3161c extending from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 3161a on the side opposite to the gear portion 3161b to the rear of the slider 3156 for a sub-decoration body, and the tip end of the extending portion 3161c protrude forward. And a gear member 3161 having a cylindrical sliding pin 3161d slidably inserted into the guide slit 3156a of the slider 3156 for the sub-decoration body.

In the back decoration unit 3150, the two openings 3152a of the back decoration 3152 form the outer circumference of the eyes of a predetermined character, and the sub-decoration body 3157 of the back sub decoration 3157 that faces forward from the two openings 3152a. The decoration 3157a forms a pupil. The back decoration 3152 and the back sub-decoration 3157 have a light-transmitting property, and are light-emitted and decorated by the LEDs of the back decoration substrate 3153 and the back sub-decoration board 3158 which are arranged at the rear of each. ..

As shown in the figure, the back side decorative body unit 3150 is in a normal state in which the head of a predetermined character, which is carved by the back side decorative body 3152, is turned upside down. In addition, the back side decorative body unit 3150 can slide the back side sub decorative body 3157 to the left and right with respect to the back side decorative body 3152 by rotationally driving the back side sub driving motor 3159. As a result, it is possible to perform a movable effect in which the pupil (sub-decoration 3157a) of the predetermined character, which is embodied by the back decoration 3152, sways left and right.

Next, the operation of the back side movable effect unit 3100 will be described in detail. First, the operation of the back side sub-decoration body 3157 in the back side decoration body unit 3150 will be described. As shown in FIG. 107(a), in a normal state, the extending piece 3161c of the gear member 3161 is attached in a state of vertically extending upward. In this state, the sub-decoration body slider 3156 is located substantially in the center of the sliding range extending to the left and right, and the two sub-decoration bodies 3157 of the back sub-decoration body 3157 attached to the front surface of the sub-decoration body slider 3156 are attached. The decorations 3157a are located substantially in the center of the two openings 3152a of the back decoration 3152, respectively. That is, in a normal state, the predetermined character embroidered by the back decoration 3152 is looking to the front.

In this normal state, for example, when the worm gear 3160 is rotated clockwise in the right side view by the back auxiliary drive motor 3159, the gear member 3161b meshed with the worm gear 3160 causes the gear member 3161 to be viewed in a front view. It rotates in the clockwise direction and revolves so that the sliding pin 3161d located above the center of rotation moves to the left. By the revolving movement of the sliding pin 3161d to the left, the sliding pin 3161d slides downward in the guide slit 3156a, and the sliding pin 3161d presses the inner surface of the guide slit 3156a to the left, so that the sub decoration The body slider 3156 slides to the left. As a result, the sub-decoration 3157a is moved to the left, so that the predetermined character muffled by the back decoration 3152 is looking to the left (see FIG. 107(b)).

On the other hand, when the worm gear 3160 is rotated counterclockwise in the right side view by the back auxiliary drive motor 3159, the gear member 3161b meshed with the worm gear 3160 rotates the gear member 3161 clockwise in the front view. Then, the sliding pin 3161d located above the center of rotation revolves so as to move to the right. By the revolving movement of the sliding pin 3161d to the right, the sliding pin 3161d slides downward in the guide slit 3156a, and at the same time, the sliding pin 3161d presses the inner surface of the guide slit 3156a to the right, and the secondary decoration The body slider 3156 slides to the right. As a result, the sub-decoration 3157a is moved to the right, so that the predetermined character embroidered by the back decoration 3152 is looking to the right (see FIG. 107(c)).

In this way, since the subordinate decoration 3157a can be moved to the left and right by the rotational driving of the backside auxiliary drive motor 3159, a predetermined character seen by the backside decorative body 3152 can be seen depending on the game state. It is possible to perform movable production in which the direction in which the user is moving changes. In addition, by moving the sub-decoration 3157a back and forth to the left and right, it is possible to perform a movable effect in which the eyes of a predetermined character, which is embroidered by the back decorative body 3152, can be swayed, and a variety of movable effects are presented to the player. can do.

Next, the raising/lowering operation of the back side decorative body unit 3150 in the back side movable effect unit 3100 will be described in detail. The back upper movable effect unit 3100 of this embodiment can raise and lower the back decoration unit 3150 and rotate the back decoration unit 3150 by 180 degrees.

First, the internal mechanism of the back side movable effect unit 3100 for moving the back side decoration unit 3150 up and down will be described. As shown in FIG. 108, FIG. 111, etc., a back drive motor 3103 having a rotary shaft oriented in the front-rear direction is arranged at the right end in front view. The rotation center of the first driven gear 3105, which meshes with the drive gear 3104 attached to the rotation shaft of the back drive motor 3103, is arranged at the lower left in front view with respect to the rotation center of the drive gear 3104. The rotation center of the second driven gear 3106 that meshes with the first driven gear 3105 is arranged at the upper left of the rotation center of the first driven gear 3105 in a front view and substantially at the same height as the rotation center of the drive gear 3104. There is. In addition, the rotation center of the first transmission member 3107 having the first transmission gear 3107a that meshes with the second driven gear 3106 is lower than the rotation center of the second driven gear 3106 when viewed from the front, and the rotation of the first driven gear 3105. It is located at approximately the same height as the center. Furthermore, the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108 having the second transmission gear 3108a that meshes with the first transmission gear 3107a of the first transmission member 3107 is the upper left in front view with respect to the rotation center of the first transmission member 3107. It is arranged at a position higher than the rotation center of the second driven gear 3106.

Further, the rotation center of the first transmitted member 3117 to which the rotation from the first transmission member 3106 is transmitted is coaxial with the second driven gear 3106 at the upper right in a front view with respect to the rotation center of the first transmission member 3106. It is located in a position. On the other hand, the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3122 to which the rotation from the second transmission member 3108 is transmitted is slightly to the left of the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108 when viewed from the front, and the rotation center of the second transmission member 3107. It is located lower than the center of rotation. The rotation center of the second movable base drive member 3124, to which the rotation of the second transmitted member 3122 is transmitted, is arranged on an axis line extending vertically through the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3122.

In the normal state, the back side decorative body unit 3150 is located at the ascending end in the up and down range of elevation, and the top and bottom of the predetermined character which is curled by the back side decorative body 3152 are reversed. In the normal state, most of the back decoration unit 3150 is located behind the center accessory 2500, and only a small part thereof is in the frame of the center accessory 2500, as shown in FIG. 83 and the like. It can be seen from the player side through the inside. That is, the underside decorative body unit 3150 is located at the retracted position where it is almost invisible to the player side in the normal state.

When the back decoration unit 3150 is in the retracted position, the first transmission pin 3107b of the first transmission member 3107 is in front of the rotation center of the first transmission member 3107 as shown in FIGS. The second transmission pin 3108b of the second transmission member 3108 is located at the upper left of the view (a position inclined by about 27 degrees to the left from the vertical line), and the upper right of the front view with respect to the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108 ( It is located about 13 degrees to the right of the vertical line). Further, at the retracted position, the first action pin 3117b of the first transmitted member 3117 is located at the upper left in front view (a position inclined by about 45 degrees from the vertical line to the left with respect to the rotation center of the first transmitted member 3117). ), and the first transmission slit 3117d of the first transmitted member 3117 has an angle smaller than horizontal with respect to the axis connecting the first action pin 3117b from the rotation center (about 72 with respect to the vertical line). Angle in degrees) extends toward the upper left of the front view.

In the retracted position, the second transmission slit 3122c of the second transmitted member 3122 extends from the center of rotation toward the upper left in front view (an angle of about 36 degrees from the vertical line to the left from the vertical line). Further, the second movable base drive member 3124 has a rotation center located above the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3122 and slightly below the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108, and has a second action. The pin 3124a is located at the upper right in a front view (a position inclined by about 45 degrees from the vertical line to the right) with respect to the rotation center of the second movable base drive member 3124.

Further, at the retracted position, the first lock protrusion 3107c of the first transmission member 3107 is inserted into the first lock recess 3117e of one of the first transmitted members 3117 (the one closer to the rotation center of the first transmission member 3107). ing. As a result, the rotation of the first transmitted member 3117 is restricted (locked), so that the first movable base 3116 does not slide up and down. Further, the second lock protrusion 3108c of the second transmission member 3108 is inserted into the second lock recess 3122d on one side of the second transmitted member 3122 (the side closer to the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108). As a result, the rotation of the second transmitted member 3122 is restricted (locked), so that the second movable base drive member 3124 does not rotate and the second movable base 3119 does not slide vertically.

Further, when the back decoration unit 3150 is in the retracted position, the detection piece 3111a of the left slider 3111 on which the first movable base 3116 is slidably mounted vertically is detected by the back lift detection sensor 3112.

In the back side movable effect unit 3100, when the back side drive motor 3103 rotates the drive gear 3104 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front with the back side decorative body unit 3150 in the retracted position, the first driven gear 3105 and the first driven gear 3105. The first transmission member 3107 rotates in the clockwise direction and the second transmission member 3108 rotates in the counterclockwise direction via the two driven gears 3106 at the same speed. Then, first, the first transmission pin 3107d of the first transmission member 3107 starts to enter the first transmission slit 3117d of the first transmitted member 3117 (see FIG. 113(b)).

Then, when the drive gear 3104 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction and the first transmission member 3107 is further rotated in the clockwise direction, the first notch portion 3107d is rotated to the position of the first lock concave portion 3117e. The first lock protrusion 3107c is disengaged from the inside of the first lock recess 3117e, and the first transmission pin 3107b abuts on the inner surface of the first transmission slit 3117d to press the first transmission slit 3117d downward. As a result, the rotation of the first transmission member 3107 is transmitted to the first transmitted member 3117, and the first transmitted member 3117 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in front view. At this time, the first notch 3107d is located at the portion of the first lock recess 3117e, and the first lock protrusion 3107c is disengaged (unlocked) from the inside of the first lock recess 3117e. Therefore, the first transmitted member 3117 rotates without being blocked by the first locking protrusion 3107c (see FIG. 114(c)).

When the first transmitted member 3117 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, the first action pin 3117b revolves downward and the first action pin 3117b is slidably inserted. The first movable base 3116 slides downward through the one bearing slit 3118a. Since the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is attached to the first movable base 3116 via the second movable base 3119, the back upper decorative body unit 3105 also slides downward together with the first movable base 3116.

Since the second transmission guide portion 3123d of the rotation link member 3123 extends vertically when the first movable base 3116 slides downward, it is attached to the first movable base 3116 and the second transmission guide portion 3123d. The second movable base driving member 3214 having the second transmitted guided portion 3124c guided by the above can move downward together with the first movable base 3116, and the first movable base 3116 slides smoothly.

Then, when the drive gear 3104 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction and the first transmission member 3107 is further rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view, the first transmission pin 3107b is disengaged from the first transmission slit 3117d, and The lock protrusion 3107c enters into the other first lock recess 3117e different from the first lock recess 3117e into which the first lock protrusion 3107c was initially inserted. As a result, the rotation of the first transmitted member 3117 is stopped, and the downward sliding of the first movable base 3116 is stopped (see FIGS. 109 and 114(d)). In this state, the first movable base 3116 is located at the lower end of the ascending/descending range, and the back decoration unit 3150 is located at the first appearance position. Further, in the first transmission member 3107, the rotation range in which the first transmission pin 3107b is inserted into the first transmission slit 3117d of the first transmitted member 3117 is the first specific rotation range.

When the back decorative body unit 3150 is in the first appearance position, the top and bottom are reversed as in the retracted position, and as shown in FIG. The player is facing the player from the inside of the center accessory 2500. In the state of the first appearance position, the pair of openings 3152a of the back decorative body 3152 and the sub-decoration 3157a facing the opening 3152a can be partially viewed from the player side, As a result, it is possible to present a movable effect in which a predetermined character embellished by the back decoration 3152 is looking upside down from above.

In the state where the upper back decoration unit 3150 is in the first appearance position, the second transmission pin 3108b of the second transmission member 3108 rotating together with the first transmission member 3107 causes the second transmission pin 3108b of the second transmitted member 3122 to transmit the second transmission pin 3108b. It has not reached the slit 3122c. Further, the rotation center of the second movable base drive member 3124 attached to the first movable base 3116 is located lower than the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3122, and the second rotation link member 3123 has a second rotation center. Only the upper portion of the second transmitted guide portion 3124c of the second movable base drive member 3124 is guided with respect to the transmission guide portion 3123d.

From the state where the back decoration unit 3150 is in the first appearance position, the drive gear 3104 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction to further rotate the first transmission member 3107 in the clockwise direction and the second transmission member 3108. Is further rotated counterclockwise in a front view, the first transmission pin 3107b moves away from the first transmission slit 3117d and the second transmission pin 3108b enters the second transmission slit 3122c of the second transmitted member 3122. Is started (see FIG. 115(e)).

Then, when the drive gear 3104 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction and the second transmission member 3108 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction, the second cutout portion 3108d is rotated to the position of the second lock concave portion 3122d. The second lock protrusion 3108c is disengaged from the inside of the second lock recess 3122d, and the second transmission pin 3108b abuts the inner surface of the second transmission slit 3122c to press the second transmission slit 3122c rightward in front view. Accordingly, the rotation of the second transmitted member 3108 is transmitted to the second transmitted member 3122, and the second transmitted member 3122 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. At this time, the second notch 3108d is located at the portion of the second lock recess 3122d, and the second lock protrusion 3108c is disengaged (lock is released) from the inside of the second lock recess 3122d. Therefore, the second transmitted member 3122 rotates without being blocked by the second lock protrusion 3108c (see FIG. 115(f)).

When the second transmitted member 3122 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the first transmission guide portion 3122e formed on the front surface of the second transmitted member 3122 also rotates. The rotary link member 3123 having the first transmitted guided portion 3123b slidably guided also tries to rotate in the same clockwise direction. On the other hand, an upper part of the second transmitted guide portion 3124c of the second movable base drive member 3124 rotatably attached to the first movable base 3116 slides on the second transmission guide portion 3123d on the front surface of the rotation link member 3123. It is possible to be guided. As a result, when the rotation link member 3123 is rotated clockwise by the first transmitted member 3122, the second transmission guide portion 3123d also tries to rotate, and the second transmission guide portion 3123d and the second transmitted guide portion 3123d are rotated. An attempt is made to revolve the second movable base drive member 3124 about the rotation link member 3123 via the portion 3124c.

However, since the second movable base drive member 3124 is rotatably attached to the first movable base 3116 and cannot revolve around the rotation link member 3123, the force acting on the second transmitted guide portion 3124c. On the contrary, the rotation link member 3123 tries to revolve around the second movable base drive member 3124 due to the reaction force of. At this time, the rotation link member 3123 intersects with the extending direction (first direction) of the first transmission guide portion 3122e and the extending direction (first direction) of the second transmission guide portion 3123d. In the second direction), the rotation link member 3123 can slide along the first direction and the second direction so that the force acting on the rotation link member 3123 becomes small. Becomes As a result, the rotation of the rotation link member 3123 and the sliding in the first direction and the second direction transmit the rotation of the first transmitted member 3122 to the second movable base driving member 3124, and the second movable base driving member 3124. 3124 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front (see FIGS. 115(f) to 116(h)).

In other words, the rotation link member 3123 is forcibly rotated by the second transmitted member 3122 by the first transmission guide portion 3122e and the first transmitted guide portion 3123b. When the rotation link member 3123 rotates clockwise in a front view, the second transmission guide portion 3123d extending vertically in FIG. 115(e) is obliquely rotated and inclined so that its upper end moves to the right. (See FIG. 115(f)). When the second transmission guide portion 3123d is rotationally inclined, the second movable base drive member 3124 tries to revolve through the second transmitted guide portion 3124c guided by the second transmission guide portion 3123d, but the second movable base drive member 3124 is revolved. Since the base drive member 3124 is attached to the first movable base 3116 and cannot revolve, the reaction force of the force acting from the rotation link member 3123 to the second movable base drive member 3124 causes the rotation link member 3123 to perform the first transmission. It greatly slides toward the open side (right side in front view) along the guide portion 3122e, and slightly slides toward the center of rotation (downward) of the second movable base drive member 3124 along the second transmission guide portion 3123d. Then, the second movable base drive member 3124 rotates at the same angle as the angle at which the second transmission guide portion 3123d is inclined.

When the second movable base drive member 3124 rotates clockwise in a front view, the second action pin 3124a revolves so as to move downward, and thus the second action pin 3124a is slidably inserted. The second movable base 3119 slides downward through the second bearing slit 3119a. Since the back decoration unit 3150 is attached to the second movable base 3119, the back decoration unit 3105 together with the second movable base 3119 also slides downward from the first appearance position. At this time, the back decoration unit 3150 is rotatably attached by the shaft portion 3151a and the bearing hole 3119b of the second movable base 3119, and at the same time, the decoration rotation unit attached at the rear end of the shaft portion 3151a. Since the gear 3120 meshes with the rack gear 3115a of the rack member 3115 attached to the first movable base 3116, when the second movable base 3119 slides downward, the back decorative body together with the decorative body rotating gear 3120. The unit 3150 rotates counterclockwise in a front view (see FIG. 115(f) and the like).

When the drive gear 3104 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction and the second transmitted member 3122 is further rotated in the clockwise direction via the second transmitting member 3108, the rotation link member 3123 is connected to the second transmitted member 3122. It rotates in the clockwise direction at the same angle, slides further toward the open side along the first transmission guide portion 3122e, and the center of the rotation link member 3123 moves second along the second transmission guide portion 3123d. The second movable base drive member 3124 further rotates in the clockwise direction by sliding so as to approach the rotation center of the base drive member 3124. As a result, the back upper decorative body unit 3150 slides further downward together with the second movable base 3119, and the back upper decorative body unit 3150 further rotates in the counterclockwise direction (see FIG. 116(g)).

Then, when the drive gear 3104 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction and the second transmission member 3108 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction, the second transmission pin 3108b is disengaged from the second transmission slit 3122c and the second lock is performed. The protrusion 3108c enters into another second lock recess 3122d different from the second lock recess 3122d into which the second lock protrusion 3108c was initially inserted. As a result, the rotation of the second transmitted member 3122 is stopped, the downward movement of the second movable base 3199 is stopped, and the top-and-bottom decorative body unit 3150 is 180 degrees above and below the first appearance position. It stops in the rotated state (see FIG. 110 and FIG. 116(h)). In this state, the first movable base 3116 and the second movable base 3119 are also positioned at the lower end of the ascending/descending range, and the back decorative body unit 3150 is positioned at the second appearance position. .. Further, in the second transmission member 3108, the rotation range in which the second transmission pin 3108b is inserted into the second transmission slit 3122c of the second transmitted member 3122 is the second specific rotation range.

In a state where the back decoration unit 3150 (back decoration 3152) is in the second appearance position, the second lock protrusion 3108c of the second transmission member 3108 is inside the second lock recess 3122d of the second transmitted member 3122. Since it is inserted, the rotation of the second transmitted member 3122 is blocked, and the second movable base 3119 does not slide further downward. Further, in the state in which the back decoration unit 3150 is in the second appearance position, as shown in FIG. 148, the top and bottom of the predetermined character that is struck by the back decoration 3152 are in a normal state, and The upper decorative body 3152 is positioned substantially in the center of the frame of the center accessory 2500, and almost the entire back upper decorative body 3152 can be visually recognized from the player side.

When the back decoration unit 3150 descends from the first appearance position to the second appearance position, the back movable design unit 3100 descends while rotating the back decoration 3152 whose top and bottom has been reversed while rotating 180 degrees. Then, the player can be presented with a movable effect that is positioned substantially in the center of the frame of the center accessory 2500 (on the front surface of the central liquid crystal display device 1500) in a normal state, which greatly surprises the player. You can

When the back side decorative body unit 3150 is in the second appearance position and the driving gear 3104 is rotated by the back side driving motor 3103 in the range direction (clockwise direction in front view) different from the above, the back side decorative body unit 3150 is rotated. Reversely moves up through the first appearance position toward the retracted position, and when the detection piece 3111a of the left slider 3111 is detected by the back up/down detection sensor 3112, the drive gear by the back up drive motor 3103 is detected. The rotation of 3104 stops, and the back decoration unit 3150 returns to the retracted position.

The back side movable effect unit 3100 can raise and lower the back side decorative body unit 3150 in two steps from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and further from the first appearance position to the second appearance position. Separately, since the back sub-decoration body 3157 (sub-decoration 3157a) can be slid to the left and right with respect to the back top decoration body 3152 (a direction perpendicular to the vertical direction of the back top decoration body 3152), their movements By appropriately combining, it is possible to present various movable effects.

[5-9f. Front and back movable production unit]
Next, the back lower front movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118. FIG. 117(a) is a perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit of the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 117(b) is a perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit of the back unit seen from the back. In addition, FIG. 118(a) is an explanatory view showing the back lower front first decorative body and the back lower front second decorative body of the back lower front movable effect unit from the front in a state of a normal retracted position, and FIG. [Fig. 6] is an explanatory view showing the front lower back front decorative body and the front lower back front decorative body of the front lower back movable effect unit from the front in the appearance position.

The lower back movable production unit 3200 is arranged below the opening 3101a in the vicinity of the front end in the back box 3010. This front lower back movable effect unit 3200 is attached to the front surface of the rear lower rear movable effect unit 3500 and a flat unit base 3201. The lower back front drive motor 3202 that penetrates through 3201 and projects forward, the drive gear 3203 attached to the rotation shaft of the lower back front drive motor 3202, and the drive gear 3203 mesh with the drive gear 3203 from the lower right in a front view. A transmission gear 3204 rotatably attached to the unit base 3201 and a pinion gear 3205 meshing with the transmission gear 3204 from the lower right in a front view and rotatably attached to the unit base 3201 are provided.

Further, the back lower front movable effect unit 3200 has a rack gear 3206a which meshes with the pinion gear 3205 from the right side in front view and extends vertically, and a flat plate-shaped detection piece 3206b protruding rightward in front view. The rack member 3206 mounted on the unit base 3201 so as to be slidable up and down, and the rack member 3206 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3201 and including the drive gear 3203, the transmission gear 3204, the pinion gear 3205, and the rack member 3206. A unit cover 3207 that covers from the front and a back lower front movable detection sensor 3208 attached to the unit cover 3207 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3206b of the rack member 3206 are provided.

Further, the lower back front movable effect unit 3200 has a link pin 3209a protruding rearward from a position between the center in the left-right direction in front view and the left end, and the left end in front view is the upper end of the rack member 3206. And a three-dimensionally decorated translucent front first back decorative body 3209 having a right end in front view slidably attached to the unit base 3201. One front lower back decorative board 3210 attached to the rear surface of one decorative body 3209 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a strip base-shaped front lower front decorative body 3209 and a unit base A link slit extending in an arc shape, which is rotatably attached to the unit base 3201 and the unit cover 3207 near the center of the unit base 3201 between the unit base 3201 and the unit base 3201 and slidably inserted with a link pin 3209a. A link member 3211 having 3211a, a back lower front second decorative body 3212 attached to the tip of the link member 3211 and imitating the hand of a predetermined character, and a rear surface of the back lower front second decorative body 3212. And a front lower back second decorative substrate 3213 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface.

Next, the operation of the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 in the front lower back movable effect unit 3200 will be described. As shown in FIG. 118(a), the front lower back movable effect unit 3200 is lowered in the normal state with respect to the rack member 3206 to which the first front lower back decoration 3209 is attached and the vertical sliding direction. The link member 3211, which is located at the end and to which the second lower back front decorative body 3212 is attached, extends obliquely so that the tip is located slightly above the horizontal.

In this state, the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 are located below the frame of the center accessory 2500, and cannot be visually recognized by the player (FIG. 83 etc.). That is, in the normal state, the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 are in the retracted position invisible to the player. In the state where the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 are in the retracted position, the detection piece 3206b of the rack member 3206 is detected by the back lower front movable detection sensor 3208.

In the normal state, the back lower front movable effect unit 3200 rotates the drive gear 3203 counterclockwise when viewed from the front by the back lower front drive motor 3202, and the pinion gear 3205 rotates counterclockwise. The rack member 3206 is lifted by the rack gear 3206a meshing with the pinion gear 3205. Since the back lower front decorative body 3209 is attached to the upper end of the rack member 3206, the back lower front decorative body 3209 also rises together with the rack member 3206.

When the back lower front decorative body 3209 rises, the link pin 3209a inserted in the link slit 3211a of the link member 3211 also rises. Therefore, the link pin 3209a presses the inner surface of the link slit 3211a upward and the link slit 3211a By sliding inside, the link member 3211 rotates in the clockwise direction in front view with the base end as the center. Since the back lower front second decorative body 3212 is attached to the tip of the link member 3211, the back lower front second decorative body 3212 moves upward as the back lower front first decorative body 3209 rises. Rotate to move.

After that, when the rack member 3206 reaches the rising end, the rotation of the back lower front drive motor 3202 stops, the rising of the back lower front first decorative body 3209 stops, and the rotation of the back lower front second decorative body 3212. Stops. In this state, as shown in FIG. 118( b ), the link member 3211 is in a substantially upright state, and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 is located above the back lower front first decorative body 3209. ..

Further, in the state where the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 are raised, as shown in FIG. 148, the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 are It is located in the front view frame of the center accessory 2500, and can be sufficiently viewed from the player side (front). That is, the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 are in the appearance positions that can be visually recognized from the player side. As shown in FIG. 148, the front lower back front decoration 3209 and the front lower back second decoration 3212 are positioned in front of the back decoration 3152 of the back movable production unit 3100 in the appearance position. Therefore, there is no contact with the upper back decorative body 3152. In addition, the back lower front second decorative body 3212 is formed so as to partially overlap with the back upper decorative body 3152 at the second appearance position by being moved to the appearance position.

In addition, in the state where the front lower back front decorative body 3209 and the second front lower back decoration 3212 are in the appearance position, the drive gear 3103 is driven by the front lower back drive motor 3102 in the opposite direction (clockwise as viewed from the front). ), the first back lower back decorative body 3209 descends and the second front back lower decorative body 3212 rotates so as to move leftward in front view. When the detection piece 3206b of the rack member 3206 is detected by the front lower back movement detection sensor 3208, the rotation driving of the front lower back drive motor 3102 is stopped, and the lowering of the front lower front decorative body 3209 is stopped. The rotation of the back lower front second decorative body 3212 is stopped, and the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 are returned to the retracted position.

In this way, the back lower front movable effect unit 3200 sets the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 outside the frame (withdrawal position) and inside the frame (appearing position) of the center accessory 2500. Since it can be moved between, it is possible to surprise the player by causing it to appear in the frame of the center accessory 2500. Further, the back lower front first decorative body 3209 rises and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 rotates and appears, and the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body Since 3212 and the characters appear in different movements, it is possible to make the illusion that the movement of the movable effect is a complicated movement, and entertain the player.

[5-9 g. Back right movable production unit]
Next, the back right movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120. FIG. 119(a) is a perspective view of the back right movable effect unit of the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 119(b) is a perspective view of the back right movable effect unit of the back unit seen from the back. FIG. 120(a) is a front view of the back right movable effect unit shown with the first decorative surface of the back right rotation decorative body facing the front, and FIG. 120(b) is a back right rotation decorative body in (a). Is a front view of the back right movable effect unit shown in a state where the shutter of is opened, and (c) is a front view of the back right movable effect unit shown with the second decorative surface of the back right rotating decorative body facing the front. Yes, (d) is a front view of the back right movable effect unit shown with the third decorative surface of the back right rotating decorative body facing the front.

The back right movable effect unit 3300 is attached inside the back box 3010 to the right of the opening 3010a in front view. This back right movable effect unit 3300 is installed in the back box 3010 and has a back right sheet metal base 3301 extending vertically in a U-shape when viewed from the front, and a back right upper base attached to the front upper part of the back right sheet metal base 3301. 3302, a lower back right base 3303 attached to the lower front surface of the lower right sheet metal base 3301, a rear right drive motor 3304 attached to the lower surface of the lower back right base 3303, and a rotational drive by the rear right drive motor 3304. And a cylindrical back right rotation decorative body 3310 rotatably attached by a back upper right base 3302 and a back lower right base 3303.

The back right sheet metal base 3301 is formed of a metal plate. The back upper right base 3302 has a low-cylindrical cover portion 3302a that covers the upper portion of the back right rotating decorative body 3310, and a cutout portion 3302b that is formed by cutting out a predetermined range in the circumferential direction of the cover portion 3302a. .. The back lower right base 3303 has a discharge port 3303a penetrating vertically. The cutout portion 3302b of the back upper right base 3302 is located immediately after the rear discharge port 2554 in the center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. Further, the discharge port 3303a of the lower back right base 3303 is located directly above the second entrance 3042 of the lower right ball passage unit 3040.

The back right rotation decorative body 3310 has a first decorative surface 3310a, a second decorative surface 3310b, and a third decorative surface 3310c that divide the outer peripheral surface into three in the circumferential direction. The back-right rotating decorative body 3310 includes an opening 3311 that extends vertically and opens on the first decorative surface 3310a, and a pair of openings 3311 that are closed from the rotation center side and are slidable vertically. 3312, an inner decorative body 3313 that is attached to the center of the opening 3311 in the vertical direction on the rotation center side of the pair of shutters 3312, and an outer decoration that is attached to the rotation center side of the inner decoration body 3313. A rear right first decorative substrate (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface, and a pair of shutters 3312 that are mounted closer to the center of rotation than the rear right first decorative substrate, move toward or away from each other. And a back right shutter solenoid (not shown) that slides in this manner.

On the first decorative surface 3310a of the back-right rotating decorative body 3310, usually, the pair of shutters 3312 are close to each other and abutted (see FIG. 120(a)). Then, when the pair of shutters 3312 are separated by driving the back right shutter solenoid according to the game state, the inside decoration body 3313 faces the outside from between the pair of shutters 3312, and in this state the back right first decoration By causing the LED on the substrate to emit light, the inner decoration body 3313 which is light-emitted and decorated can be shown to the player.

Although detailed illustration is omitted on the second decorative surface 3310b of the back right rotation decoration 3310, a back right character decoration 3318 having a light transmitting property is formed by forming predetermined characters in a relief shape. Have On the rotation center side of the second decorative surface 3310b, a back right second decorative substrate (not shown) having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface facing the outside is attached. The decorative substrate allows the second decorative surface 3310b (back right character decoration 3318) to be illuminated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 120(d), a game ball is opened on the third decorative surface 3310c of the back right rotation decoration 3310 so that the game ball can enter the same height as the cover portion 3302a of the back right base 3302. The back right sphere entrance 3320, which is in communication with the back right sphere entrance 3320, and is also communicable with the discharge port 3303a of the back lower right base 3303, and is a game ball arranged closer to the rotation center than the outer peripheral surface. A back right effect space 3321 that can be distributed, a ball guiding member 3322 that is mounted in the back right effect space 3321 and spirally rolls down a game ball that has entered the back right ball entrance 3320, It is provided with a back right third decorative substrate 3323 that extends vertically adjacent to the right effect space 3321 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

Next, the operation of the back-right rotating decorative body 3310 in the back-right movable effect unit 3300 will be described. The back-right movable effect unit 3300 can rotate the back-right rotating decorative body 3310 in any direction about the axis extending in the up-down direction by the rotational driving of the back-right driving motor 3304. In the back right movable effect unit 3300, in a normal state (first decorative state), the first decorative surface 3310a faces forward as shown in FIG. 120(a). On the first decorative surface 3310a, a pair of shutters 3312 arranged closer to the center of rotation than the opening 3311 normally abut each other to close the opening 3311.

Further, in the first decoration state, the cutout portion 3302b of the cover portion 3302a in the back upper right base 3302 is closed by the outer peripheral surface of the first decoration surface 3310a. Therefore, when the back right movable effect unit 3300 is in the first decoration state, the rear discharge port 2554 of the center accessory 2500 which coincides with the cutout portion 3302b is also closed by the outer peripheral surface of the first decoration surface 3310a. As a result, in the first decoration state, when the game ball is received in the upper prize hole 2006 of the center accessory 2500, the rear discharge port 2554 of the rear guideway 2553 is closed by the outer peripheral surface of the first decorative surface 3310a. Therefore, the game ball received in the upper prize hole 2006 enters the escape passage 2555 that branches near the rear end of the rear guideway 2553, passes through the escape passage 2555, and passes from the outlet 2556 to the back right ball passage. It is delivered to the third entrance 3043 of the unit 3040, and is discharged downward through the inside of the back right ball passage unit 3040.

In the back right movable effect unit 3300, when the back right shutter solenoid (not shown) is energized in the first decoration state, the pair of shutters 3312 are separated in the vertical direction, and the inner decoration body 3313 is separated from between the pair of shutters 3312. It is in a state of facing the outside (see FIG. 120(b)). Then, the LED (high-intensity LED) of the back right first decorative substrate (not shown) arranged on the rotation center side of the inner decorative body 3313 is caused to emit light, and the inner decorative body 3313 facing between the pair of shutters 3312 is emitted. To decorate. As a result, it is possible to suggest the arrival of a chance to the player.

In addition, the back right movable effect unit 3300 may be in a state (second decoration state) in which the second decorative surface 3310b of the back right rotating decorative body 3310 is stopped forward by the rotational driving of the back right driving motor 3304. Yes (see FIG. 120(c)). In this second decoration state, by illuminating the LED on the back right second decoration substrate (not shown), the back right character decoration 3318 formed of a predetermined character formed on the second decoration surface 3310b can be illuminated. It is possible to suggest the arrival of a chance to the player. In the second decoration state, the cutout portion 3302b of the cover portion 3302a is closed by the outer peripheral surface of the second decoration surface 3310b, as in the first decoration state.

Further, the back right movable effect unit 3300 may be in a state (third decoration state) in which the third decorative surface 3310c of the back right rotating decorative body 3310 is stopped forward by the rotational driving of the back right driving motor 3304. Yes (see FIG. 120(d)). In the third decoration state, as shown in the drawing, the back right effect space 3321 in which the game balls can be distributed can be visually recognized from the player side. In the third decoration state, the back right sphere entrance 3320 is located at the cutout portion 3302b of the cover portion 3302a. Therefore, in the third decoration state, the rear discharge port 2554 of the center accessory 2500 and the back right ball entrance 3320 are aligned with each other, and the game balls are communicatably communicated with each other.

Then, in the third decoration state, the game ball received in the upper prize hole 2006 of the center accessory 2500 enters the back right ball entrance 3320 from the rear discharge port 2554 of the rear guideway 2553, and the back right effect space 3321. The ball guiding member 3322 arranged in the lower part makes a downward spiral while rotating in the back right effect space 3321 a plurality of times (here, eight times) spirally around an axis extending vertically (see FIG. 175(a)). .. As a result, the game ball received in the upper prize hole 2006 can be made to flow in a spiral shape in the back right effect space 3321, so that the player can visually recognize the game ball accepted in the upper prize hole 2006. It is possible to increase the expectation for paying out the game balls by receiving the game balls to the upper prize hole 2006, and to entertain the player with the game balls that flow in a spiral shape. Can be suppressed. In addition, by letting the game balls received in the upper special winning opening 2006 flow down while rotating spirally, it is possible that a larger number of balls than the number actually entered in the upper special winning opening 2006 are entered. It also has the effect of making the player illusion.

After that, the game ball that has flowed down in the back right effect space 3321 is discharged from the discharge port 3303a of the back lower right base 3303, and enters the second entrance 3042 of the right lower ball guiding unit 3040 which is opened immediately below. After passing through the lower right sphere passage unit 3040, it is discharged into the lower substrate holder 1200.

As described above, according to the back right movable effect unit 3300, various movable effects can be presented to the player, and the player can be entertained.

[5-9h. Back left movable production unit]
Next, the back left movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 to 123. 121(a) is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 121(b) is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit seen from the back. Also, FIG. 122(a) is a front view of the back left movable effect unit shown with the first decorative surface of the back left rotating decoration body facing the front, and FIG. 122(b) is the second decoration of the back left rotating decoration body. It is a front view of the back left movable production unit shown in the state where the surface was turned to the front. And (d) is a front view of the back left movable effect unit showing a state where the back left protruding decoration of the back left rotating decoration is set to the appearance position in the state of (a). Further, FIG. 123 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 122(a).

The back left movable effect unit 3400 is attached inside the back box 3010 to the left of the opening 3010a in front view. This back left movable effect unit 3400 is installed in the back box 3010, and has a back left sheet metal base 3401 vertically extending in a U-shape when viewed from the front, and a back upper left base attached to the front upper part of the back left sheet metal base 3401. 3402, the lower back left base 3403 attached to the lower front surface of the rear left sheet metal base 3401, the rear left drive motor 3404 attached to the lower surface of the lower back left base 3403, and the rear left drive motor 3404 are rotationally driven, A columnar back left rotating decorative body 3410 is rotatably attached by a back upper left base 3402 and a back lower left base 3403. The back left sheet metal base 3401 is formed of a metal plate.

The back left rotating decorative body 3410 has a first decorative surface 3410a, a second decorative surface 3410b, and a third decorative surface 3410c that divide the outer peripheral surface into three in the circumferential direction. As shown in FIG. 122(a), the back left rotating decorative body 3410 has a door decoration 3411 on the first decorative surface 3410a. The back left rotation decorative body 3410 is arranged closer to the rotation center than the first decoration surface, and has a back left first decoration substrate 3412 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface facing the outside. .. The first decorative surface 3410a can be made to emit light by appropriately emitting the LED on the back left first decorative substrate 3412.

Although not shown in detail, the second decorative surface 3410b of the back left rotating decoration 3410 has a relief-shaped character different from the back right character decoration 3318 of the back right rotating decoration 3310. It has a translucent back left character decoration 3413. On the rotation center side of the second decorative surface 3410b, a rear left second decorative board 3414 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface facing the outside is attached. The second decorative surface 3410b (back left character decoration 3413) can be light-emitted.

Further, on the third decorative surface 3410c of the back left rotating decorative body 3410, the back left projection portion 3415 forming the outer peripheral surface and the rotation center side of the back left projecting portion 3415 are arranged to have a light transmitting property. The projection film 3416 is provided, and a back left third decorative substrate 3417, which is arranged closer to the center of rotation than the projection film 3416 and has a plurality of color LEDs mounted on the surface facing the outside. Although not shown, the projection film 3416 has a red pattern projected in red and a blue pattern projected in blue, which are represented by a single color and are different from each other, and have a red pattern. The part where the design and the blue design overlap is milky white or transparent, and the parts other than the red design and the blue design are black or opaque. In this third decorative portion 3410c, in the back left third decorative substrate 3417, a red pattern can be projected on the back left projection portion 3415 by emitting red light, and a blue pattern can be projected by emitting blue light. It can be projected on the left projection unit 3415.

Further, on the third decorative surface 3410c, a pair of door members 3420 which are vertically arranged at the end portion of the back left projection portion 3415 near the first decorative surface 3410a and which can be opened and closed, and A pair of back left protrusions arranged on the center of rotation side and slidably mounted between a retracted position inside the outer peripheral surface of the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and an appearance position protruding outside the outer peripheral surface. A decoration 3421 and a pair of back left decoration solenoids 3422 mounted in the back left rotation decoration 3410 and slidingly driving each back left protruding decoration 3421 are provided.

The door member 3420 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape extending vertically as shown in the figure. Although not shown, the door member 3420 is rotatably attached to both ends of the vertically extending side farther from the first decorative surface 3410a, and the opposite vertically extending side is the third side. It is opened and closed so as to move to the outside of the decorative surface 3410c. Further, the door member 3420 has a hook-shaped closing claw 3420a protruding from the inner side surface near the vertically extending side that is rotatably attached.

The back left protruding decorative body 3421 is attached such that the sliding direction is the left-right direction when the first decorative surface 3410a is directed forward (front). This back left protruding decorative body 3421 is formed in the shape of a shuriken, as shown in FIG. The back left protruding decorative body 3421 projects from the vicinity of the tip in a direction away from the first decorative surface 3410a, and has a closing piece 3421a that can be engaged with the closing claw 3420a of the door member 3420.

Next, the operation of the back left rotation decorative body 3410 in the back left movable effect unit 3400 will be described. The back left movable effect unit 3400 can rotate the back left rotating decorative body 3410 in any direction by rotating the back left driving motor 3404 about an axis extending in the vertical direction. In the normal state (first decorative state), the back left movable effect unit 3400 is stopped with the first decorative surface 3410a facing forward, as shown in FIG. 122(a). In this first decorative state, the first decorative surface 3410a can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately causing the LED on the back left first decorative substrate 3412 to emit light. Since the first decoration surface 3410a is provided with a door decoration 3411 that imitates a door, it is possible to make the player think that the door decoration 3411 may be opened by making the first decoration surface 3410a emit light. It is possible to increase the expectation of the player.

Further, in the back left movable effect unit 3400, in a normal state, the back left protruding decoration 3421 of the back left rotating decoration 3410 is housed inside the back left rotating decoration 3410 by the urging force of a spring (not shown). It is located in the retracted position. In the retracted position, the outer surface of the door member 3420 is in the closed state in which the outer surface of the door member 3420 is flush with the third decorative surface 3410c, and the closing piece 3421a of the back left protruding decorative body 3421 is closed by the closing claw of the door member 3420. It is locked to 3420a. As a result, even if the back left rotation decoration 3410 is rotated and the centrifugal force acts on the back left projection decoration 3421 and the door member 3420, the back left projection decoration 3421 is moved to the appearance position by the urging force of the spring (not shown). It is possible to prevent the sliding of the door member 3420 and to prevent the door member 3420 from opening by locking the closing piece 3421a with the locking claw 3420a.

When the back left decoration body solenoid 3422 is driven (energized) in the first decoration state, the back left projection decoration body 3421 slides outward and resists the back left projection while resisting the biasing force of a spring (not shown). The door member 3420 is opened by being pushed by the tip of the decorative body 3421, and the rear left protruding decorative body 3421 is in an appearance position in which it projects outward from the third decorative surface 3410c. As a result, the back left protruding decoration 3421 projects from the back left rotating decoration 3410 that rotates in a cylindrical shape, which can surprise the player. Further, since the pair of back left protruding decorative bodies 3421 can be independently projected, a variety of movable effects can be presented to the player.

When the driving of the rear left decorative body solenoid 3422 is stopped in the appearance position, the rear left protruding decorative body 3421 slides to the retracted position by a spring (not shown). At this time, the closing piece 3421a is locked by the locking claw 3420a, the door member 3420 can be rotated from the open state to the closed state, and automatically returns to the normal state.

In addition, the back left movable effect unit 3400 may be in a state (second decoration state) in which the second decorative surface 3410b of the back left rotating decorative body 3410 is stopped forward by the rotational driving of the back left driving motor 3404. Yes (see FIG. 122(b)). In this second decoration state, the LED on the back left second decoration substrate 3414 can be appropriately made to emit light, so that the back left character decoration 3413 can be made to emit light, which suggests to the player that an opportunity or the like has arrived. You can

Further, the back left movable effect unit 3400 may be in a state (third decoration state) in which the third decorative surface 3410c of the back left rotating decorative body 3410 is stopped forward by the rotational driving of the back left driving motor 3404. Yes (see FIG. 122(c)). In this third decoration state, the LED on the back left third decorative substrate 3417 can cause a red pattern to be projected on the back left projection part 3415 by emitting red light, and a blue pattern can be emitted by emitting blue light. It can be projected on the back left projection unit 3415. As a result, the pattern projected on the back left projection unit 3415 can suggest the arrival of a chance to the player, which can entertain the player and enhance the expectation.

As described above, according to the back right movable effect unit 3300, various movable effects can be presented to the player, and the player can be entertained.

[5-9i. Backward movable production unit]
Next, the rear-bottom rear movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 124 to 136. FIG. 124(a) is a perspective view of the back lower rear movable effect unit of the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 124(b) is a perspective view of the back lower rear movable effect unit of the back unit seen from the back. In addition, FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective view of the elevating unit of the rear lower back movable effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the elevating unit of the rear lower rear movable effect unit as seen from the rear. It is a figure. Further, FIG. 127 is an explanatory view showing the state of the elevating unit from the front when the lower back rear rotating decorative unit is at the lower end position, and FIG. 128 is a view of the elevating unit when the lower rear rear rotating decorative unit is at the upper end position. It is explanatory drawing which shows a state from the front.

Also, FIG. 129(a) is a front view of the back-bottom rear movable effect unit, (b) is a perspective view of the back-bottom rear movable effector unit seen from the front, and FIG. [Fig. 4] is a perspective view of a rear-bottom rear-revolving decorative body unit of the rear-bottom rear-moving effect unit viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 130 is an exploded perspective view of the rear lower back rotating decorative body unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 131 is an exploded perspective view of the lower rear rear rotating decorative body unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 132 is a cross-sectional view taken along line GG in FIG. 129(a).

Further, FIG. 133(a) is a front view showing a state in which the back-bottom rear-rotating decorative body of the back-bottom rear-rotating decorative unit has stopped rotating, and FIG. It is a front view which shows the state which is rotating in the direction of rotation, (c) is a front view which shows the state just before it rotates in the clockwise direction of a front view, when a back lower back rotation ornamental body opens. [Fig. 4] is a front view showing a state in which the rear lower back rotating decorative body is rotating clockwise in a front view. Further, FIG. 134(a) is an explanatory view showing the configuration of the drive mechanism related to the rear lower rear rotating decorative body unit in the rear lower rear rotating decorative body unit, and FIG. 134(b) is a rotary damper in the rear lower rear rotating decorative body unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of such a differential mechanism, and (c) is the connection which connects the drive mechanism which concerns on the back lower rear rotary drive motor, and the differential mechanism which concerns on the rotary damper in the back lower rear decorative body unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a mechanism.

Further, FIG. 135(a) is an explanatory view showing a state of the coupling mechanism when the back lower back rotating decorative body is closed and rotation is stopped, and FIG. 135(b) is a back lower rear rotating decorative body in a counterclockwise direction. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a connection mechanism when rotating in the direction. Further, FIG. 136(a) is an explanatory view showing a state of the coupling mechanism when the rotating decorative body is closed and rotation is stopped at the back bottom side, and FIG. 136(b) is a coupling ring of the drive mechanism in a clockwise direction. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a connection mechanism at the time of rotating and rotating the back lower back decoration, and (c) is a connection mechanism rotation ring further clockwise, and is a back lower back rotation decoration. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a connection mechanism when a body is fully opened, (d) is a back underside rotation state of the open state, and when the connection mechanism of a drive mechanism is rotating in the clockwise direction. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the connection mechanism of FIG.

The lower back movable effect unit 3500 is attached below the opening 3010a in the vicinity of the rear end in the back box 3010. The rear-bottom rear movable effect unit 3500 is mounted in the back box 3010 and has a front-bottom front movable effect unit 3200 attached to the front surface, and a rear-bottom rear rotary decorative body that is vertically moved by the lift unit 3510. And a unit 3550.

The raising/lowering unit 3510 of the rear lower back movable effect unit 3500 is attached to a rear surface of a unit base 3511 attached to the front surface of the rear wall below the opening 3010a in the rear box 3010 and a lower left corner of the unit base 3511 in front view. And a rear-bottom rear up-and-down drive motor 3512 whose rotary shaft protrudes forward through the unit base 3511, and a spur gear-shaped vertical drive gear 3513 attached to the rotary shaft of the rear-under-back rear vertical drive drive motor 3512. A first transmission gear 3514a in the form of a spur gear that meshes with the lifting drive gear 3513, and a second transmission gear 3514b that rotates integrally with the front surface of the first transmission gear 3514a and that has a diameter smaller than that of the first transmission gear 3514a. The transmission gear member 3514 rotatably attached to the unit base 3511 and the second transmission gear 3514b of the transmission gear member 3514 mesh with the spur gear-like member rotatably attached to the unit base 3511. An elevating and lowering pinion gear 3515 is provided.

Further, the elevating unit 3510 has a guide slit 3516a that extends vertically at approximately the center in the left-right direction and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a flat plate-shaped detection piece 3516b that protrudes leftward from the lower left end in front view. The unit base 3510 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3510 so as to be slidable up and down, and the rear lower rear decorative member unit 3550 is slidably mounted on the rear surface by a guide slit 3516a. Of the vertical drive rack gear 3517 attached to the rear surface near the left end as viewed from the front and extending vertically and meshing with the vertical drive pinion gear 3515, and the upper end extending vertically and the upper end is the same height as the upper end of the unit base 3511. The fixed rack gear 3518 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3511, and the movable rack gear 3551b which is meshed with the fixed rack gear 3518 and which is mounted on the rear surface of the back lower rear rotating decorative body unit 3550. And a spur gear-shaped acceleration gear 3519 rotatably attached to the elevating base 3516.

Further, the lifting unit 3510 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3511 so as to cover the front of the lifting drive gear 3513, the transmission gear member 3514, the lifting drive pinion gear 3515, and the fixed rack gear 3518 on the left side of the lifting base 3516 in front view. The gear cover left 3520, the rear lower back elevation detection sensor 3521 attached to the front surface of the gear cover left 3520 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3516b of the elevation base 3516, and the unit on the right side of the elevation base 3516 in front view. A guide pinion gear 3522, which is rotatably attached to the front surface of the base 3511, and a guide pinion gear 3522, which meshes with the guide pinion gear 3522 and extends vertically, are attached to the rear surface of the lifting base 3516 on the right end side in front view. Guide rack gear 3523, a gear cover right 3524 that covers the front of the guide rack gear 3523 and is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3511, a lower end side is attached to the elevating base 3516, and an upper end side is a gear cover left 3520 and a gear cover right. A pair of assist springs 3525, which are attached to the respective 3524 and urge the lifting base 3516 upward, are provided.

The lifting unit 3510 is mounted on the rear surface of the substrate base 3526, which is mounted on the rear surface of the unit base 3511 on the right end side in front view, and is mounted on the rear surface of the substrate base 3526. A detection sensor 3521, a back lower rear rotation drive motor 3553, a back lower rear rotation detection sensor 3570, and a back lower rear decoration substrate 3572 which relays connections between the motor drive substrate 3062 and the lamp drive substrate 3060. 3527 and.

Next, the operation of the elevating unit 3510 in the back-bottom rear movable effect unit 3500 will be described. In the normal state, the rear-bottom rear movable effect unit 3500 is located at the lower end position where the rear-bottom rear rotary decorative body 3550 is most lowered. In this state of the descending end position, as shown in FIG. 127, at the upper ends of the elevating drive rack gear 3517 and the guide rack gear 3523 attached to the elevating base 3516, the elevating drive pinion gear 3515 attached to the unit base 3511 and the guide The pinion gears 3522 are in mesh with each other. Further, the acceleration gear 3519 attached to the elevating base 3516 meshes with the lower end of the fixed rack gear 3518 attached to the unit base 3511, and the movable gear attached to the lower back rear rotating decorative body unit 3550. It meshes with the upper end of the side rack gear 3551b.

Further, in the state of the lower end position, the guide pin 3552b of the lower back rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 inserted into the guide slit 3516a of the elevating base 3516 via the guide bush 3528 is located at the lower end of the guide slit 3516a. ing. Further, in the state of the descending end position, the detection piece 3516b of the elevating base 3516 is detected by the back lower rear elevating detection sensor 3521, and the pair of assist springs 3525 extend to urge the elevating base 3516 upward. doing.

In the rear-bottom rear movable effect unit 3500, when the rear-bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is at the lower end position, as shown in FIG. A part of the lower part is visible from the player side above the stage 2530 in the frame of the center accessory 2500.

When the rear lower back rotating decorative body unit 3550 is at the lower end position, when the rear lower rear raising/lowering drive motor 3512 rotates the raising/lowering drive gear 3513 in the counterclockwise direction in front view, the raising/lowering drive pinion gear 3515 rotates counterclockwise. The elevating drive rack gear 3517 that rotates in the direction and meshes with the elevating drive pinion gear 3515 raises the elevating base 3516. When the elevating base 3516 rises, the acceleration gear 3519 rotatably attached to the elevating base 3516 also rises together with the elevating base 3516. The acceleration gear 3519 meshes with the fixed-side rack gear 3518 attached to the unit base 3511. Therefore, when the elevating base 3516 (acceleration gear 3519) rises with respect to the unit base 3511, the acceleration gear 3519 is opposed to the front view. It will rotate in the clockwise direction.

Since the accelerating gear 3519 is on the opposite side of the fixed rack gear 3518 and the movable rack gear 3551b attached to the back lower rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 meshes, the accelerating gear 3519 moves in the counterclockwise direction. When rotated, the lower back rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 rises relative to the elevating base 3516 via the movable rack gear 3551b. At this time, the back-bottom rearward rotating decorative body unit 3550 rises at a speed twice that of the elevating base 3516 by the acceleration gear 3519 meshing with the stationary rack gear 3518 of the unit base 3511.

Further, in the elevating unit 3510, in the elevating base 3516, the guide rack gear 3523 on the side opposite to the elevating drive rack gear 3517 meshes with the guide pinion gear 3522 rotatably attached to the unit base 3511. The elevating base 3516 can be raised straight without the right end of the base 3516 being twisted. Further, in the elevating unit 3510, the pair of assist springs 3525 urge the elevating base 3516 upward, so that the load on the lower back rear elevating drive motor 3512 is reduced. In the pair of assist springs 3525, the assist spring 3525 on the right side when viewed from the front, which is far from the lifting drive rack gear 3517, is extended longer than the assist spring 3525 on the left side and has a stronger biasing force, so that the lifting base 3516 is less likely to tilt. doing.

Then, when the under-bottom rear rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is located at the highest raised position, the under-bottom rear rear lifting drive motor 3512 is stopped. In this state of the raised end position, as shown in FIG. 128, the guide pin 3552b of the back lower rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is located at the upper end of the guide slit 3516a of the elevating base 3516. Further, in the state of the ascending end position, at the lower ends of the elevating drive rack gear 3517 and the guide rack gear 3523 attached to the elevating base 3516, the elevating drive pinion gear 3515 and the guide pinion gear 3522 attached to the unit base 3511 are respectively arranged. It is in mesh. Further, the acceleration gear 3519 attached to the elevating base 3516 meshes with the upper end of the fixed rack gear 3518 attached to the unit base 3511, and the movable gear attached to the lower back rear rotating decorative body unit 3550. The lower rack of the side rack gear 3551b meshes with it.

When the back lower back rotating decorative body unit 3550 is at the rising end position, as shown in FIG. 152, the back lower rear rotating decorative body 3568 is in the frame of the center accessory 2500 (in front of the central liquid crystal display device 1500) in a front view. ) Is located approximately in the center. When the rear lower back rotating decorative body unit 3550 is in the raised end position and the rear lower rear raising/lowering drive motor 3512 rotates the raising/lowering drive gear 3513 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the operation opposite to the above is performed. Then, the rotating decorative body unit 3550 descends after returning to the lower end position.

Next, the back under-rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 of the back under-rear movable effect unit 3500 will be described. The lower back rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 has a cylindrical shaft tube portion 3551a extending forward from the upper portion, and a movable rack gear 3551b extending vertically on the lower rear surface and meshing with the acceleration gear 3159. And a shallow container-shaped ornamental body base 3551 that extends vertically and is open at the front, and has a larger diameter than the axially tubular portion 3551a of the ornamental body base 3551 at the upper portion and penetrates the axially tubular portion 3551a back and forth. Has a through hole 3552a that is inserted concentrically, and a guide pin 3552b that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the lower part to the front and is inserted into the guide slit 3516a of the elevating unit 3510, and the rear is open. And a base cover 3552 attached to the front surface of the ornament base 3551 in a shallow box shape.

In addition, the back lower rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 includes a back lower rear rotating drive motor 3553 mounted on the lower rear surface of the base cover 3552 and a spur gear shape mounted on the rotating shaft of the rear lower rotating drive motor 3553. Rotation drive gear 3554, a spur gear-shaped first driven gear 3555 that meshes with the rotation drive gear 3554 and is rotatably mounted between the ornament base 3551 and the base cover 3552, and a first driven gear. A spur gear-shaped second driven gear 3556 that is engaged with the decoration base 3551 and the base cover 3552 so as to be rotatable, and is engaged with the second driven gear 3556. And a base cover 3552 are rotatably mounted between a spur gear-shaped third driven gear 3557 and the third driven gear 3557 so that the decorative body base 3551 and the base cover 3552 can rotate. A spur gear-shaped fourth driven gear 3558 attached to the, a ring-shaped drive ring gear 3559a meshed with the fourth driven gear 3558, and a front end of the drive ring gear 3559a spaced apart from the front end in the circumferential direction. A plurality of (three in this case) engagement protrusions 3559b and a drive detection piece 3559c that is outwardly flanged from the rear end of the drive ring gear 3559a and is partially cut away in the circumferential direction. Driving gear member 3559, four mounting holes 3560a formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and a plurality of engaging protrusions 3559b of the driving gear member 3559 that are recessed from the rear end toward the front. It has a plurality of engaging recesses 3560b engaged with each other, and a ring-shaped connecting ring 3560 having an outer diameter and an inner diameter that are substantially the same size as the drive gear member 3559.

The outer diameter and the inner diameter of the drive ring gear 3559 and the coupling ring 3560 are smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 3552a of the base cover 3552 and larger than the outer diameter of the shaft tubular portion 3551a of the ornament base 3551. Further, the drive ring gear 3559 and the connecting ring 3560 have the same inner shape. In the rear lower back rotating decorative body unit 3550, the rear lower rear rotating drive motor 3553, the rotation driving gear 3554, the first driven gear 3555, the second driven gear 3556, the third driven gear 3557, the fourth driven gear 3558, and the drive gear member. 3559 and the connecting ring 3560 constitute a drive mechanism 3550A that is directly driven to rotate by the lower back rear rotation drive motor 3553 (see FIG. 134(a) and the like).

Further, in the lower back rear rotating decorative body unit 3550, from the front side, the through hole 3552a of the base cover 3552, the connecting ring 3560, and the drive ring member 3559 are penetrated, and the shaft cylindrical portion 3551a of the decorative body base 3551 is inserted. An outer cylindrical portion 3561a having a cylindrical shape, a plurality of connecting concave portions 3561b which are recessed from the rear end of the outer cylindrical portion 3561a toward the front and are formed at intervals in the circumferential direction, and an outer cylindrical portion 3561a in front of the base cover 3552. Has a flat plate-shaped base portion 3561c extending outward from the front end thereof, and four guide slits 3561d extending through the base portion 3561c in the front-rear direction and extending radially around the axis of the outer cylindrical portion. Rotating decorative body base 3561, a cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 3562a inserted into the outer cylindrical portion 3561a of the rotating decorative body base 3561 and the shaft cylindrical portion 3551a of the decorative body base 3551 is inserted, and a drive gear member. A ring-shaped differential ring gear 3562b formed on the outer periphery of the rear end of the inner cylindrical portion 3562a behind 3559, and projects from the front surface of the differential ring gear 3562b at a circumferential interval with a rotational decoration base 3561. A plurality of connection convex portions 3562c inserted and connected in the connection concave portions 3561b, a differential detection piece 3562d which is outwardly protruded like a flange from the rear end of the differential ring gear 3562b and is partially cut away in the circumferential direction, And the differential ring gear 3562b of the differential gear member 3562 meshes with each other, and rotates coaxially with the fourth driven gear 3558 between the ornament base 3551 and the base cover 3552. The spur gear-shaped differential transmission gear 3563 that is movably mounted, the spur gear-shaped damper gear 3564 that meshes with the differential transmission gear 3563, and the damper gear 3564 can be rotated while imparting rotational resistance to the damper gear 3564. And a rotary damper member 3565 attached to the rear surface of the ornament base 3551.

The outer diameter of the outer tubular portion 3561a in the rotary ornament base 3561 is slightly smaller than the inner diameters of the drive gear member 3559 and the coupling ring 3560, and the outer gear portion 3562a allows the drive gear member 3559 and the coupling ring 3560 to rotate. It is installed. Further, the inner diameter of the outer tubular portion 3561a is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the inner tubular portion 3562a of the differential gear member 3562. The base portion 3561c is formed larger than the through hole 3552a of the base cover 3552. The guide slits 3561d are formed at intervals of 90 degrees with respect to the circumferential direction of the outer tubular portion 3561a.

The inner cylinder portion 3562a of the differential gear member 3562 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft cylinder portion 3551a of the ornament base 3551, and is rotatably attached by the shaft cylinder portion 3551a. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the rotary damper member 3565 imparts rotational resistance to the rotary shaft to which the damper gear 3564 is attached by viscous resistance of the viscous fluid enclosed inside. In the back lower rear rotating decorative body unit 3550, the rotating decorative body base 3561, the differential gear member 3562, the differential transmission gear 3563, the damper gear 3564, and the rotating damper member 3565 directly impart rotational resistance by the rotating damper member 3565. The differential mechanism 3550B is configured (see FIG. 134(b) and the like).

In addition, the lower back rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 has a cylindrical slide pin 3566a penetrating the guide slit 3561d and projecting rearward, and each guide is provided on the front surface of the base portion 3561c of the rotating decorative body base 3561. It has four ornament body sliders 3566 slidably attached by slits 3561d and a tip hole 3567a penetrating in the front and rear direction and into which a slide pin 3566a of the ornament body slider 3566 is rotatably inserted. At the same time, it has a base end pin 3567b that protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape and is rotatably inserted into the mounting hole 3560a of the connection ring 3560, and has four strip-shaped connection arms 3567. Four back lower rear rotating decorations 3568 are attached to the front surface of each ornament slider 3566 and are decorated on the front surface, and four rear lower rotating ornaments 3568 are attached to the rear surface of each rear lower rotating ornament 3568 and are connected to the connecting arm 3567. Four rotation restricting members 3569 that restrict the rotation range are provided.

The back-bottom rear rotating decorative body 3568 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a front view, one of the four vertices is formed at a right angle, and the opposite vertex on the diagonal line passing through the right-angled apex. Is formed at an acute angle. The lower back rotary ornament 3568 has its right-angled vertices directed toward the center axis of rotation of the rotary ornament base 3561, and the diagonal line passing through the right-angled vertices indicates the sliding direction of the ornament slider 3566 (the guide of the revolution ornament base 3561). It is attached to the decorative body slider 3566 so as to extend in the direction in which the slit 3561d extends. The four rear lower back rotating decorations 3568 can be slid so as to approach and separate from each other by the guide slit 3561d of the rotating decoration base 3561.

In the rear lower back rotating decorative body unit 3550, the decorative body slider 3566, the connecting arm 3567, the rear lower rear rotating decorative body 3568, and the rotation restricting member 3569 connect the drive mechanism 3550A and the differential mechanism 3550B to rotate. A transmission connecting mechanism 3550C is configured (see FIG. 134(c) and the like).

Further, the back lower rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is attached between the decorative body base 3551 and the base cover 3552, and the drive detecting piece 3559c of the drive gear member 3559 and the differential detecting piece 3562d of the differential ring gear 3562 are attached. A rear underside rotation detection sensor 3570 for detecting the rotational position of the fixed decoration base 3571 and a rear end of the rotation decoration base 3561 which penetrates the center of the rotation decoration base 3561 from the front and is attached to the shaft tube portion 3551a of the decoration base 3551. A lower back decorative substrate 3572 mounted on the front surface of the fixed decorative base 3571 in front of the rotating decorative body base 3561 and behind the rear lower rotating decorative body 3568 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof; A disc-shaped disc that is attached to the front surface of the fixed decorative body base 3571 between the rear lower back decorative substrate 3572 and the rear rear rotating decorative body 3568, is decorated on the front surface, and has translucency. The lower back fixed decorative body 3573 is provided.

Next, an operation of the back under-rear rotating decoration body 3568 of the back under-rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 in the back under-rear moving effect unit 3500 will be described. In the normal state, the back-bottom rear-revolving decorative body unit 3550 has four back-bottom rear-revolving decorative bodies 35 slid to the rotation center side of the rotary decorative body base 3561 and in contact with each other. In a normal state, the drive gear member 3559 is stopped with the notched portion of the drive detection piece 3559c facing leftward in front view (see FIG. 134(a)). Further, the differential gear member 3562 is stopped with the notched portion of the differential detection piece 3562d facing rightward in front view (see FIG. 134(b)). Further, in the four connecting arms 3567, an axis line connecting the center of the base end pin 3567b rotatably attached to the attaching hole 3560a of the connecting ring 3560 and the center of the tip end hole 3567a at the tip end of the connecting ring 3560 is formed. A slide pin 3566a of a decorative body slider 3566, which extends so as to contact a circle centering on the rotation center and is rotatably attached to the tip hole 3567a, is provided on the rotation center side of the guide slit 3561d in the rotary decorative body base 3561. It is located at the end. In the normal state of the four connecting arms 3567, the distal end holes 3567a are separated from the proximal end pins 3567b in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front (see FIG. 134(c) and the like).

In this normal state (see FIG. 135( a ), etc.), when the rotary drive gear 3554 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by the rear-bottom rear rotary drive motor 3553, the coupling ring 3560 together with the drive gear member 3559. Will rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front. When the connecting ring 3560 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the connecting arm 3567 is attached via the base end pin 3567b attached to the attaching hole 3560a, and the tip end hole 3567a of the connecting arm 3567 is attached to the ornament slider. The slide pin 3566a attached to the distal end hole 3560a moves inside the guide slit 3561d because it tries to move in the direction away from the guide slit 3561d of the rotary decoration base 3561 attached via the slide pin 3566a of 3566. At, it tries to slide toward the center of rotation.

However, in this normal state, the slide pin 3566a is located at the end of the guide slit 3561d on the rotation center side, and cannot slide further toward the rotation center. As a result, the connecting arm 3567 pulls the rotating decorative body base 3561 through the guide slit 3561d so as to rotate in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. Since the rotational resistance of the rotary damper member 3565 acts on the rotary decoration base 3561 via the differential gear member 3562, the differential transmission gear 3563, and the damper gear 3564, the rotational resistance of the rotary damper member 3565 is resisted. Then, the rotating decorative body base 3561 rotates in the counterclockwise direction.

When the rotating ornament base 3561 rotates in the counterclockwise direction from the front, the slide pin 3566a of the ornament slider 3566 is located at the end of the guide slit 3561d on the rotation center side. The lower back rotating decorative body 3568 attached to the 3566 rotates while being positioned toward the center of rotation and in contact with each other (see FIG. 135(b)). Further, while the four back lower back rotating decorations 3568 are rotating in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, the decoration arm slider 3566 to which the back lower rear rotating decorations 3568 are attached is rotated by the connecting arm 3567 toward the center of rotation. Since the force that slides in is applied, the back under-rear rotating decorative body 3568 does not slide outward due to the centrifugal force.

On the other hand, in a normal state (see FIG. 136( a ), etc.), when the rotary drive gear 3554 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the rear-bottom rear rotary drive motor 3553, it is connected together with the drive gear member 3559. Ring 3560 will rotate in a clockwise direction. When the connecting ring 3560 tries to rotate in the clockwise direction, the connecting arm 3567 slides through the base end pin 3567b attached to the mounting hole 3560a, and the tip end hole 3567a of the connecting arm 3567 slides on the ornament slider 3566. The slide pin 3566a attached to the distal end hole 3560a moves through the guide slit 3561d because the slide ornament 3566a attached to the tip hole 3560a moves toward the guide slit 3561d of the rotary decoration base 3561 attached via the pin 3566a. Attempts to rotate the rotating ornament base 3561 in a clockwise direction.

However, since the rotational resistance of the rotary damper member 3565 acts on the rotary decorative body base 3561 via the differential gear member 3562, the differential transmission gear 3563, and the damper gear 3564, the rotary decorative body base 3561 rotates clockwise. Before rotating in the direction of, the slide pin 3566a moves along the guide slit 3561d in the outward direction from the center of rotation (see FIG. 136(b)). As a result, each slide pin 3566a (decoration body slider 3566) slides outward, whereby the back-bottom rear rotation decorations 3568 slide outward so as to be separated from each other.

Then, when the connecting ring 3560 further rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front and the mounting hole 3560a reaches the axis of the guide slit 3561d in the rotary decoration base 3561, the connecting arm 3567 extends along the guide slit 3561d. In addition, the side surface of the connecting arm 3567 comes into contact with the rotation restricting member 3569 and the connecting arm 3567 is prevented from further rotating. In this state, the decorative body slider 3566 is slid to the outermost side via the connecting arm 3567, and the rear underside rear rotating decorative bodies 3568 are in a state of being most apart from each other and opened (see FIG. 136(c)). ). Further, in the state in which the back lower back rotating decorative body 3568 is opened, the back lower rear fixed decorative body 3573 arranged behind the back lower rear rotating decorative body 3568 is visually recognized from between the back lower rear rotating decorative bodies 3568. It becomes possible (see FIGS. 133(c) and 133(d), etc.).

When the connection ring 3560 further rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front with the rear lower back rotating decoration 3568 open, the rotation of the connecting arm 3567 is restricted by the rotation restricting member 3569. The base 3561 rotates in the clockwise direction against the rotation resistance of the rotation damper member 3565, and rotates in the clockwise direction with the lower back rear rotating decorative body 3568 opened (FIG. 136 ( See d)). By opening the underside rotating decorative body 3568, it becomes large and becomes conspicuous, which can surprise the player.

In addition, when closing the back lower rear rotating decorative body 3568 in the opened state, by rotating the connecting ring 3567 by the rear lower rear rotating drive motor 3553 in the counterclockwise direction in front view opposite to the above, The underside rear rotating ornamental body 3568 slides toward the center of rotation to be in a closed state.

In this way, the back lower back movable effect unit 3500 moves the back lower rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 to the rising end position to move the back lower rear rotating decorative body 3568 within the frame of the center accessory 2500 (the game area 5a. ), the rotating decorative body 3568 can be made conspicuous. In this state, when the back lower rear rotating decorative body 3568 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view, it is rotated in the center of the game area 5a, which can surprise the player. Further, when the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body 3568 is rotated clockwise in the front view, the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body 3568 rotates in an opened and enlarged state, which can further surprise the player. , It is possible to present a variety of movable effects to the player.

[5-9j. Back four corner movable production unit]
Next, the back four corner movable effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 145. FIG. 137 is a perspective view of the back four corner movable effect unit of the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 138 is a perspective view of the back four corner movable effect unit of the back unit seen from the back. Also, FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view of the back four corner first unit in the back four corner movable effect unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 140 is an exploded perspective view of the back four corner first unit in the back four corner movable effect unit from the back. FIG. Also, FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective view of the back four corner second rendering unit in the back four corner movable rendering unit as seen from the front side, and FIG. 142 is the rear four corner second rendering unit in the back four corner movable rendering unit being exploded from the back. FIG.

Further, FIG. 143(a) is a front view of the back four corner first unit in the back four corner movable effect unit in the state of the normal retreat position, and FIG. 143(b) shows the back four corner first decorative body in the appearance position. It is a front view of a back four corners 1st unit, and (c) is a front view of a back four corners 1st unit in the state where a back four corners 2nd decorative body is an appearance position. Further, FIG. 144(a) is an explanatory view showing the state of the drive mechanism in the back four corner first unit when the back four corner first decorative body is in the retracted position from the left side surface, and FIG. 144(b) is a back four corner first unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a drive mechanism in the middle of the back four corners 1st decoration body going to an appearance position from a retracted position, (c) is a back four corners 1st unit, and the back four corners 1st decoration body is an appearance position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a drive mechanism at the time from a left side surface. Further, FIG. 145(a) is an explanatory view showing the state of the drive mechanism from the left side when the back four corner second decorative body is in the retracted position in the back four corner first unit, and FIG. 145(b) shows the back four corner first unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a drive mechanism in the middle of the back four corners second decoration body going to an appearance position from a retracted position, (c) is a back four corners second unit, and the back four corners second decoration body of an appearance position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a drive mechanism at the time from a left side surface.

The back four corner movable effect unit 3600 is attached to four corners outside the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back four corner movable production unit 3600 is a back four corner first unit 3610 attached to the upper right corner and the lower left corner of the four corners of the back box 3010, and a back four corner second unit attached to the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the four corners of the back box 3010. And 3650. The back four corner first unit 3610A attached to the lower left corner is attached to the back four corner first unit 3610A attached to the upper right corner in a state of being rotated by 180 degrees around the axis line extending in the front-rear direction. Further, the back four corner second unit 3650A attached to the lower right corner is attached to the back four corner second unit 3650A attached to the upper left corner in a state of being rotated by 180 degrees around the axis line extending in the front-rear direction.

Hereinafter, the back four corner first unit 3610 (3610A) attached to the upper right corner and the back four corner second unit 3650 (3650A) attached to the upper left corner will be described, and the back four corner first unit 3610 (3610B) attached to the lower left corner will be described. ) And the rear four-corner second unit 3650 (3650B) attached to the lower right corner are only rotated by 180 degrees with respect to the ones attached to the upper right corner and the upper left corner, and a description thereof will be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 139 and FIG. 140, the back four corner first unit 3610 is a shallow box-shaped unit base 3611 that is mounted in the back box 3010 and is open at the rear and the bottom, and the front surface of the unit base 3611. Is attached to the left side surface of the motor base 3612 and a shallow box-shaped motor base 3612 whose left side (the one facing the center in the left-right direction of the back box 3010) is open. It is attached to the front side of the motor base cover 3613 that covers the front side of the open left side surface of the motor base 3612 from the front-rear direction substantially center, and to the left side of the motor base 3612 behind the front side of the motor base cover 3613. A box-shaped motor base cover rear 3614 whose right and front sides are opened, and a rear four-corner drive motor 3615 which is attached to the front part of the right side surface of the motor base 3612 and whose rotating shaft projects into the motor base 3612. , A transmission member 3616 attached to the rotary shafts of the back four corner drive motors 3615 and housed in the motor base 3612 so that the left side is covered by the motor base cover front 3613.

The transmission member 3616 includes a cylindrical mounting shaft portion 3616a mounted on the rotating shafts of the back four corner drive motor 3615, a disk-shaped base portion 3616b extending from the tip of the mounting shaft portion 3616a in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and a base. A detection piece 3616c that protrudes rightward from a surface of the portion 3616b that faces the right side, a first transmission portion 3617 that is provided on a surface of the base portion 3616b that faces the left side, and a base portion. And a second transmission portion 3618 provided on the surface of the 3616b facing to the right.

The first transmission portion 3617 of the transmission member 3616 includes a cylindrical first transmission pin 3617a protruding leftward from the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the base portion 3616b in parallel with the rotation axis of the base portion 3616b, and the revolution of the first transmission pin 3617a. Between the first lock protrusion 3617b and the first transmission pin 3617a, the first lock protrusion 3617b and the first transmission pin 3617a, which are cylindrical and protrude from the left surface of the base portion 3616b to the left concentrically to the left with a radius smaller than the radius. One lock protrusion 3617b is cut out in a fan shape from an even range to both sides with an axis connecting the center of the base portion 3616b and the center of the first transmission pin 3617a on the outer peripheral surface toward the center of the first lock protrusion 3617b. And a first cutout portion 3617c that is cut out.

The second transmission portion 3618 of the transmission member 3616 includes a cylindrical second transmission pin 3618a protruding rightward from the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the base portion 3616b in parallel with the rotation axis of the base portion 3616b, and the revolution of the second transmission pin 3618a. Between the second lock protrusion 3618b and the second transmission pin 3618a, the second lock protrusion 3618b and the cylindrical second lock protrusion 3618b protruding concentrically to the right from the right surface of the base portion 3616b with a radius smaller than the radius. The outer peripheral surface of the second lock protrusion 3618b is notched in a fan shape from an equal range to both sides with an axis connecting the center of the base portion 3616b and the center of the second transmission pin 3618a as a boundary toward the center of the second lock protrusion 3618b. And a second cutout portion 3618c that is cut out.

In the transmission member 3616, the revolution radiuses of the first transmission pin 3617a and the second transmission pin 3618a are the same. Further, the second transmission pin 3618a projects from the first transmission pin 3617a from a position rotated by 180 degrees about the rotation axis of the base portion 3616b. Further, the diameters of the first locking protrusion 3617b and the second locking protrusion 3618b are the same. Further, in the transmission member 3616, the first cutout portion 3617c of the first transmission portion 3617 and the second cutout portion 3618c of the second transmission portion 3618 are formed on the circumference of the first lock protrusion 3617b and the second lock protrusion 3618b. On the other hand, it is formed in a fan shape within an angle range of 72 degrees.

The rear four-corner first unit 3610 includes a columnar transmitted shaft member 3619 having both ends attached to the motor base 3612 and the motor base cover rear 3614 at positions behind the transmission member 3616, and the transmitted shaft. The member 3619 is rotatably attached by penetrating the member 3619, and is rotated by transmitting the rotation from the first transmission portion 3617 of the transmission member 3616, and has an action arm 3620a extending in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a link shaft member 3621 having both ends attached to the motor base 3612 and the motor base cover rear 3614 below the first transmitted member 3620 immediately below the transmitted shaft member 3619. A link arm 3622 is rotatably attached by penetrating the base end side of the link shaft member 3621 and extends in a direction perpendicular to the rotation shaft in the same length as the action arm 3620a of the first transmitted member 3620. The upper end of the link arm 3622 is rotatably attached to the tip of the action arm 3620a in the first transmitted member 3620, and the tip of the link arm 3622 is arranged so that the link arm 3622 extends parallel to the action arm 3620a below the upper end. A rotatably attached link member 3623 extending downward, a back four-corner first decorative body 3624 attached to the lower end front surface of the link member 3623 and using a shuriken, and a back four-corner first decorative body 3624. And a rear four-corner first decorative board 3625 mounted on the rear surface and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The first transmitted member 3620 has a shaft portion 3620b through which a working arm 3620a extends from the left end and a transmitted shaft member 3619 penetrates, and a right end of the shaft portion 3620b extends in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. A disk-shaped first transmitted main body portion 3620c, a first transmission slit 3620d in which the first transmission pin 3617a is slidably inserted from the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted main body portion 3620c toward the center, On both sides of the first transmission slit 3620d on the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted main body portion 3620c, there are a pair of first lock recesses 3620e that are recessed in an arc shape from the outer peripheral surface toward the center.

The direction in which the first transmission slit 3620d opens on the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted main body portion 3620c is substantially the same as the direction in which the action arm 3620a extends. The first lock recess 3620e is recessed with an arc having a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the first lock protrusion 3617b of the first transmission portion 3617. The pair of first lock recesses 3620e are formed such that the lines connecting the centers of the respective arcs of the recesses and the rotation center of the first transmitted member 3620 intersect at an angle of 90 degrees.

In this first transmitted member 3620, in the state where the back four corner first unit 3610 (back four corner movable effect unit 3600) is assembled, the first transmitted main body portion 3620c is the first transmission pin 3617a of the first transmission portion 3617 and the first transmission pin 3617a. The position in the left-right direction is the same as that of the first lock protrusion 3617b. Thereby, the first transmission pin 3617a can be inserted into the first transmission slit 3620d, and the rotation can be transmitted via the first transmission pin 3617a and the first transmission slit 3620d. Further, a part of the first lock protrusion 3617b can be inserted into the first lock recess 3620e, and a part of the first lock protrusion 3617b is inserted into the first lock recess 3620e. The rotation of the transmitted member 3620 can be restricted (locked).

The tip of the action arm 3620a of the first transmitted member 3620 and the tip of the link arm 3622 are rotatably attached to the link member 3623 by link pins 3626, respectively. Further, a link cover 3627 is attached to the upper front portion of the link member 3623. The back four corner first unit 3610 forms a parallel link with the motor base 3612, the action arm 3620a of the first transmitted member 3620, the link arm 3622, and the link member 3623. The back four corner first decorative body 3624 can be moved up and down through the link member 3623 by rotating the.

Furthermore, the back four corner first unit 3610 closes the rear end opening of the unit base 3611 and has a flat plate-shaped base cover 3628 attached to the unit base 3611, and a columnar transmitted shaft member extending in the left-right direction. It has a second action pin 3629a that revolves around 3619, and is rotatably attached by the transmitted shaft member 3619 penetrating between the motor base 3612 and the first transmitted member 3620. The second transmitted member 3629 which is rotated by transmitting the rotation from the second transmitting portion 3618 in the transmitting member 3616 and the second acting pin 3629a of the second transmitted member 3629 revolves around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. And a rotary connecting member 3630 that has a first connecting pin 3630a extending rearward in a cylindrical shape and is rotatably attached by a unit base 3611 and a base cover 3628 behind the transmitted shaft member 3619. The unit base 3611 and the base cover 3628 are rotatably attached below the rotation connecting member 3630 around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and project backward in a cylindrical shape at a position eccentric from the rotation center. And the back four corner second decorative body bases 3631 having the second connecting pins 3631a.

Further, the back four corner first unit 3610 has one end side rotatably attached to the first connecting pin 3630a of the rotary connecting member 3630 and the other end side of the back four corner second decorative body base 3631. A strip plate-shaped connecting arm 3632 rotatably attached to the second connecting pin 3631a and a back four-corner second decorative body 3633 attached to the front surface of the back four-corner second decorative body base 3631 and extending in an arc shape. And a back four corner second decorative substrate 3634 mounted on the rear surface of the back four corner second decorative body 3633 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back surface near the tips of the back four corner second decorative body 3633. A substrate cover 3635 that covers a part of the rear four corners of the second decorative substrate 3634 on the rear side; I have it.

The second transmitted member 3629 has a second action pin 3629a protruding rightward from the peripheral edge, and a disc-shaped second transmitted main body portion 3629b centered on the transmitted shaft member 3619, and a second transmitted main body portion 3629b. At the both sides of the second transmission slit 3629c on the outer peripheral surface of the second transmitted main body portion 3629b and the second transmission slit 3629c which is recessed from the outer peripheral surface toward the center and in which the second transmission pin 3618a is slidably inserted. , And a pair of second lock recesses 3629d that are recessed in an arc shape from the outer peripheral surface toward the center.

The second transmission slit 3629c of the second transmitted member 3629 is opened in the outer peripheral surface of the second transmitted main body portion 3629b in a direction opposite to the second action pin 3629a with the transmitted shaft member 3619 interposed therebetween. It is facing. The second lock recess 3629d is recessed with an arc having a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the second lock protrusion 3618b of the second transmission portion 3618. The pair of second lock recesses 3629d are formed so that the lines connecting the centers of the respective arcs of the recesses and the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3629 intersect at an angle of 90 degrees.

In this second transmitted member 3629, the second transmitted main body portion 3629b is the second transmitting pin 3618a of the second transmitting portion 3618 and the second transmitting pin 3618a of the second transmitting portion 3618 when the rear four corner first unit 3610 (the rear four corner movable effect unit 3600) is assembled. The position in the left-right direction is the same as that of the second lock protrusion 3618b. Accordingly, the second transmission pin 3618a can be inserted into the second transmission slit 3629c, and the rotation can be transmitted via the second transmission pin 3618a and the second transmission slit 3629c. In addition, a part of the second lock protrusion 3618b can be inserted into the second lock recess 3629d, and a part of the second lock protrusion 3618b is inserted into the second lock recess 3629d. The rotation of the transmitted member 3629 can be restricted (locked).

The rotation connecting member 3630 has a flat plate-shaped main body portion 3630b in which a first connecting pin 3630a protrudes rearward from a peripheral edge of a rear surface in a fan shape in a direction perpendicular to the axis from the center of rotation, and a plate from a peripheral portion of the main body portion 3630b to a front side. -Shaped protruding piece 3630c, and a part of the protruding piece 3630c is notched so that the second action pin 3629a of the second transmitted member 3629 is slidably inserted from the front end toward the rear. The second operated portion 3630d is provided.

The rotation connecting member 3630 has its rotation center attached at the same height as the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3629. In this rotation coupling member 3630, the second actuated member 3629 rotates and the second action pin 3629a revolves, so that the second actuated portion 3630d is pressed by the second action pin 3629a and rotates.

The back four corners second decorative body 3633 is formed in a shape of the cutting edge of a knife such as a shuriken or a sword, and the side with the narrowed cutting edge is attached to the back four corner second decorative body base 3631.

The back four corner first unit 3610 forms a rotation link with the base cover 3628, the rotation connecting member 3630, the back four corner second decorative body base 3631, and the connecting arm 3632, and when the rotation connecting member 3630 rotates. The second decoration bases 3631 on the back four corners rotate in the same direction via the connecting arms 3632. Thus, the back four corner second decorative body 3633 attached to the back four corner second decorative body base 3631 can be rotated (rotated) such that the tip ends thereof are directed downward.

Subsequently, the back four corner second units 3650 are, as shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, a shallow box-shaped unit base 3651 mounted in the back box 3010 and open at the rear and the bottom, and a unit base 3651. A shallow box-shaped motor base 3652 which is attached to the center of the front surface in the left-right direction and is open on the right side (which faces the center of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction), and is attached to the right side surface of the motor base 3652. The front right side of the motor base 3652 is attached to the front side of the motor base cover 3653, which covers the front side of the opened right side surface of the motor base 3652 in front of the center in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped motor base cover rear 3654 whose left and right sides are opened and a rear four-corner drive motor 3655 which is attached to the front part of the left side surface of the motor base 3652 and whose rotary shaft projects into the motor base 3652. And a transmission member 3656 attached to the rotation shafts of the back four corner drive motors 3655 and housed in the motor base 3652 so that the right side is covered by the motor base cover front 3653.

The transmission member 3656 includes a cylindrical mounting shaft portion 3656a mounted on the rotation shafts of the back four corner drive motor 3655, a disc-shaped base portion 3656b extending from the tip of the mounting shaft portion 3656a in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and a base. A detection piece 3656c that protrudes rightward from a surface of the portion 3656b that faces the right side, a first transmission portion 3657 that is provided on the surface of the base portion 3656b that faces the right side, and a base portion. And a second transmission portion 3658 provided on a surface of the 3656b facing leftward.

The first transmission portion 3657 of the transmission member 3656 includes a cylindrical first transmission pin 3657a protruding rightward from the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the base portion 3656b in parallel with the rotation axis of the base portion 3656b, and a revolution of the first transmission pin 3657a. Between the first lock protrusion 3657b and the first transmission pin 3657a, which is a cylindrical first lock protrusion 3657b protruding concentrically to the right from the right surface of the base portion 3656b with a radius smaller than the radius, A fan-shaped notch is formed from both sides of an axis that connects the center of the base portion 3656b and the center of the first transmission pin 3657a on the outer peripheral surface of the one lock protrusion 3657b toward the center of the first lock protrusion 3657b. And the first cutout portion 3657c, which is cut out.

The second transmission portion 3658 of the transmission member 3656 includes a cylindrical second transmission pin 3658a protruding leftward from the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the base portion 3656b in parallel with the rotation axis of the base portion 3656b, and the revolution of the second transmission pin 3658a. Between the second lock protrusion 3658b and the second transmission pin 3658a, which is a cylindrical second lock protrusion 3658b protruding concentrically leftward from the left surface of the base portion 3656b with a radius smaller than the radius, The outer peripheral surface of the second lock protrusion 3658b has a fan-shaped notch from both sides of the axis extending from the center of the base 3656b and the center of the second transmission pin 3658a toward the center of the second lock protrusion 3658b. And a second cutout portion 3658c that is cut out.

In the transmission member 3656, the revolution radiuses of the first transmission pin 3657a and the second transmission pin 3658a are the same. The second transmission pin 3658a projects from the first transmission pin 3657a from a position rotated by 180 degrees about the rotation axis of the base portion 3656b. Further, the diameters of the first locking protrusion 3657b and the second locking protrusion 3658b are the same. Further, in the transmission member 3656, the first cutout portion 3657c of the first transmission portion 3657 and the second cutout portion 3658c of the second transmission portion 3658 are formed on the circumferences of the first lock protrusion 3657b and the second lock protrusion 3658b. On the other hand, it is formed in a fan shape within an angle range of 72 degrees.

The rear four corner second unit 3650 has a cylindrical transmitted shaft member 3659 having both ends attached to the motor base 3652 and the motor base cover rear 3654 at positions behind the transmitting member 3656, and the transmitted shaft. The member 3659 has a working arm 3660a that is rotatably attached by penetrating and is rotated by transmitting the rotation from the first transmission portion 3657 of the transmission member 3656 and extends in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a link shaft member 3661 having both ends attached to the motor base 3652 and the motor base cover rear 3654 below the first transmitted member 3660 immediately below the transmitted shaft member 3659. A link shaft member 3662 is rotatably attached to the link shaft member 3661 by penetrating the base end side thereof and extends in a direction perpendicular to the rotation shaft in the same length as the action arm 3660a of the first transmitted member 3660. The upper end of the link arm 3662 is rotatably attached to the tip of the working arm 3660a in the first transmitted member 3660, and the tip of the link arm 3662 is arranged so that the link arm 3662 extends parallel to the working arm 3660a below the upper end. The link member 3663 is rotatably attached and extends downward, the back four-corner first decorative body 3664 attached to the lower end front surface of the link member 3663 and a shuriken is used, and the back four-corner first decorative body 3664. And a rear four-corner first decorative substrate 3665 mounted on the rear surface and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The first transmitted member 3660 has a shaft portion 3660b through which a working arm 3660a extends from the left end and a transmitted shaft member 3659 passes through, and a right end of the shaft portion 3660b extends in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. A disk-shaped first transmitted main body portion 3660c, a first transmission slit 3660d in which the first transmission pin 3657a is slidably inserted from the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted main body portion 3660c toward the center, On both sides of the first transmission slit 3660d on the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted main body portion 3660c, there are a pair of first lock recesses 3660e that are recessed in an arc shape from the outer peripheral surface toward the center.

The direction in which the first transmission slit 3660d opens on the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted main body portion 3660c is substantially the same as the direction in which the action arm 3660a extends. The first lock recess 3660e is recessed with an arc having a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the first lock protrusion 3657b of the first transmission portion 3657. The pair of first lock recesses 3660e are formed so that the lines connecting the centers of the respective arcs of the recesses and the rotation center of the first transmitted member 3660 intersect at an angle of 90 degrees.

In this first transmitted member 3660, the first transmitted main body portion 3660c is the first transmission pin 3657a of the first transmission portion 3657 and the first transmission pin 3657a when the rear four corner second unit 3650 (the rear four corner movable effect unit 3600) is assembled. The position in the left-right direction is the same as that of the first lock protrusion 3657b. Thereby, the first transmission pin 3657a can be inserted into the first transmission slit 3660d, and the rotation can be transmitted via the first transmission pin 3657a and the first transmission slit 3660d. In addition, a part of the first lock protrusion 3657b can be inserted into the first lock recess 3660e, and a part of the first lock protrusion 3657b is inserted into the first lock recess 3660e. The rotation of the transmitted member 3660 can be restricted (locked).

To the link member 3663, the tip of the action arm 3660a of the first transmitted member 3660 and the tip of the link arm 3662 are rotatably attached by the link pins 3666, respectively. Further, a link cover 3667 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the link member 3663. The back four corner second unit 3650 forms a parallel link by the motor base 3652, the action arm 3660a of the first transmitted member 3660, the link arm 3662, and the link member 3663, and the first transmitted member 3660. By rotating, the back four corner first decorative body 3664 can be vertically moved up and down via the link member 3663.

Further, the back four corner second unit 3650 has a flat plate-shaped base cover 3668 attached to the unit base 3651 that closes the rear end opening of the unit base 3651, and a columnar transmitted shaft member that extends left and right. It has a second action pin 3669a that revolves around 3659, and is rotatably attached by the transmission shaft member 3659 penetrating between the motor base 3652 and the first transmission member 3660. The second transmitted member 3669 that rotates by transmitting the rotation from the second transmitting portion 3658 of the transmitting member 3656 and the second acting pin 3669a of the second transmitted member 3669 revolves around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. And a rotary connecting member 3670 which has a first connecting pin 3670a extending rearward in a cylindrical shape and is rotatably attached by a unit base 3651 and a base cover 3668 behind the transmitted shaft member 3659. The unit base 3651 and the base cover 3668 are rotatably attached below the rotation connecting member 3670 around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and project backward in a cylindrical shape at a position eccentric from the rotation center. And a rear four-corner second decorative body base 3671 having second connecting pins 3671a.

Further, the back four corner second unit 3650 has one end side rotatably attached to the first connecting pin 3670a of the rotary connecting member 3670 and the other end side of the back four corner second decorative body base 3671. A band-plate-shaped connecting arm 3672 rotatably attached to the second connecting pin 3671a and a back four-corner second decorative body 3673 attached to the front surface of the back four-corner second decorative body base 3671 and extending in an arc shape. And a back four corner second decorative substrate 3674 mounted on the back surface of the back four corner second decorative body 3673 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back surface near the tips of the back four corner second decorative body 3673. A board cover 3675 that covers a part of the rear four corners of the second decorative board 3674 on the rear side; I have it.

The second transmitted member 3669 has a disk-shaped second transmitted main body portion 3669b centered on the transmitted shaft member 3659, and a second transmitted main body portion 3669b with a second action pin 3669a protruding leftward from the peripheral edge. The second transmission slit 3669c into which the second transmission pin 3658a is slidably inserted and is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the second transmission slit 3669c on both sides of the second transmission slit 3669c on the outer peripheral surface of the second transmitted main body portion 3669b. , And a pair of second lock recesses 3669d recessed in an arc shape from the outer peripheral surface toward the center.

The second transmission slit 3669c of the second transmitted member 3669 has an opening in the outer peripheral surface of the second transmitted main body portion 3669b in a direction opposite to the second action pin 3669a with the transmitted shaft member 3659 interposed therebetween. It is facing. The second lock recess 3669d is recessed with an arc having a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the second lock protrusion 3658b of the second transmission portion 3658. The pair of second lock recesses 3669d are formed such that the lines connecting the centers of the recessed arcs and the center of rotation of the second transmitted member 3669 intersect at an angle of 90 degrees.

In this second transmitted member 3669, in the state where the back four corner second unit 3650 (back four corner movable effect unit 3600) is assembled, the second transmitted main body portion 3669b has the second transmission pin 3658a of the second transmission portion 3658 and the second transmission pin 3658a. The position in the left-right direction is the same as that of the second lock protrusion 3658b. Accordingly, the second transmission pin 3658a can be inserted into the second transmission slit 3669c, and the rotation can be transmitted via the second transmission pin 3658a and the second transmission slit 3669c. In addition, a part of the second lock protrusion 3658b can be inserted into the second lock recess 3669d, and a part of the second lock protrusion 3658b can be inserted into the second lock recess 3669d. The rotation of the transmitted member 3669 can be restricted (locked).

The rotation connecting member 3670 has a flat plate-shaped main body portion 3670b in which a first connecting pin 3670a protrudes rearward from the peripheral edge of the rear surface in a fan shape in the direction perpendicular to the axis from the center of rotation, and a plate from the periphery of the main body portion 3670b to the front. -Shaped protruding piece 3670c, and a part of the protruding piece 3670c is notched so that the second action pin 3669a of the second transmitted member 3669 is slidably inserted from the front end toward the rear. The second acted part 3670d.

The rotation connecting member 3670 is attached such that its rotation center is at the same height as the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3669. In this rotation coupling member 3670, the second actuated member 3669d rotates and the second action pin 3669a revolves, so that the second actuated portion 3670d is pressed by the second action pin 3669a to rotate.

The back four corner second decorative body 3673 is formed in a shape of a cutting edge of a knife such as a shuriken or a sword, and the side with a narrow blade is attached to the back four corner second decorative body base 3671.

The back four corner second unit 3650 forms a rotation link by the base cover 3668, the rotation connecting member 3670, the back four corner second decorative body base 3671, and the connecting arm 3672, and when the rotation connecting member 3670 rotates. The second decoration bases 3671 on the back four corners rotate in the same direction via the connecting arms 3672. Accordingly, the back four corner second decorative body 3673 attached to the back four corner second decorative body base 3671 can be rotated (rotated) such that the front end side thereof is directed downward.

Next, operations of the back four corner first decoration bodies 3624 and 3664 and the back four corner second decoration bodies 3633 and 3673 in the back four corner movable effect unit 3600 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145. In the back four corner movable production unit 3600, the back four corner first unit 3610 and the back four corner second unit 3650 are the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673, the back four corner second decorative substrates 3634 and 3674, and the substrate covers 3635 and 3675. Except for, the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673, the back four corner second decorative substrates 3634 and 3674, and the substrate covers 3635 and 3675 are formed in point symmetry. Therefore, here, only the back four corner first unit 3610 (3610A) in the upper right corner in front view will be described, and the description of the other back four corner first unit 3610B and back four corner second unit 3650 will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 143(a), the back four corner movable effect unit 3600 (back four corner first unit 3610) is in a state in which the back four corner first decorative body 3624 moving vertically is close to the unit base 3611. At the same time, the rotating back four corner second decorative body 3633 is in a state of extending horizontally. In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 83 and the like, the back four-corner first decoration body 3624 and the back four-corner second decoration body 3633 are located at the retreat position which is almost invisible to the player.

In this normal state, as shown in FIGS. 144(a) and 145(a), in the transmission member 3616, the first transmission pin 3617a of the first transmission portion 3617 is located immediately above the center of rotation, and The second transmission pin 3618a of the second transmission portion 3618 is located immediately below the center of rotation. Further, in a normal state, the action arm 3620a of the first transmitted member 3620 extends diagonally upward and forward, and the first transmission slit 3620d opens diagonally upward and forward. The first lock protrusion 3617b of the first transmission portion 3617 is inserted into the first lock recess 3620e below the. As a result, the rear four-corner first decorative body 3624 is located at the rising end via the link member 3623, and the first transmitted member 3620 is non-rotatably locked.

Further, in the normal state, in the second transmitted member 3629, the second action pin 3629a is positioned obliquely upward and rearward with respect to the rotation center, and the second transmission slit 3629c is opened obliquely downward and forward. The second lock protrusion 3618b of the second transmission portion 3618 is inserted into the second lock recess 3629d above the second transmission slit 3629c. As a result, the back four corner second decorative body 3633 extends substantially horizontally via the rotary connecting member 3630, the connecting arm 3632, and the back four corner second decorative body base 3631, and the second transmitted member 3629 becomes non-rotatable. It's locked. Furthermore, in a normal state, the detection piece 3616c of the transmission member 3616 is detected by the back four corner up/down detection sensors 3636.

In this normal state, when the transmission member 3616 is rotated counterclockwise in left side view so that the back four corner drive motor 3615 moves the first transmission pin 3617a of the first transmission portion 3617 rearward, The transmission pin 3617a revolves so as to move rearward and enters the first transmission slit 3620d of the first transmitted member 3620, and at the same time, the first lock protrusion 3617b is disengaged from the first lock recess 3620e to lock. After the release, the first transmitted member 3620 becomes rotatable. Further, the detection piece 3616c of the transmission member 3616 revolves, and the back four corner up-and-down detection sensors 3636 are in a non-detection state. When the first transmission pin 3617a further revolves in the counterclockwise direction, the first transmission pin 3617a presses the inner surface of the first transmission slit 3620d downward, and the first transmitted member 3620 moves the transmitted shaft member 3619. It will rotate clockwise around the center.

When the first transmitted member 3620 rotates in the clockwise direction in the left side view, the tip of the working arm 3620a extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis rotates so as to move downward. The back four corner first decorative body 3624 is moved downward via the link member 3623 attached to the tip (see FIG. 144(b)). At this time, since the link member 3623 is attached by the parallel link by the action arm 3620a and the link arm 3622, the back four corner first decorative body 3624 moves downward in the same posture.

On the other hand, in the second transmission portion 3618 of the transmission member 3616, the second transmission pin 3618a revolves in the direction away from the second transmitted member 3629, and the second lock protrusion 3618b is inserted into the second lock recess 3629d. Therefore, the second transmitted member 3629 does not rotate, and the back four corner second decorative body 3633 does not rotate from the retracted position.

Then, when the first transmission pin 3617a further revolves in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view and comes off the first transmission slit 3620d, the rotation of the first transmitted member 3620 stops, and the back four corners first decoration The downward movement of the body 3624 stops (see FIGS. 143(b) and 144(c)). When the first transmission pin 3617a is disengaged from the first transmission slit 3620d, the first lock protrusion 3617b enters into the first lock recess 3620e above the first transmission slit 3620d, and the first lock protrusion 3617b moves the first lock protrusion 3617b. The rotation of the one transmitted member 3620 is locked. Therefore, the first transmitted member 3620 does not rotate any further in the clockwise direction, and the back four corner first decorative body 3624 is maintained in a stopped state. In this state, as shown in FIG. 154, the back four-corner first decorative bodies 3624 are located within the frame of the center accessory 2500, and can be visually recognized from the player side. That is, the back four-corner first decorative body 3624 is in the appearance position.

When the rear four-corner first decorative body 3624 is at the appearance position, the rear four-corner drive motor 3615 causes the transmission member 3616 to rotate in the opposite direction (clockwise in left side view) to the opposite of the above. By the operation, the first transmitted member 3620 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the back four corner first decorative body 3624 rises via the action arm 3620a, and returns to the normal state (state of the retracted position). Then, when the detection piece 3616c of the transmission member 3616 is detected by the back four corner up/down detection sensor 3636, the rotation (drive) of the back four corner drive motor 3615 is stopped. In the present embodiment, in the transmission member 3616 (first transmission portion 3617), the rotation range in which the first transmission pin 3617a is inserted into the first transmission slit 3620d is the first specific rotation range.

In the rear four corner first unit 3610, in the normal state (the state of FIG. 145(a)), the rear four corner drive motor 3615 causes the second transmission pin 3618a of the second transmission portion 3618 to move rearward. When it is rotated clockwise in the left side view, the second transmission pin 3618a revolves so as to move rearward, enters the second transmission slit 3629c of the second transmitted member 3629, and at the same time, The lock protrusion 3618b is disengaged from the inside of the second lock recess 3629d to release the lock, and the second transmitted member 3629 becomes rotatable. Further, the detection piece 3616c of the transmission member 3616 revolves, and the back four corner up-and-down detection sensors 3636 are in a non-detection state. Then, when the second transmission pin 3618a further revolves in the clockwise direction, the second transmission pin 3618a presses the inner surface of the second transmission slit 3629c upward, and the second transmitted member 3629 centers on the transmitted shaft member 3619. It will rotate in the counterclockwise direction.

When the second transmitted member 3629 rotates counterclockwise in left side view, the second acting pin 3629a of the second transmitted member 3629 revolves so as to move downward, and below the second acting pin 3629a. The rotation coupling member 3630 rotates about an axis extending in the front-rear direction (counterclockwise direction in front view) so that the second actuated portion 3630d of the rotation coupling member 3630 moves downward. Then, when the rotary connecting member 3630 rotates, the back four corner second decorative body bases 3631 connected by the connecting arms 3632 rotate in the same direction as the rotary connecting member 3630 and are attached to the back four corner second decorative body bases 3631. The second rear four-corner second decorative body 3633 also rotates in the same direction (the direction in which the tip side moves downward, that is, the direction around the anti-hemorrhea in front view) (see FIG. 145(d)).

On the other hand, in the first transmission portion 3617 of the transmission member 3616, the first transmission pin 3617a revolves in the direction away from the first transmitted member 3620, and the first lock protrusion 3617b is inserted into the first lock recess 3620e. Therefore, the first transmitted member 3620 does not rotate and the rear four-corner first decorative body 3624 does not move from the retracted position.

Then, when the second transmission pin 3618a further revolves in the clockwise direction in the left side view and comes off the second transmission slit 3629c, the rotation of the second transmitted member 3629 stops, and the back four corner second decorative body. The downward rotation of the tip side of 3633 is stopped (see FIGS. 143(c) and 145(c)). When the second transmission pin 3618a is disengaged from the second transmission slit 3629c, the second lock protrusion 3618b enters the second lock recess 3629d above the second transmission slit 3629c, and the second lock protrusion 3618b causes (2) The rotation of the transmitted member 3629 is locked. Therefore, the second transmitted member 3629 does not rotate further in the counterclockwise direction, and the back four corner second decorative body 3633 is maintained in a state in which the rotation is stopped. In this state, as shown in FIG. 143(c), the back four corner second decorative body 3633 is inclined about 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal, and as shown in FIG. It can be seen from the player side through the frame of the accessory 2500. That is, the second decorations on the back four corners 3633 are in the appearance position.

When the rear four-corner drive motor 3615 rotates the transmission member 3616 in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in left side view) with the rear four-corner second decorative body 3633 in the appearance position, the reverse operation is performed. Then, the second transmitted member 3629 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the back four corner second decorative body 3633 rotates via the rotation connecting member 3630 and the connecting arm 3632 so that its tip end side rises. , The normal state (state of the retracted position) is restored. Then, when the detection piece 3616c of the transmission member 3616 is detected by the back four corner up/down detection sensor 3636, the rotation (drive) of the back four corner drive motor 3615 is stopped. In the present embodiment, in the transmission member 3616 (second transmission portion 3618), the rotation range in which the second transmission pin 3618a is inserted into the second transmission slit 3629c is the second specific rotation range.

In this way, the back four corner movable effect unit 3600 causes the back four corner first decoration bodies 3624 and 3664 to appear and the back four corner second decoration bodies 3633 and 3673 to appear by the rotation of one back four corner drive motors 3615 and 3655. With the back four corner first unit 3610A in the upper right corner, the back four corner first unit 3610B in the lower left corner, the back four corner second unit 3650A in the upper left corner, and the back four corner second unit 3650B in the lower right corner, Since they can be operated independently of each other, a variety of movable effects can be presented to the player, which can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

[5-10. Movable performance on the game board]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 5 of the present embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 146 to 154. FIG. 146 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the front movable ornament of the front movable effect unit in the center accessory. Further, FIG. 147 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back decoration of the back movable production unit in the back unit is in the first appearance position, and FIG. 148 is a back decoration of the back movable production unit in the back unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows a state in which the body is in the second appearance position, and the back lower front first decorative body and the back lower front second decorative body of the back lower front movable effect unit are in the appearing position.

Also, FIG. 149 shows that the pair of shutters are opened with the first decorative surface of the back-right rotating decorative body of the back-right movable effect unit in the back unit facing forward, and the back-left rotating effect unit of the back-left movable effect unit is rotated. It is the front view of the game board which shows the state where the back left protruding decorative body is in the appearance position with the first decorative surface of the decorative body facing forward. Further, FIG. 150 is a game board which shows the back right rotating decorative body of the back right movable effect unit and the back left rotating decorative body of the back left movable effect unit in the back unit with their respective second decorative surfaces facing forward. FIG. Also, FIG. 151 is a game board showing the back right rotating decorative body of the back right movable effect unit and the back left rotating decorative body of the back left movable effect unit in the back unit with their respective third decorative surfaces facing forward. FIG.

Further, FIG. 152 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear-bottom rear rotating decorative body of the rear-bottom rear movable effect unit in the rear unit is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in front view at the rising end position. Also, FIG. 153 shows that the rear-bottom rearward rotating decorative body of the rear-bottom movable rear effect unit in the rear unit is rotated clockwise in the front end view at the rising end position, and the rear four-corner second rear corner movable second-direction corner It is a front view of the game board showing the state of the appearance body appearance. 154 is a front view of the game board showing the rear four-corner first decorative body of the rear four-corner movable effect unit in the rear unit in the appearance position.

As shown in FIG. 83 and the like, in the game board 5, in a normal state, the display screen of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 arranged rearward through the frame of the center accessory 2500 is well viewed from the player side. can do. Further, in a normal state, the front movable articulation body 2561 of the front movable artistic production unit 2560 in the center accessory 2500 is raised, and the first rotary decorative body 2572 and the second rotary decorative body 2572 of the front and lower movable production unit 2570. The body 2573 and the third rotating decorative body 2574 are stopped rotating. Further, in a normal state, the back side decorative body 3152 of the back side movable effect unit 3100 is located at a retracted position above and behind the frame of the center accessory 2500 in a state where the top and bottom are reversed. The center accessory 2500 is projected downward from the upper side in the frame so that it can be visually recognized by the player.

Further, in a normal state, the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 of the back lower front movable effect unit 3200 are behind the lower side of the center accessory 2500 and are visually recognized from the player side. It is located in a difficult escape position. Further, in a normal state, the back right rotation decorative body 3310 and the back left rotation decorative body 3410 of the back right movable effect unit 3300 and the back left movable effect unit 3400 respectively move the first decorative surfaces 3310a and 3410a forward (front). The rotation is stopped in the state of turning to the back, and the pair of shutters 3312 of the back right rotation decoration 3310 are closed, and the two back left protruding decorations 3421 of the back left rotation decoration 3410 are rotated left back. It is located in a retracted position invisible in the body 3410.

Further, in a normal state, the rear under-rear rotating decorative body 3568 of the rear under-rear movable effect unit 3500 is located at the descending end position, and a part of it can be seen from the player side from the lower side of the center accessory 2500. It faces the frame. Further, in a normal state, the back four corner first decorations 3624 and 3664 and the back four corner second decorations 3633 and 3673 of the back four corner movable effect unit 3600 are within the frame of the center role object 2500 which is difficult to see from the player side. Is also located in the outer retracted position.

From the normal state, this game board 5 is on the table according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn by the game balls being received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. Movable effect unit 2560, front and bottom movable effect unit 2570, back upper movable effect unit 3100, back lower front movable effect unit 3200, back right movable effect unit 3300, back left movable effect unit 3400, back lower movable effect unit 3500, and The back four corner movable effect unit 3600 performs a predetermined movable effect.

Specifically, for example, in the front movable art production unit 2560 of the center accessory 2500, the front movable motor 2563 is rotationally driven to lower the front movable decorative body 2561 from the normal position to move the central liquid crystal display device 1500. Position on top of front (see FIG. 146). As a result, by covering the upper part of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 with the front movable ornament 2561, it is possible to make the player think that the game state may change, and enhance the expectation for the game. be able to.

Further, in the front and rear movable effect unit 2570 of the center accessory 2500, the back and bottom drive motor 2575 causes the first rotary decorative body 2572, the second rotary decorative body 2573, and the third rotary decorative body 2574 to rotate round and round ( See FIG. 96(b)). As a result, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game.

Furthermore, in the back movable operation unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back driving motor 3103 is rotationally driven to lower the back decoration 3152 from the retracted position to the first appearance position in a state where the top and bottom are reversed ( See FIG. 147). In this state, the pair of openings 3152a of the back decoration 3152 and the sub-decoration 3157a facing the opening 3152a can be partially seen from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2500. it can. As a result, the predetermined character mocked by the back decoration 3152 looks like it is looking upside down from above, which can surprise the player and entertain the appearance of the character. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. Further, in this state, when the back sub-embellishment body 3157 is reciprocally moved to the left and right by the rotational driving of the back top sub-driving motor 3159, the pupil of the predetermined character (the sub-decoration 3157 a ) Will squeeze left and right, which can further surprise the player and entertain the move production.

Further, in the back side movable effect unit 3100, with the back side decorative body 3152 in the first appearance position, the back side drive motor 3103 is rotationally driven to move the back side decoration body 3152 to a further lower second appearance position. (See FIG. 148). When the back decoration 3152 descends from the first appearance position to the second appearance position, the top and bottom of the predetermined character which is being mangled by the back decoration 3152 is reversed from the top and bottom to the normal state. Since it descends while rotating, the movement of the back decoration 3152 becomes a dynamic movement, which can strongly attract the interest of the player and can greatly surprise the player.

In the state where the back decoration 3152 is in the second appearance position, as shown in the figure, the top and bottom of the predetermined character that is being moved by the back decoration 3152 is in a normal state, and the back decoration 3152 is The center accessory 2500 is located substantially in the center of the frame. As a result, the back decoration 3152 becomes conspicuous in the game area 5a, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the player can be greatly foreseen that an advantageous game state occurs. .. Even in the state of the second appearance position, by rotating the back sub drive motor 3159, it is possible to make the eyes of a predetermined character, which is struck by the back decoration 3152, flutter left and right, which makes the player more entertaining. You can

In the back side movable effect unit 3100, the back side decoration body 3152 is moved up and down between the retracted position and the first appearance position, or moved up and down between the first appearance position and the second appearance position, and the retracted position. It is possible to move up and down between the first appearance position and the second appearance position, and it is possible to prevent the pupils from moving around at the first appearance position and the second appearance position. By combining them, various movable effects can be performed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored.

Further, in the back lower front movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, when the back upper decorative body 3152 of the back upper movable effect unit 3100 is in the second appearance position, the back lower front drive motor 3202 is driven to rotate to the back of the retracted position. The lower front first decorative body 3209 and the lower back front second decorative body 3212 are moved to the appearance position located in the frame of the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 148). As a result, as shown in the figure, the front back lower front decorative body 3209 with the hand is positioned in front of the back upper decorative body 3152 with the head (face), so that the predetermined character casts the spell as if it were a spell. Since such a state (like a mark is connected) can be exerted, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous game state can be further enhanced.

Further, in the back right movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000, in a normal state (a state in which the first decorative surface 3310 is stopped to rotate forward), the back right shutter solenoid (not shown) separates the pair of shutters 3312. Then, the inner decoration body 3313 is exposed to the front from between the shutters 3312 (see FIG. 149), and the inner decoration body 3313 is illuminated and decorated. As a result, it is possible to suggest the arrival of a chance to the player.

Further, in the back right movable effect unit 3300, the back right drive motor 3304 rotates the back right rotation decoration body 3310. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel a sign that the game state is changing, enhance the expectation for the game, and suppress a decrease in interest.

In the back right movable effect unit 3300, the back right drive motor 3304 rotates the back right rotation decorative body 3310 to stop the second decorative surface 3310b forward (front) (see FIG. 150). As a result, the back right character decoration 3318 on the second decoration surface 3310b becomes visible from the player side, so that the player can be made aware of the arrival of a chance by recognizing the back right character decoration 3318.

Furthermore, in the back right movable effect unit 3300, the back right drive motor 3304 rotates the back right rotation decorative body 3310 to stop the third decorative surface 3310c forward (front) (see FIG. 151). As a result, the ball guiding member 3322 that vertically extends spirally in the back right effect space 3321 becomes visible from the player side, so that the game balls are supplied to the player in the back right effect space 3321. It is possible to make the player think that the upper prize hole 2006 may be opened at the time when the game is played, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game.

Further, in the back left movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, in a normal state (a state in which rotation of the first decorative surface 3410 is directed forward) is stopped, the back left rotation is performed by driving the back left decorative body solenoid 3422. The back left protruding decorative body 3421 projects outward from the outer peripheral surface of the decorative body 3410 (see FIG. 149). As a result, the back left protruding decoration 3421 is projected from the back left rotating decoration 3410 that rotates in a cylindrical shape, so that it is possible to surprise the player and to think that there is something good. It is possible to raise the expectation for the game.

Further, in the back left movable effect unit 3400, the back left rotation decorative body 3410 is rotated by the rotation of the back left drive motor 3404. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel a sign that the game state is changing, enhance the expectation for the game, and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, in the back left movable effect unit 3400, the back left drive motor 3404 rotates the back left rotating decorative body 3410 to stop the first decorative surface 3410a forward (front) (see FIG. 83 and the like). Since the first decoration surface 3410a is provided with a door decoration 3411 simulating a door, the shutter 3312 of the first decoration surface 3310a of the back right rotation decoration body 3310 in the back right movable effect unit 3300 for the player. Similarly, the door decoration 3411 can be made to seem to be opened, and the expectation for the game can be increased.

Further, in the back left movable effect unit 3400, the back left drive motor 3404 rotates the back left rotation decorative body 3410 to stop the second decorative surface 3410b forward (front) (see FIG. 150). As a result, the back left character decoration 3413 on the second decoration surface 3410b becomes visible from the player side, and the player can be made aware of the arrival of a chance by recognizing the back left character decoration 3413.

In the back left movable effect unit 3400, the back left drive motor 3404 rotates the back left rotating decorative body 3410 to stop the third decorative surface 3410c toward the front (front) (see FIG. 151). Although illustration is omitted, in this state, when the LED on the back left third decorative substrate 3417 emits red light, the red pattern can be projected on the back left projection unit 3415, and blue light is emitted. Then, the blue pattern can be projected on the back left projection unit 3415. As a result, the pattern projected on the back left projection unit 3415 can suggest the arrival of a chance to the player, which can entertain the player and enhance the expectation.

The back right movable effect unit 3300 and the back left movable effect unit 3400 rotate the back right rotation decoration body 3310 and the back left rotation decoration body 3410 at the same time, so that the left and right ends (in the frame of the center accessory 2500). Movable effects can be performed on both the left and right sides of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and the rotating back-right rotating decorative body 3310 and back-left rotating decorative body 3410 increase the player's expectation and suppress a decrease in interest. be able to. In addition, by appropriately selecting the decorative surfaces for which the back right rotation decoration 3310 and the back left rotation decoration 3410 are stopped to rotate, it is possible to make the pattern of the movable effect diversified and prevent the player from getting tired. ..

Further, in the rear-bottom rear movable effect production unit 3500 of the rear unit 3000, the rear-bottom rear rear elevation drive motor 3512 is rotationally driven to move the rear-bottom rear rear rotating decorative body 3568 to a rising end position which is substantially the center within the frame of the center accessory 2500. Raise to. Then, when the back lower rear rotating decorative body 3568 is at the rising end position, the back lower rear rotating drive motor 3553 rotates the back lower rear rotating decorative body 3568 in a counterclockwise direction in a front view (see FIG. 152). ). As a result, the back underside rotating decorative body 3568, which is slightly desired to the player side above the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, moves up and is positioned in the center of the frame of the center accessory 2500, so that the player It can surprise you and make you think there is something good, and you can raise your expectations for the game. In addition, by rotating the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body 3568 in a counterclockwise direction, the player can further increase his/her expectation for the game.

In the rear-bottom rear movable effect unit 3500, when the rear-bottom rear rotation decorative body 3568 is at the rising end position, the rear-bottom rear rear rotating drive motor 3553 rotates the rear-bottom rear rotating decorative body 3568 in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front. When this is done, the four back-bottom rear rotating decorative bodies 3568 are opened so as to be separated from each other and rotate in a large state (see FIG. 153). As a result, the diameter of the back-bottom rearward rotating decorative body 3568 is larger than that when rotating counterclockwise, so that the player's expectation for the game can be further enhanced.

In the back four corner movable effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000, the back four corner drive motors 3615 and 3655 are rotationally driven so that the back four corner first decorative bodies 3624 and 3664 are located within the frame of the center accessory 2500 from the retracted position. Move up and down to the appearance position (see FIG. 154). This makes it possible to surprise the player with the appearance of the four back four-corner first decorative bodies 3624 and 3664, and to suggest the arrival of a chance.

In the back four corner movable effect unit 3600, the back four corner drive motors 3615 and 3655 are rotationally driven to move the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673 from the retracted position to the appearance position located in the frame of the center accessory 2500. (See FIG. 153). As a result, four back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673 that radially extend around the center of the frame of the center accessory 2500 appear, which can surprise the player and do something good. It can be thought that there is, and it can raise expectations for the game. In the back four corners movable rendering unit 3600, when the back bottom rear rotating decorative body 3568 of the back lower rear movable rendering unit 3500 is at the rising end position, the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673 are rotated to the appearance position, It is possible to make a large shuriken appear in the frame of the accessory 2500 (see FIG. 153). As a result, it is possible to convince the player that an advantageous gaming state has occurred, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game as much as possible, and it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

[6. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board (particularly, the main control MPU mounted on the main control board) will be described. FIG. 155(a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU of the main control board when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

As shown in FIG. 155(a), the main control board according to this embodiment first performs various registers and main control as the processing of step S1 on condition that a RAM clear switch (not shown) is operated. Initializes the data stored in the built-in RAM. The RAM clear switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened. In addition, the RAM clear switch outputs a clear signal to the main control board in response to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the power was turned on, and the main control MPU receives the clear signal when the power is turned on. When it is determined, the initialization process (step S1) is executed to initialize the data stored in various registers and the main control built-in RAM.

Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process is executed to save information indicating the progress of the game (for example, various flags) in the main control built-in RAM. If the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the main control internal RAM is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1), A recovery process for recovering the state according to the information is executed. Further, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the pachinko machine 1 is set to the initial state by executing the initialization process without executing the restoration process.

Next, as the process of step S2, a random number, which is the number to be updated within a predetermined numerical range, is updated. That is, in the main control board according to the present embodiment, the first special symbol display is variably displayed on the first special symbol and the second special symbol display is variably displayed on the second special symbol when the variable display is stopped. Special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) provided for lottery processing for display mode, variable random numbers provided for lottery processing for predetermined time (variation time) required for variable display control of the special symbols , Reach random numbers used in a lottery process of whether or not to execute reach production as a game production executed in the central liquid crystal display device 1500 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols, and if a big hit is made based on the special random numbers. The symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) that are used in the lottery process for determining the type of jackpot when determined, and the hits that are the trigger for the operation of the second starting door member 2323. A random number counter for holding random numbers such as random numbers (ordinary random numbers) used for such lottery processing is provided.

In this example, the same reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, even when the first winning opening 2002 is started, the second winning opening 2004 is won. Even when the reach random number is configured to be acquired from the same counter that updates the reach random number, the reach effect execution rate can be changed by acquiring the reach random number from a counter with a different range of random numbers. You may make it different, the first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol as a reach determination table to be compared with the obtained reach random number, and the second special symbol, different from the first reach determination table. By providing the second reach determination table in which the determination value is set, the execution ratio of the reach effect may be different.

In the process of step S2, the random number counter is operated so that only random numbers (fluctuating random numbers) out of the random numbers are updated. After the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this manner, basically only the process of step S2 is repeatedly performed. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed every 4 mS, for example.

FIG. 155(b) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU of the main control board.

As shown in FIG. 155(b), in this interrupt control, first, a register save process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, as the processing of step S12, the gate sensor 2305, the first starting opening sensor 2107, the second starting opening sensor 2325, the upper special winning opening sensor 2552, the lower special winning opening sensor 2354, and the general winning opening sensor 3050. Etc., the detection signals from various sensors are input. Then, as a process of step S13, a random number updating process for updating the value of the random number counter for generating the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the random numbers, the random number related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol and the normal symbol is stopped (special random number, ordinary random number) is updated, and the counter of the random number counter is updated. The operation is performed.

Then, after the random number is updated in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board, as the process of step S14, the special symbol process process including the lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. Execute. Although this special symbol process processing will be described later, here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, the second special symbol process flag, which indicates the progress status of the game stored in the main control built-in RAM, is shown. Corresponding processing will be selectively executed based on the special symbol process flag).

Then, next, the main control MPU of the main control board executes a normal symbol process process including a lottery process for a win or loss that is an operation trigger of the second starting opening door member 2323 as a process of step S15. Even in this normal symbol process process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. Further, the main control MPU of the main control board is configured such that the driving frequency of the second starting opening door member 2323 becomes higher within a predetermined period after the end of the big hit game state (excluding some big hits). The lottery process is executed (so-called time saving state). In this embodiment, such a time-saving state is realized by shortening the time required for the variable display control of the ordinary symbols for a predetermined period after the end of the big hit game state.

Specifically, in the control of the time saving state (called time saving control), the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is set to one-half (per 100%), and the time required for the variable display control of the ordinary symbol is set to non- When shortened to a predetermined time (for example, 0.08 seconds) shorter than the time saving state, and the result of the lottery for the ordinary symbol is a hit, the second starting port door member 2323 of the second starting port 2004 is set, for example, The game ball is moved forward for 5.5 seconds to allow the game ball to be received in the second starting port 2004, and then is moved back again to disable the game ball to be received in the second starting port 2004.

On the other hand, in the non-time saving control, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is set to 0% and the time required for the variable display control of the ordinary symbol is set to a predetermined variation time (for example, 5 seconds) to make a second start. The acceptance of the game ball into the mouth 2004 is disabled. Even in the non-time saving state, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol may be set to 0% or more, and in this case, the winning probability is lower than that in the time saving state (for example, 50%), and the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is won. When it becomes, the second starting port door member 2323 of the second starting port 2004 is advanced for a time shorter than the time saving state, for example, 2 seconds to allow the game ball to be received in the second starting port 2004 again. The game ball may be retracted to the second start opening 2004 so that it cannot be accepted.

That is, in the non-time saving state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is 0%, and in this case, even if the player strikes to the right, it is impossible to win the game ball to the second starting opening 2004. Therefore, in the non-time saving state, the game ball is shot toward the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that many game balls are won in the first start port 2002 instead of the second start port 2004 (so-called "left"). Striking”) is preferable.

On the other hand, in the time-saving state, the probability of winning a normal symbol is 100%, and further the second starting port door member 2323 of the second starting port 2004 is advanced for a long period of time (5.5 seconds in this example), In this case, by hitting the right side, it becomes easy to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 2004. Therefore, in the non-time saving state, aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 so that a large number of game balls are won in the second starting port 2004 instead of the first starting port 2002, the game ball is shot (so-called “right”). Striking”) is preferable.

As the time saving control, a control for increasing the winning probability of the above-mentioned ordinary symbol more than the non-time saving state, a control for reducing the time required for the variable display control of the above-mentioned ordinary symbol than the non-time saving state, the second starting opening 2004 (2) Control for extending the period for advancing the starting port door member 2323 beyond the non-time saving state, control for increasing the number of times for advancing the second starting port door member 2323 of the second starting port 2004 above for the non-time saving state, first Of the control for shortening the time required for the variable display control of the special symbol on the special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device (the time required for the variable display control of the decorative symbol on the central liquid crystal display device 1500) compared to the non-time saving state, Any one or any combination (may be all) may be executed.

Moreover, when the special symbol process process (step S14) and the normal symbol process process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU of the main control board then performs the process of step S16 in the special symbol process process. A process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM to the peripheral control board or the like is performed. Then, as a process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command, which is also set in the predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM in the normal pattern process process, to the peripheral control board or the like is performed.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board then performs an information output process for outputting data such as hit information supplied to the hole management computer as the process of step S18.

Then, next, the main control MPU of the main control board, as the processing of step S19, the first starting opening sensor 2107, the second starting opening sensor 2325, the upper special winning opening sensor 2552 and the lower large winning opening sensor 2354. When the detection signals of the general winning opening sensor 3050 and the like are in the ON state, a payout control command is output to the above-mentioned payout control board so that the prize balls corresponding to these signals are paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU mounted on the payout control board outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 834 and pays out the prize balls to the player. In this example, when a game ball wins the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port sensor 2107 is turned on, "3 balls", a game ball wins the second starting port 2004 and the second starting is performed. When the mouth sensor 2325 is in the ON state, "1 ball", the gaming ball wins the above-mentioned special winning opening (upper winning opening 2006, lower winning opening 2005), and the upper winning opening sensor 2552 or the lower winning opening sensor 2354. When the state is turned on, "14 balls" are awarded to the general winning opening 2001, and when the general prize opening sensor 3050 is turned on, "10 balls" are awarded to the player. ing.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board then executes a storage process for checking the increase/decrease in the number of holdings as the process of step S20. Next, as the process of step S21, a test terminal process that is a process of outputting a test signal for making it possible to confirm the control state of the pachinko machine 1 outside the gaming machine is executed. Then, after that, the drive control of the actuator that always operates is performed (step S22), the content of the register is restored (step S23), and the control is terminated when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24). Becomes

By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 mS. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the interrupt process by the timer, but in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol process process (step S14).

Now, assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes are updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 156, the main control MPU of this main control board first detects the first starting port sensor 2107. On the condition that the signal is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the first starting opening 2002) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the random number counter, and this is stored in the main control RAM. The first starting opening passage processing such as storing in the first special symbol reservation storage area is executed (step S32). In addition, on condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 2325 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is the above random number. A second starting opening passing process such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol reservation storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S34).

Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is controlled (step S35), and if the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit game state is controlled. The big hit control process (step S40) is executed. In the jackpot control process, the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped are “4R normal jackpot”. , "4R latent probability big hit", and "4R probability variation big hit" in the mode suggesting, after opening the lower special winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or the lower large winning opening 4R big hit game state which repeats the opening and closing pattern (round) which is closed 4 times when the lower prize hole sensor 2354 detects that 9 game balls have been won in 2005 (4R big hit game state which is simply opened for a long time. (It may be called), and when the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol is a mode that suggests "16R sudden probability big hit", the lower big winning opening 2005 is shortened. 16R big hit game state that repeats the opening and closing pattern that is closed 16 hours after opening (for example, 0.5 seconds) (sometimes referred to as 16R big hit game state that is simply opened for a short time) When the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of stop is a mode that suggests "8R probability variation big hit", after opening the lower special winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or the lower large winning opening After the opening and closing pattern for closing when the lower prize hole sensor 2354 detects that 9 game balls have been won in 2005, the lower prize hole 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds). The 8R big hit game state that repeats the opening and closing pattern to be closed after 8 times (sometimes referred to as the 8R big hit game state of opening for a long time) is controlled, and the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped When the result is a mode that suggests "16R probability variation big hit", after opening the special winning opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or in the upper winning opening 2006, 9 game balls are won. When the above-mentioned special winning opening sensor 2552 is detected, the opening/closing pattern for closing is repeated 16 times, and a process of controlling to a 16R jackpot gaming state (sometimes referred to simply as a 16R jackpot gaming state of opening for a long time) is executed. .. It is detected by the lower special winning opening sensor 2354 that the lower large winning opening 2005 has been opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) as a 4R big hit game state, or that 9 gaming balls have been won in the lower large winning opening 2005. The opening/closing pattern (round) to be closed when repeated is shown four times. After that, the opening/closing pattern for closing the lower prize opening 2005 for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) and then closing it is repeated 12 times. By substantially executing the 4R big hit game state control, even if the big hit game state is entered, the opening and closing pattern for controlling the opening and closing of the lower special winning opening 2005 is repeated 16 times regardless of the kind of big hit. Good, 8R big hit game state after opening the lower special winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or that nine gaming balls have won the lower large winning opening 2005, the lower large winning opening sensor 2354. The opening/closing pattern for closing when detected may be repeated eight times, and thereafter, the opening/closing pattern for closing the lower special winning opening 2005 for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) and then closing may not be performed. That is, the number of times, etc., is not limited to the above number as long as the number of times of repeating the round in which the game ball can be received in the lower special winning opening 2005 is substantially the same.

Further, in the present embodiment, a left-handed state in which a game based on winning of a game ball into the first starting opening 2002 is executed and a game based on winning of a gaming ball into the second starting opening 2004 is executed mainly. It is controlled to one of the right hit state and the right hit state. Specifically, when the time saving control is executed, the right-handed state is controlled, while when the time saving control is not executed, the left-handed state is controlled. In the left-handed state, the long-hit big hit game state of up to 8 rounds is executed, and in the right-handed state, the long-hit big hit game state of up to 16 rounds is executed. It is possible to get more prize balls than the left-handed state.

Further, in the big hit control process, after performing such opening control of the special winning opening (upper winning opening 2006, lower winning opening 2005), each setting processing of the high probability flag, the time saving flag and the time saving number counter is performed. Execute. The high-probability flag is a flag that indicates a high-probability state, and is used in a big-hit determination process shown in FIG. 161, which will be described later, and is set until the next big-hit occurs (first shown in FIG. 166 described later). Special symbol stop process or second special symbol stop process not shown).

The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving control is being executed (a low probability time saving state, a high probability time saving state), and a big hit to perform time saving control (a high probability time saving state, a low probability time saving state) after the big hit game state ends ( 4R probability variation big hit, 16R sudden variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, 16R big hit game condition which is set when the big hit game state ends, when it becomes next big hit, first special design stop processing which is shown in Figure 166 which is mentioned later Alternatively, it is reset by the second special symbol stop process (not shown).

If the big hit execution flag is not set, on condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of the second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area is "0". (Step S37), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S38), and is stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area. On condition that the value of the second special holding number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S37), the second special symbol including the lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. Process processing is executed (step S39). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special pending number counter is not "0", the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the above-mentioned first starting opening passage processing (step S32).

Now, in the process of step S31, if it is determined that the first starting opening sensor 2107 is in the ON state and the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002, as shown in FIG. 157. The main control MPU of the main control board first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S41.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board acquires the counter value by the first special holding number counter from the main control internal RAM, and the holding number of the first special symbol is the maximum value (upper limit) based on this counter value. It is determined whether the value is "4" (step S42). In the processing of this step S42, when it is determined that the number of holding of the first special symbol is not the maximum value, in order to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol in the state of holding, the following steps The processing of S43 to S44 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S43, the first special pending number counter is incremented (added by 1). Then, as a process of step S44, each random number acquired in step S41 is a first special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the first special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control internal RAM. Then, the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of step S42, when it is determined that the number of holding the first special symbol is the maximum value (when a so-called "fog ball" occurs), the variable display of the first special symbol Control is not newly reserved. That is, each random number acquired in step S41 is stored in the first special symbol non-lottery storage area of the storage area of the main control internal RAM without executing the processing of steps S43 to S44 (step S45), by ending the process, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second starting opening passage process (step S34).

Now, in the process of step S33, if it is determined that the second starting port sensor 2325 is in the ON state and the game ball enters the second starting port 2004, as shown in FIG. 158. The main control MPU of the main control board first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S51.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board acquires the counter value by the second special holding number counter from the main control internal RAM, and the holding number of the second special symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value. It is determined whether it is "4" (step S52). In the processing of this step S52, when it is determined that the number of holding of the second special symbol is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly hold the variable display control of the second special symbol, The processing of S53 to S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S53, the second special suspension number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S54, each random number acquired in step S51 is a second special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the second special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control internal RAM. Then, the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of step S52, when it is determined that the number of holding the second special symbol is the maximum value (when a so-called "fog ball" occurs), the variable display of the second special symbol Control is not newly reserved. That is, each random number obtained in step S51 is stored in the second special symbol non-lottery storage area of the storage area of the main control internal RAM without executing the processing of steps S53 to S54 (step S55), by ending the process, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

Command to instruct the reserved number of the first special symbol in the storage process (step S20) when the reserved number of the first special symbol changes based on the game ball entering the first starting opening 2002 (first hold) The number designation command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board, and when the number of reserved second special symbols changes based on the game ball entering the second starting opening 2004, the above storage processing (step S20). ) And sets a command (second reserved number designating command 0 to 4) for instructing the reserved number of the second special symbol and transmits it to the peripheral control board. In addition, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first starting port 2002, when a random number is stored in the first special symbol non-lottery storage area, the command for notifying the random number (first bubble specification command) is also described above. When a random number is stored in the second special symbol non-lottery storage area based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second starting opening 2004 and is set in the memory processing, it is notified of the random number. The command to execute (the second ball sphere designation command) is also set in the storage processing and transmitted to the peripheral control board. In addition, when the first ball-off ball command and the second ball-off ball command are transmitted to the peripheral control board in the storage processing, the stored contents of the first special symbol non-lottery storage area and the second special symbol non-lottery storage area are cleared.

FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol process process (step S38). The first special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process are the same program module, and are random numbers used for determination. Since the tables are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes will be selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

1. The first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read, and the first special symbol is performed based on the read first special random symbol for the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped. Normal processing (step S80)

2. Based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, the determination process of the mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, etc. )

3. A lottery process for the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device based on the variable random number and the variation mode of the effect display executed corresponding to the special symbol on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. First fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82)

4. First special symbol variation processing to wait until the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display is stopped (step S83)

5. The variation control stop mode of the first special symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variation control stop of the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol indicator First special symbol stop process to stop the variable display of the first special symbol (step S84)

The first special symbol process flag is operated in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 155) to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed.

FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 160, the main control MPU of the main control board, first, in step S101. As a process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the suspended state based on the counter value by the first special suspended number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the suspended state, then as the process of step S102, it is stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control internal RAM. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) is the same main control built-in RAM Read from. Then, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, while counting down the first special reserved number counter, the first special stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control internal RAM. Random numbers (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the symbols is stopped are shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol holding storage area a to first special symbol holding storage area d), of the starting winning prize to the first starting opening 2002. The random numbers extracted according to the occurrence are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area and the start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n+1)th (n=1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth storage area (N=2 to 4). Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored so that it can be specified, and the suspension of the variable display control can be released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become. Similarly, the second special symbol hold storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol hold storage area a to second special symbol hold storage area d), depending on the occurrence of a start prize to the second starting opening 2004. The random numbers thus extracted are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area and the start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n+1)th (n=1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth storage area (N=2 to 4). Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. Thus, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the second special symbol occurs can be stored so that it can be specified, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

Then, after that, as a process of step S105, a big hit determination process, which is a lottery process for the big hit, is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) (step S106), this process ends.

FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process (step S105).

The main control MPU of the main control board, if the current game state is a high-probability state (high-probability time-short state, high-probability non-time-short state) (step S111), the high-probability big hit shown in FIG. 162 (A) When the determination table is selected (step S112) and the current game state is the low probability state (step S111), the low probability big hit determination table shown in FIG. 162(A) is selected (step S113). The big hit determination table and the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process are compared (step S114).

As shown in FIG. 162(A), the big hit determination table is stored in the ROM with built-in main control, and when the gaming state has a low probability (low probability non-time saving) for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). State and low-probability time-saving state) low probability big hit judgment table used, high-probability big hit judgment used when the game state is high probability (high-probability non-short-time state, high-probability time-short state) And a table. Then, in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability that is referred to for comparison with the first special random number, one type of the first special random number matches the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won, and the 399 types of the first special random numbers. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value indicating that the special random numbers are out of the above range (big hit probability at low probability; 1/400). Moreover, in the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process in this example, in the big hit determination table at the time of low probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number, the first special random number. Similarly to the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability referred to for comparison, one type of second special random number coincides with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and the 399 types of second special random numbers deviate from the above. The above-mentioned second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value indicating that is (big hit probability at low probability; 1/400).

Further, in the high probability big hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number, 10 types of first special random numbers coincide with the big hit determination value, and 390 types of first special random numbers are out-of-range determination values. The above-mentioned first special random numbers are associated with each other so that they coincide with each other (big hit probability at high probability; 1/40). Further, in this example, in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S39 of the special symbol process processing, in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number, the first special random number Similar to the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability referred to for comparison, 10 kinds of second special random numbers coincide with the jackpot judgment value indicating that the jackpot is won, and 390 kinds of the second special random numbers deviate from the above The above-mentioned second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value indicating that is (big hit probability at high probability; 1/40). The jackpot determination table that is referred to for comparison with the first special random number, and the jackpot determination value that is set in the jackpot determination table that is referred to for comparison with the second special random number (with the same number of jackpot determination values The jackpot determination value may be different (the jackpot probability is common), or the number of jackpot determination values may be different (the jackpot probability is different)). In this case, at least one of the big hit judgment table at the time of low probability and the big hit judgment table at the time of high probability may be made different (both may be made different).

The main control MPU of the main control board, as a result of the comparison between the selected jackpot determination table and the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing, when it is determined to be a jackpot (step S115) A jackpot flag indicating that the variation is a jackpot is set (step S116), and the jackpot determination process ends.

If it is determined in step S115 that it is out of alignment, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119).

A reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the gaming state is in the high probability non-time saving state. Reach determination table in the high probability time saving state used in the case of, and the reach determination table in the low probability state used when the game state is the low probability state (low probability non-time saving state and low probability time saving state), Equipped with. Then, in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state, one type of reach random number is matched with the reach determination value indicating that the reach is reached, and 71 types of reach random numbers are matched with the reach determination value indicating that the reach is not reached. The reach random numbers are associated with each other.

In addition, in the reach determination table in the low probability state, a reach determination value indicating that 5 types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number set as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability short time state reach is determined. The 67 reach random numbers are associated with the reach random numbers so as to match the reach determination values indicating that the reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating that the reach is reached is increased in the low probability state than in the high probability short time state.

Further, in the reach determination table in the high-probability non-time saving state, 6 types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random numbers set in the reach determination table in the high-probability time saving state and the low-probability state should be reached. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so that the reach random numbers of 66 types and the reach random numbers of 66 types do not reach. Thus, in this embodiment, in the high-probability non-time saving state, the reach determination value indicating that the reach is higher than in the high-probability time-saving state and the low probability state (low-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state). To be enhanced.

The main control MPU of the main control board, as a result of comparison between the selected reach determination table and the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119), when it is determined that the reach is lost (step S120), the fluctuation is A reach flag indicating that the reach is reached is set, and the process ends (step S121).

FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 163, the main control MPU of the main control board, first, The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of one special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S105) is determined. The determination of the lottery processing result is performed by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S131).

If the big hit flag is set in step S131, the main control MPU selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 162(B) and selects the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process. The big hit symbol as the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is determined by comparing with the symbol determination table (step S132).

As shown in FIG. 162(B), in the symbol determination table, each random number of symbols (4R regular big hit, 4R latent probability big hit, 4R probability variation big hit, 16R sudden variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit) respectively The first symbol random number and the second symbol random number) are stored in the associated form. The main control MPU of the main control board determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the determination probability of the jackpot type determined based on the first symbol random number and the determination probability of the jackpot type determined based on the second symbol random number are set to be different. ing.

In particular,
1. After opening the lower special winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the lower large winning opening sensor 2354 that 9 gaming balls have been won in the lower large winning opening 2005, the opening/closing is performed. By repeating the pattern 4 times, the game ball can enter the lower large winning opening 2005 (easy) and is controlled to a 4R big hit game state, and a low probability non-time saving state (so-called normal state) until the next big hit game state occurs. 4R normal big hit to control

2. After opening the lower special winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the lower large winning opening sensor 2354 that 9 gaming balls have been won in the lower large winning opening 2005, the opening/closing is performed. By repeating the pattern four times, the game ball can be entered (easy) in the lower big winning opening 2005, and is controlled to a 4R big hit game state, and is controlled to a high probability non-time saving state until the next big hit game state occurs. 4R latent probability big hit to execute the production that is difficult to determine that it is controlled to the probability state

3. After opening the lower special winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the lower large winning opening sensor 2354 that 9 gaming balls have been won in the lower large winning opening 2005, the opening/closing is performed. By repeating the pattern 4 times, the game ball can enter the lower special winning opening 2005 (easy) 4R big hit control to the gaming state, and then to the high probability time shortening state until the next big winning gaming state occurs 4R probability variation big hit

4. By opening and closing the lower prize hole 2005 for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) and then opening and closing the pattern 16 times, the game ball is controlled to a 16R jackpot game state where it is difficult to enter the lower prize hole 2005. 16R sudden hit big hit that controls to high probability time saving state until a big hit game state occurs, and performs the effect of whether or not control is suddenly transitioned to a high probability time saving state without occurrence of a big hit game state during the game

5. Opening and closing after opening the lower prize hole 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the lower prize hole sensor 2354 that nine game balls have been won in the lower prize hole 2005 After repeating the pattern 8 times, opening and closing the lower prize hole 2005 for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) and then repeating the opening and closing pattern 8 times allows the game ball to enter the lower prize hole 2005 (easy ) 8R big hit game state control, 8R probability variation big hit control to high probability time saving state until the next big hit game state occurs

6. Opening or closing after opening the special winning opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the above-mentioned special winning opening sensor 2552 that nine game balls have been won in the big winning opening 2006 16R jackpot that allows the game ball to enter (easy) the upper jackpot 2006 by repeating the pattern 16 times, and the 16R probability variable jackpot that controls to a high probability time saving state until the next jackpot game state occurs.

In the left-handed state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the second starting opening door member 2323 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-handed state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2004 does not occur, only the winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 2002 occurs, and there is a reserved ball of the second special symbol. Except for cases, only the variable display of the first special symbol is executed on the first special symbol display, and the big hits related to the first special symbol (4R normal big hit, 4R latent probability big hit, 4R probability variation big hit, 16R sudden probability big hit, 8R probability variation) Jackpot) will occur. Similarly, in the right-handed state, no game ball is won in the first starting opening 2002. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2004 will occur, and the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unless there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol. Only the display is executed, and a big hit (4R regular big hit, 4R latent probability big hit, 4R certainty variation big hit, 16R certainty variation big hit) related to the second special symbol will occur.

In addition, in the big hit related to the first special symbol, the open/close pattern for opening the lower special winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) can be repeated eight times at the maximum, whereas it is related to the second special symbol. It is possible to repeat the opening/closing pattern of opening the upper special winning opening 2006 for a long time at the maximum (for example, 28.5 seconds) at the maximum 16 times, and further opening the lower special winning opening 2005 related to the first special symbol for a long time ( For example, 28.5 seconds) The opening/closing pattern that repeats eight times is repeated 8 times, and the upper special winning opening 2006 related to the second special symbol is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) than the rate (31%) determined for the 8R probability variation big hit. ) The open/close pattern is repeated 16 times, and the rate (63%) determined for the 16R probability variation big hit is set to be about twice as high. Therefore, the game based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2004 is mainly executed on the right. In the hit state, it is possible to obtain a larger amount of prize balls than in the left hit state in which a game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 2002 is mainly executed.

In addition, in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, when it is determined to be a 4R normal jackpot, it is determined to be a 4R normal jackpot symbol as a jackpot symbol, and when it is determined to be a 4R latent hit jackpot, it is a 4R latent jackpot jackpot symbol as a jackpot symbol. When determined and determined to be 4R certainty variation jackpot, it is determined to be 4R certainty variation jackpot design as a big hit symbol, when it is determined to 16R abrupt confirmation jackpot, it is determined to 16R abrupt variation jackpot design as a big hit symbol, when it is determined to 8R certainty variation jackpot As a big hit design, the 8R probability variation big hit design is decided. Also, although not shown, if it is determined to be a 4R normal big hit in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, it is determined to be a 4R normal big hit symbol as a big hit symbol, and if it is determined to be a 4R latent accuracy big hit, it is a 4R latent probability as a big hit symbol. When it is determined to be a big hit symbol, when it is determined to be 4R certainty variation jackpot, it is determined to be a 4R certainty variation jackpot symbol as a big hit symbol, and when it is determined to be 16R certainty variation jackpot, it is determined to be a 16R certainty variation jackpot symbol as a jackpot symbol.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board, if the big hit flag is not set in step S131, after determining the deviation symbol as the mode at the time of fluctuation stop of the first special symbol (step S136), count the number of times between the big hits. The counter is incremented by 1 (step S135b), and the process proceeds to step S137.

Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board, as the process of step S137, indicates one of the lottery result (type of big hit, out of reach, out of contact (first One special symbol may be used to indicate the mode of the stop symbol)) so that the determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so as to be transmitted to the peripheral control board. Then, after that, as the process of step S138, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

The peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board controls the display of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 based on the received determination result notification command and the fluctuation pattern command (the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are variably displayed and left decoration is performed). Stop the display in the order of the design → the right decorative design → the middle decorative design (the left, middle, and right decorative designs may be displayed in sync with the same design in a variable manner and stopped at the same time)). Specifically, when the peripheral control MPU specifies 4R normal big hit among big hits from the received judgment result notification command as a mode (stopping pattern) when the variation of the decorative design displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is stopped (stop design). In the case of 4R normal big hit design (the combination of left, middle and right decorative designs being the same even number among the designs of "0" to "9"), and when the 4R latent probability big hit of the big hit is specified In 4R latent probability big hit design (a combination of left, middle, and right decorative designs that are the same as the 4R normal big hit design, which is the same even number of the decorative designs from "0" to "9"), the big hit When 4R probability variation big hit is specified, 4R probability variation big hit pattern (combination in which left, middle, and right decorative designs are all "1" or "9") is determined, and when 16R sudden hit big jackpot is specified In the case of the 16R sudden definite jackpot design (the combination of the left, middle, and right decorative designs includes all the symbols "1", "3", and "5"), and the 8R definite variable jackpot among the jackpots is specified 8R probability variation big hit design (combination in which all left, middle and right decorative designs are "5") is determined, and if 16R probability variation big hit is specified among the jackpots, 16R probability variation big hit pattern (left, middle, right) (The combination of all decorative patterns is “7”). In addition, when the reach out is specified, the out comes with the reach (the combination of the same designs of the left and right decorative designs is "0" to "9" and the middle decorative design is different; reach loss) If you specify the (), and if the outlier is specified, then determine the outlying design without a reach (a combination of left, middle, and right decorative designs in which at least the left and right decorative designs are different) and change. When the variable time specified from the pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the central liquid crystal display device 1500.

FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board, the jackpot flag is set, as shown in FIG. If so (step S141), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the kind of big hit decided at step S132 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S142), and the reach flag is set. If so (step S145), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach is selected (step S146), and if neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, the normal deviation (reach effect is produced). In the case of a non-execution failure, a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of failure is selected (step S147).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S148), and the determined variation pattern is started around. The variation pattern command to be notified to the control board is set and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device is started (step S149). Further, the main control MPU sets, in the fluctuation timer, the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern (step S150). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S83) (step S155), this process ends. As a result, the variation display control of the first special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display for the variation time thus determined, and the central liquid crystal display device 1500 produces control in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. Will be done.

The variation pattern table of this example is provided in plural types for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and design random numbers (first design random number, second design random number). Further, in the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table, a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. The variable random numbers are stored so as to be associated with each other. Then, the main control MPU, of the plurality of types of variation pattern table according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number, the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process By comparing, by acquiring the variation time information associated with the read variation random number from this table, the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. Thereby, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) will be performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM with built-in main control.

Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach of this example, it is set to determine the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number. .. For example, out of 241 types of variable random numbers, 164 types of variable random numbers are set as the judgment value (0 to 163) indicating that one of the normal reach effects is to be executed, and 59 types of variable random numbers have a low jackpot expectation super reach. It is set as a determination value (164 to 222) indicating that one of the effects is to be executed, and 18 types of variable random numbers are determination values (223 to 240) indicating that one of the super reach effects with a high jackpot expectation is to be executed. ) Is set as. It should be noted that the super-reach effect has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach effect, and for a player who desires the occurrence of the big-hit game state, the expectation of the player for the big-hit game state when the super-reach effect is executed is higher. It is increasing.

In addition, in the variation pattern table at the time of the deviation, which is provided corresponding to the first special random number and the first symbol random number and is used when determining the variation time of the first special symbol, it is common to the non-time saving state and the time saving state. The fluctuation time of 12 seconds is set. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table at the time of the deviation, which is provided when corresponding to the second special random number and the second symbol random number and is used to determine the variation time of the second special symbol, the variation time of 0.3 seconds as a time saving state. Is set, and the fluctuation time of 12 seconds is set as the non-time saving state. In this way, the variation time of the first special symbol is the same during the time saving state and during the non-time saving state, and prompts the player to win the game ball into the second starting opening 2004 during the time saving state and the player starts the second operation. The time to secure the game ball in the mouth 2004 is secured.

Further, as described above, in the right-handed state, only a gap that allows one game ball to pass through is provided, and the rolling of the game ball is limited, and it is guided to the gate portion 2003 and the second starting opening 2004 with an extremely high probability. To be done. That is, in the right-handed state, the game ball is configured to pass through the gate portion 2003 with an extremely high probability, the normal symbol is a hit, and the second starting opening door member 2323 of the second starting opening 2004 is advanced. Then, the game ball is configured to be received in the second starting opening 2004 with an extremely high probability (substantially all of the game balls hit to the right of the center accessory 2500). Further, in the time saving state, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is set to be 100%, and when the ordinary symbol is a hit, the second starting port door member 2323 of the second starting port 2004 is for a long period (5.5 in this example). It is maintained in a forwarded state for 2 seconds), and it becomes possible to receive the game ball into the second starting port 2004. In this example, when the player operates the handle lever 504, the game balls are shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Then, when the launched game ball is hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500, the game ball is accepted into the second starting port 2004 with an extremely high probability, so that the second starting port door of the second starting port 2004 is saved in a short time. In the state where the member 2323 moves forward and the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004, the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 2004 occurs at intervals of about 0.6 seconds. In this example, as described above, the variation pattern table when the second special symbol is out based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 2004 is set to a very short 0.3 second as a variation time in the time saving state. .. Further, the interval time from the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol to the start of the variable display again is set to about 0.6 seconds. That is, in the time saving state, the execution interval of the variable display of the second special symbol is extremely shortened compared to the non-time saving state (fluctuation time 12 seconds, interval time 0.6 seconds), and the game ball to the second starting opening 2004 In the winning interval and the time saving state, the difference between the execution interval of the variable display of the second special symbol is narrowed, so even if a large number of game balls are won in the second starting opening 2004 in an extremely short time, the second special symbol The variable display is executed in an extremely short time to prevent an increase in the number of second special symbols to be held, and in the time saving state, the number of times of variable display per unit time is extremely increased as compared with the non-time saving state. As a result, in the high-probability time saving state in which the shift control to the right-handed state is performed, it is possible to win the next big hit in an extremely short time compared to the previous game machine, and it is possible to obtain a large number of prize balls in a short time. , You can improve the enjoyment of the game.

FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 165, the main control MPU of the main control board, first, in step S171. As the processing, the fluctuation timer in which the fluctuation time is set according to the fluctuation pattern determined in the fluctuation pattern lottery processing (step S82) is subtracted by one. When it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, the variation time selected by the lottery has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, at the time when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84), this process ends.

FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop processing (step S84).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 166, the main control MPU of the main control board, first, in step S181. As a process, while performing the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display device, the first special symbol is displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative design according to the stop design is set as a command to the peripheral control board (step S182).

Further, when the big hit flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU of the main control board sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit game state is started (step S187), and the big hit game state. The waiting time until the start of (the time for displaying the start of the big hit game state and the like) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Then, the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is being executed is set and the high probability flag is reset if the high probability flag is set, and if the time saving flag is set. The time saving flag is reset (step S189), and when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S194), this process is ended. The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S187, a big hit start command (4R normal big hit start command, 4R probability big hit, 4R probability big hit, 4R probability big hit, 16R sudden change big hit, 8R probability big hit, 16R probability big hit) Start command, 4R certainty variation jackpot start command, 16R sudden variation jackpot start command, 8R certainty variation jackpot start command, 16R certainty variation jackpot start command). Thereby, the effect of the big hit game state according to the kind of big hit instructed by the big hit start command is executed by the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the lamps/LEDs and the speakers 130, 222, 262 and the like.

[7. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, a process executed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board will be described. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of control performed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

As shown in FIG. 167, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU performs an initial setting process (step S501). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM built in the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) is completed, a loop process for monitoring whether the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set is started (step S502).

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU executes an 2 mS steady process by generating an interrupt every 2 mS. In the 2 mS steady process, a process of counting up the 16 mS progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 mS progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 mS progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, when 16 mS has elapsed, 16 mS has elapsed. The flag T is set, and the 16 mS progress monitoring counter is reset (set to 0). As described above, the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 mS in the 2 mS steady process, and is normally set (reset) to "0". When the 16 mS elapsed flag is set in step S502 (16 mS elapsed flag T is "1"), the 16 mS elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and the 16 mS steady process is performed (step S504).

In this 16 mS steady process, a process for controlling the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the lamps/LEDs, the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. is executed based on the command received from the main control board. When the 16 mS steady process is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and every time the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 mS, the above steps S503 to S504 are repeated. On the other hand, when the 16 mS elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (the 16 mS elapsed flag T is "0"), the loop processing is performed until the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set.

FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing an example of a 16 mS steady process executed every 16 mS in the sub-main process. In the 16 mS steady process, the peripheral control MPU executes the processes of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis processing of step S601, the command received from the main control board is analyzed. In the production control process of step S602, the central processing is performed based on the reception of the variation pattern command transmitted by being set in the variation pattern setting process (step S149 of the first variation pattern setting process, the second variation pattern setting process). A control process related to the liquid crystal display device 1500 is executed.

Further, in the sound control processing of step S603, control processing relating to the speakers 130, 222, 262 is executed. In the lamp control processing of step S604, control processing relating to the lamp/LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp/LED lighting signal to the lamp drive substrate 3060 is executed. In the random number updating process of step S606, a process of updating the random number used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

Note that the processing of steps S601 to S606 in the 16 mS steady processing ends within 16 mS. Even if 16 mS or more is required from the start of the 16 mS steady-state process to the end of the 16 mS steady-state process, the 16 mS steady-state process is immediately started from the beginning when 16 mS has elapsed from the start of the 16 mS steady-state process (command of step S601. Do not execute (from parsing). That is, when 16 mS elapses during execution of the 16 mS steady process, only the 16 mS elapse flag is set, and when it is determined that the 16 mS elapse flag is set in step S502 after the end of the 16 mS steady process, the 16 mS steady process is executed. To start.

Further, in this embodiment, the random number update process (step S606) is executed in the 16 mS steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) of updating various random numbers is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in either or both of the loop process and the 16 mS steady process in the sub-main process.

[8. Battle production]
Next, the winning shortening control will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 173. 169 and 173 show that when the high probability time saving state is controlled, the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command indicating that the reach (reach out of reach, per reach) is received are the above command analysis. FIG. 171 to FIG. 173 are timing charts of the battle effect executed by the central liquid crystal display device 1500 when specified in the process (step S601). FIGS. 171 to 173 show the reach when the high probability time saving state is controlled. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a battle effect executed by the central liquid crystal display device 1500 when it is specified in the command analysis processing (step S601) that the determination result notification command indicating that the change command and the variation pattern command have been received. is there.

In this example, the main character 1500a is displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 during the high-probability time saving state, and the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are reduced in the lower left portion of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. To perform variable display. Then, when the determination result notification command indicating that the reach is reached and the variation pattern command are received, the enemy character 1500b is exposed so as to face the main character 1500a, and the main character 1500a and the enemy character 1500b are confronted. Execute battle production. Then, when the received determination result notification command indicates a big hit, a mode in which the main character 1500a wins over the enemy character 1500b is displayed as a result of the battle effect, and when the received determination result notification command indicates a failure, The mode in which the main character 1500a is defeated by the enemy character 1500b as a result of the battle effect is displayed.

Further, in the above-mentioned battle effect, after the main character 1500a and the enemy character 1500b are displayed facing each other on the central liquid crystal display device 1500, a blackout (a mode in which the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is displayed by turning off the screen) is displayed. Is not visible), and then one of the main character 1500a and the enemy character 1500b is displayed. It is shown that the character displayed after this blackout will make a first strike, and when the main character 1500a is displayed after the blackout, it is a big hit. On the other hand, when the enemy character 1500b is displayed after the blackout, if the attack of the enemy character 1500b is avoided, it will be a big hit. In this way, the player can recognize that the main character 1500a has been displayed after the blackout to be a big hit, and even if the enemy character 1500b is displayed after the blackout, by avoiding the attack of the enemy character 1500b. You will be able to recognize that it will be a big hit.

In this way, even though it is confirmed that a big hit will be reached in the middle of the battle effect, if the battle effect is continued after that and the variable display is executed for a long period of time, the special symbol per unit time is displayed. Since the number of times of variable display is reduced, the number of times of winning the big hit game state and the expected value of award balls that can be obtained are reduced, which may disadvantage the player and reduce the enjoyment of the game. In this example, when it is decided that a big hit will occur in the middle of the battle production, at that time, the big winning opening (upper winning opening 2006 or lower winning opening 2005) is open-controlled to control the big hit game state. Even if it starts, the production is continued so that the battle production can be executed to the end. The details will be described below.

In this example, a battle production short and a battle production long are provided as a variation pattern when the reach is reached during the high-probability time-saving state, the battle production short is executed only when the jackpot is a big hit, and the battle production long is a big hit. It is designed to be executed in both cases where it becomes and cases where it becomes out of order. First, the battle effect executed based on the variation pattern of the battle effect short will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 and 171(A) to 172(I). In the high-probability time saving state, the right-handed hitting is performed to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 2004, so that the central liquid crystal display device 1500 displays that (right-handed →). There is.

When the gaming state is controlled to the high-probability time saving state as shown in FIG. 171(A), the peripheral control MPU displays the mode in which the main character 1500a is moving on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. And the second special symbol process process (step S39) is executed based on the game ball winning the second starting opening 2004 in that state, the main control MPU is the second special symbol as shown in FIG. 169. While starting the variable display of the second special symbol on the display device, the judgment result notification command and the fluctuation pattern command on the peripheral control board (in this case, the judgment result notification command indicating that it is a big hit and the fluctuation pattern of the battle effect short circuit) (Variation pattern command indicating). When the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command are received from the main control MPU, the peripheral control MPU variably displays the left, middle, and right decorative patterns that are reduced and displayed in the lower left portion of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and the received variation. When the variable time designated by the pattern command has passed, all the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed. Further, in the case where it is indicated that the judgment result notification command and the variation pattern command received from the main control MPU indicate that the main character 1500a should stop and reach something, The noticed mode is displayed (FIG. 171(B)).

Next, the peripheral control MPU causes the enemy character 1500b to appear on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 so as to face the main character 1500a (FIG. 171(C)), and then blackouts the display screen of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 ( FIG. 171(D)). Then, the received judgment result notification command indicates that the high probability time-saving state will continue to be a big hit (in this example, 4R certainty variation big hit, 16R certainty variation big hit), and the variation pattern command instructs execution of the variation pattern of the battle effect short. If so, the peripheral control MPU gradually brightens the display screen of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 to make only the main character 1500a stand out, and at the same time the left, middle, and right sides of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 are reduced and displayed. The player is notified that the decorative pattern will be a big hit by stopping and displaying the big hit pattern (big hit pattern) and displaying "big hit confirmed!" (FIG. 171(E)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 169, the variation time of the second special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display by the main control MPU is almost the same as the variation time of the decorative symbol variably displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. The big hit symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol indicator at the timing in the middle of the battle production in which the main character 1500a is highlighted after blacking out the display screen of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. The main control MPU starts opening control of the special winning opening (upper winning opening 2006 or lower winning opening 2005) based on the fact that the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, when starting the opening control of the special winning opening (upper winning opening 2006 or lower winning opening 2005) by the main control MPU, the peripheral control MPU displays "big hit confirmed!" to control the big hit game state. Since it is notified that the big hit game state control is started, the player can recognize that the big hit game state control is started, and the player suffers a disadvantage without noticing that the big hit game state control is started. Can be suppressed. The jackpot is not limited to the above example as long as the player is sure to recognize that the control of the gaming state will be started. The speaker 130, 222, 262, etc. voice output (the jackpot is started. Or a display (starting the big hit) for notifying that the big hit is to be started.

As shown in FIG. 169, the peripheral control MPU continuously executes the battle effect even after the control of the big hit game state is started by the main control MPU, and displays a mode in which the main character 1500a attacks the enemy character 1500b. (FIG. 172(F)). Then, the peripheral control MPU displays "Press the button and stab the stop!" on the central liquid crystal display device 1500, starts the timer, and starts measuring the effective period (Fig. 172(G)). The plate production button 257 is operated and the detection signal from the production button pressing sensor 258 is input to the peripheral control MPU, and the elevating unit 3510 retracts the rear lower back rotating decorative body unit 3550 invisible from the player side. From the position (upward end position), it is slid downward in an arc shape and moved to an appearance position (downward end position) that can be visually recognized from the player side, and at the same time, the rotation connecting member 3630 is rotated to rotate the back four corner second decorative body. The base 3631 and the back four corner second decorative body 3633 attached to the base four corner second decorative body 3633 are rotated (rotated) (FIG. 172 (H)).

Then, the peripheral control MPU displays the mode in which the main character 1500a has won (FIG. 172(I)), and then executes the effect display of the jackpot gaming state (big hit effect; round effect display, etc.) as shown in FIG. 169. .. In this way, even if the jackpot gaming state is started before the battle effect short effect is completed, the peripheral control MPU continues to execute the battle effect short effect and responds to the operation of the upper plate effect button 257. By causing the rear decorative device unit 3550 to appear under the back, it is possible to proceed in the direction in which the effect of the battle effect short is completed (FIG. 172(H)). In other words, when the battle effect is executed, the player operates the upper plate effect button 257 to cause the lower back rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 to appear in order to complete the effect of the battle effect short. In this way, since the effect of the battle effect short can be completed in accordance with the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 by the player, the player's intention can be reflected in the effect to obtain a sense of satisfaction and a sense of accomplishment. You can perform more attractive effects than conventional gaming machines. Note that, as shown in FIG. 169, the effective period of the upper plate effect button 257 is continued until one round of the big hit game state is completed, but when the upper plate effect button 257 is not operated within the effective period. However, the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 may be displayed after the effective period has passed, or if the upper plate production button 257 is not operated within the valid period, the back-lower rear rotating decorative body may be displayed. The mode in which the main character 1500a has won may be displayed without exposing the unit 3550.

Further, in this example, the player is notified that a big hit will occur in the middle of the battle effect, control of the big hit game state is started, and the continuation of the battle effect is executed while the big hit game state is being executed to display the effect result. In this way, if the start time of the big hit game state that should be started after all the battle effects were originally executed is shortened, the fluctuation time of the battle effect executed before the start of the big hit game state is shortened, and per unit time The number of times the variable display of special symbols is reduced is suppressed. Specifically, in this example, a period of 58 seconds to 87 seconds (depending on the operation timing of the upper plate production button 257) is set as a period required to execute all the productions of the battle production short. However, the variation time corresponding to the period of performing the effect executed before the start of the big hit game state is 12 seconds, and after the variation pattern of the battle effect short is selected and the second special symbol is variably displayed, When 12 seconds have passed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol, and control of the big hit game state is started. And, most of the effects of the battle effect short (in this example, 46 seconds to 75 seconds, but it is sufficient if it is half or more of the entire period) is executed during the big hit game state, the big hit game state of While the effect period of the battle effect short executed before control is 12 seconds, the effect period of the battle effect short executed during the big hit game state is 46 seconds to 75 seconds (operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257. It depends on).

In this way, of all the effect periods required to execute the battle effect short, the period executed during the big hit game state (the period executed as the big hit effect state) is the period executed before the start of the big hit game state (variable time The time required for variable display is reduced by making it longer than ), and it is possible to prevent the number of times variable display of special symbols per unit time is reduced. As described above, in the jackpot gaming state, after the big winning opening (upper winning opening 2006 or lower winning opening 2005) is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or the big winning opening (upper winning opening 2006 or lower The open/close pattern (round) is closed a plurality of times (4 in this example) when the upper prize hole sensor 2552 or the lower prize hole sensor 2354 detects that 9 game balls have been won in the big prize hole 2005). Since it is executed once or 16 times), a certain period or more is always required from the start to the end of the big hit game state. Then, a part of all the effects of the battle effect short circuit is synchronized with the variable display of the variable display effect (the special symbol (in this case, the second special symbol)) before the start of the big hit game state, and the central liquid crystal display device 1500. The effect period of the battle effect short, which is executed as a variable display effect before the start of the big hit game state, as well as the remaining effect is executed as a big hit effect after the start of the big hit game state. The fluctuation time of the battle effect short is set to be relatively shorter than the effect period of the battle effect short executed as the big hit effect after the start of the big hit game state. As a result, the player only operates the handle lever 504 to win the game ball at the special winning opening (upper winning opening 2006 or lower winning opening 2005), and the battle occurs during the jackpot gaming state. All the productions of the battle production short are variably displayed while executing some productions of the production production short and allowing the production of the battle production short before the end of the big hit game state without being terminated halfway. The variation time of the battle effect short can be shortened by 46 seconds to 75 seconds as compared with the case where it is executed during the variation display of the second special symbol as an effect, so the variation display of the special symbol (the second special symbol in this case) is started. Since it is possible to shorten the period from the end to the big hit game state, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation display number of special symbols per unit time from being reduced by reducing the fluctuation time, so that the big hit determination processing It can increase the execution opportunity. Even if the time required for variable display is reduced, the battle effect can be executed for a long period of time from the start of variable display to the execution of the big hit game state, so the battle can be performed without simplifying the effect contents. It is possible to execute the effect and reduce the variation time, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the simplification of the effect content.

Further, in the above-mentioned example, the effect that requests the button operation (the button effect) is executed after it is determined that the jackpot will be hit, and the bottom plate rear rotation decoration is performed based on the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 within the effective period. The body unit 3550 is moved from the retracted position, which is invisible from the player side, to the appearance position, which is visible from the player side. In other words, the player is notified in advance that the big hit has been confirmed, and that if the upper plate effect button 257 is operated within the effective period, the back and rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 will appear without fail. The button performance is being executed while grasping it. Normally, the button effect is executed before the result of the variable display is confirmed, and when the result of the variable display is out of alignment, the bottom plate rear rotation is performed even if the upper plate effect button 257 is operated within the effective period. The decoration unit 3550 is set to be less likely to appear from the retracted position to the appearance position, and when the variation display result is a big hit, when the upper plate effect button 257 is operated within the valid period, the back plate is displayed. It is set to increase the possibility that the lower rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 will appear from the retracted position to the appearance position.

Further, as described above, the big hit probability at the time of low probability is set to 1/400 and the big hit probability at the time of high probability is set to 1/40. Therefore, most of the variable display executed have the display result deviated. Therefore, even if the upper plate effect button 257 is operated when the button effect is executed, it is unlikely that the rear lower back rotating decorative body unit 3550 appears from the retracted position to the appearance position. In this way, when the lower back rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 does not appear from the retracted position to the appearance position even if the upper plate effect button 257 is operated when the button effect is executed, the player feels stress, Further, even if the upper plate effect button 257 is operated, there is a low possibility that the rear lower back rotating decorative body unit 3550 will appear from the retracted position to the appearance position. It was

In this example, when the button effect is executed and the upper plate effect button 257 is operated within the effective period after it is determined that the big hit is made as described above, the back lower rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is always moved from the retracted position. Since the player performs the button effect in a state that the player knows that it will appear at the appearance position in advance, the plate effect to dissipate the stress accumulated in the button effect executed before the big hit is confirmed The button 257 can be operated. In addition, since it is decided that a big hit will be reached, the upper plate effect button 257 can be operated to cause the rear lower back rotating decorative body unit 3550 to appear, so that a superior feeling can be obtained. It is possible to increase the joy of being a big hit.

Next, referring to FIG. 170, FIG. 171(A) to FIG. 171(D), FIG. 171(E′), FIG. 172, and FIG. 173 regarding the battle effect executed based on the variation pattern of the battle effect long. explain. Since the effect executed based on the variation pattern of the battle effect long includes the same effect as the effect executed based on the variation pattern of the battle effect short, the battle effect short for the overlapping portion. Should be read as the battle effect long, and only the part different from the effect of the battle effect short will be described below.

171(A) to 171(D) by the peripheral control MPU based on the reception of the determination result command and the fluctuation pattern command (in this case, the fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation pattern of the battle effect long). After executing, the display screen of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is gradually brightened to make only the enemy character 1500b stand out (FIG. 171(E′)), and an attack is performed by the enemy character 1500b. Note that, as shown in FIG. 170, the attack by the enemy character 1500b is performed during the variable display of the second special symbol.

The received judgment result notification command indicates a big hit (in this example, 4R certainty change big hit, 16R certainty change big hit) which continues the high-probability time-saving state, and the variation pattern command instructs the execution of the variation pattern of the battle effect long. In this case, the peripheral control MPU displays a mode in which the main character 1500a avoids the attack of the enemy character 1500b (FIG. 173(F′)), and the left/middle display is reduced in the lower left part of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. The player is notified that the right decorative pattern is a big hit by stopping and displaying it in the form of a big hit (big hit pattern) and displaying "attack avoidance! Big hit confirmation!" (Fig. 173 (G')). After that, the effects of FIGS. 172(F) to 172(I) are executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 170, the variation time of the second special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display by the main control MPU is almost the same as the variation time of the decorative symbol variably displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. The big special symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device at the timing in the middle of the battle production in which the main character 1500a avoids the attack of the enemy character 1500b, and the big special symbol of the second special symbol is displayed. Based on the stop display, the main control MPU starts opening control of the special winning opening (upper winning opening 2006 or lower winning opening 2005).

On the other hand, the received determination result notification command indicates a big hit (4R normal big hit, 4R latent accuracy big hit in this example) that ends the missed state or the high-probability time-saving state, and the change pattern command executes the change pattern of the battle effect long. If the peripheral control MPU indicates that the main character 1500a is attacked by the enemy character 1500b (FIG. 173(F″)), if the received determination result notification command is missed, The left, middle, and right decorative designs that are reduced and displayed in the lower left part of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 are stopped and displayed in a detached manner (in this case, the reach detached design), and the received determination result notification command is in a high-probability time saving state. If it is a big hit (in this example, 4R normal big hit, 4R latent accuracy big hit), the left, middle, and right decorative patterns reduced in the lower left part of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 are stopped and displayed in the big hit mode. By displaying “defeat...”, the player is notified that the deviation or the high probability time saving state will be terminated (FIG. 173 (G″)). After that, if the received determination result notification command is out of alignment, returning to FIG. 171(A), the mode in which the main character 1500a is moving is displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and the received determination result notification command has a high probability of shortening. If it is a big hit (4R normal big hit, 4R latent probability big hit in this example) to end the state, the big hit game state is notified and the big hit game state control is executed, and then the process returns to FIG. The mode in which the character 1500a is moving is displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500.

It should be noted that a period of 78 seconds to 107 seconds (depending on the operation timing of the upper plate production button 257) is set as a period required to execute all the productions of the battle production long that are executed in the case of a big hit. However, the variation time corresponding to the period of performing the effect executed before the start of the big hit game state is 32 seconds, and after the variation pattern of the battle effect long is selected and the second special symbol is variably displayed, When 32 seconds have passed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol and control of the big hit game state is started. Then, most of the effects of the battle effect long (in this example, it is 46 seconds to 75 seconds, but may be half or more of the entire period) are executed during the big hit game state, and The production period of the battle production long executed before the control is 32 seconds, while the production period of the battle production long executed during the big hit game state is 46 seconds to 75 seconds (operation timing of the upper plate production button 257). It depends on).

In this way, even when performing a battle production that has a longer production period than the battle production short, a period that is executed during the big hit game state among all the production periods required to execute the battle production long (executed as a big hit production. The period required for variable display is reduced by lengthening the period) that is executed before the start of the big hit game state (variation time), and the number of times the variable display of special symbols per unit time is reduced. Can be suppressed. That is, a part of all the effects of the battle effect long, the central liquid crystal display device 1500 in synchronization with the variable display of the variable display effect (the special symbol (the second special symbol in this case)) before the start of the big hit game state. The effect period of the battle effect long, which is executed as a variable display effect before the start of the big hit game state, as well as the remaining effect is executed as a big hit effect after the start of the big hit game state. The variation time of the battle effect long is set to be relatively shorter than the effect period of the battle effect long executed as the big hit effect after the start of the big hit game state. As a result, the player only operates the handle lever 504 to win the game ball at the special winning opening (upper winning opening 2006 or lower winning opening 2005) during the execution of the jackpot gaming state. Execute a part of the production of the production long, and perform all the production of the battle production long without ending halfway through, but perform all the production of the battle production long as variable display production. Compared with the case of executing during the display, the variation time of the battle effect long is shortened by 46 seconds to 75 seconds and the variation display of the special symbol (the second special symbol in this case) is started, and then the jackpot gaming state is ended. Can be shortened, it is possible to suppress the variation display number of special symbols per unit time by reducing the variation time, it is possible to increase the chance of executing the big hit determination process. Even if the time required for variable display is reduced, the battle effect can be executed for a long period of time from the start of variable display to the execution of the big hit game state, so the battle can be performed without simplifying the effect contents. It is possible to execute the effect and reduce the variation time, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the simplification of the effect content.

In addition, 65 seconds is the period required to execute all the effects of the battle effect long, which is executed when a big hit (4R normal big hit, 4R latent accuracy big hit in this example) that ends the outlier or the high probability time saving state is finished. It is set. In other words, the variation time of the battle effect long executed in the case of a big hit (4R normal big hit, 4R latent probability big hit in this example) that ends the outlier or the high-probability time-saving state is set to 65 seconds. In addition, after displaying the mode in which the main character 1500a receives the battle effect long and cannot avoid the attack of the enemy character 1500b, the main character 1500a is revived and the enemy character 1500b is defeated to achieve a big hit. It may be notified that, in this case, when the main character 1500a is revived, the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the big hit symbol of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. Then, after the control of the jackpot gaming state is started, the effect of defeating the enemy character 1500b (for example, the effect of FIGS. 172(F) to 172(I)) may be executed. In this case, the production period executed before the start of the big-hit gaming state may be longer than the production period executed during the big-hit gaming state, but even in this case, at least all Since the effect period can be shortened compared to the case where the effect is executed before the start of the big hit game state, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the number of times the variable display of special symbols per unit time is changed.

As above, the battle effect has been described with reference to the preferred embodiments, but the present example is not limited to these embodiments, and as will be described below, various modifications are possible without departing from the gist of the embodiments. It is possible to improve and change the design.

That is, in the above-described embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the invention is not limited to this and is applied to a pachi-slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused. However, even in this case, the same effect as the above can be obtained.

Further, in the above example, what is performed during the high probability time saving state is shown, but the effect period is shortened as compared to the case where all the effects executed in association with the variable display are executed before the start of the big hit gaming state. The control is not limited to the high-probability time-saving state, but is not limited to the high-probability non-time saving state (so-called normal state), low-probability time-saving state (so-called time-saving state), high-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state It may be executed by any one of (so-called probability change state) or an arbitrary combination (may be all). Further, when the control for shortening the effect period is executed also in the cases other than the high-probability time saving state, the appearance frequency and the big hit expectation degree of the effect may be different for each game state. For example, in the non-time saving state (high-probability non-time saving state, low probability non-time saving state), the appearance frequency is lower than in the time saving state (high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state) and the jackpot expectation is lower than in the time saving state. Or, if it is a big hit, by increasing the selection ratio of the long version of the battle production (battle production long) in the non-time saving state, by increasing the selection rate of the short version of the battle production (battle production short) in the time saving state. In the time saving state, the effect of shortening the period from the start of the variable display of the special symbol (in this case, the second special symbol) to the end of the big hit gaming state may be enhanced than in the non-time saving state.

Further, as described above, in the variation pattern that is a big hit that continues the high probability time saving state among the battle effect short and the battle effect long, the button effect is executed during the big hit game state, but at the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257. Accordingly, the effect contents of the jackpot effect executed after the end of the battle effect may be different. For example, when the button effect is executed, it is set as the effective period of the upper plate effect button 257 until the predetermined round of the big hit game state (for example, 3 rounds) is finished, and it is set at an early round (for example, until 2 rounds are finished). When the plate effect button 257 is operated, a series of big hit effects (such as moving images) that are completed until the remaining rounds of the big hit game state are executed are executed, and the upper plate effect is performed in a slower round (for example, 3 rounds). When the button 257 is operated, a series of big hit effects may be terminated halfway when the remaining rounds of the big hit game state are executed while executing the same effect. In this way, when the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257 is late, the big hit effect ends halfway, so the upper plate effect button 257 can be operated at an earlier timing.

In addition, regardless of the operation timing of the above-mentioned upper plate effect button 257, the common big hit effect is executed, but according to the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257, it is executed until the big hit effect is completed or is ended midway. The effect is not limited to that which is different, and different effects may be executed according to the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257. For example, when the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257 is early, the player can enjoy it. On the other hand, when the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257 is delayed, the effect which makes the player uncomfortable is displayed by operating the upper plate effect button 257 at an earlier timing. It is okay, the timing when the upper plate production button 257 is operated (round, elapsed time, the big prize hole (upper prize hole 2006 or lower large prize hole 2005) is entered by the time the upper plate effect button 257 is operated. Depending on the number of game balls, etc.), the type of the big hit effect executed after the end of the battle effect is made different, and the upper plate effect button 257 is determined at the timing determined by the player himself, while considering the kind of the big hit effect executed. You may make it complete a battle production by operating. In this way, by making the subsequent development different depending on the timing at which the upper plate production button 257 is operated, the player is made to think about the timing at which the upper plate production button 257 is operated and the game in the jackpot gaming state is enjoyed. Since it is possible to do, it is possible to execute a more attractive effect than the conventional big hit effect that is executed in the big hit game state.

Further, the mode of the battle effect may be changed according to the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257, for example, the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257 (round, elapsed time, until the upper plate effect button 257 is operated. The faster or slower the number of game balls entered into the special winning opening (upper winning opening 2006 or lower winning opening 2005) is, the effect display (for example, the back) when the rotating decorative body unit 3550 appears underneath When a flame is displayed around the lower rear rotating decorative body unit 3550, the size and color of the flame may be flashy. The earlier the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257 is, the flasher the effect display when the rear lower rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is made to appear allows the upper plate effect button 257 to be operated at an earlier timing. As the operation timing of the button 257 is delayed, the effect display when the rear-bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is made to appear is flashy, so that the upper plate effect button 257 can be operated at a later timing. Thus, by appropriately setting the effect, it is possible to guide the player to operate the upper plate effect button 257 at a predetermined timing.

In addition, as the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257, depending on the number of game balls entered in the special winning opening (upper special winning opening 2006 or lower large winning opening 2005) until the upper opening effect button 257 is operated. If you want to change the mode of production (either or both of battle production and jackpot production), the big winning hole (upper big prize) in all jackpot gaming states executed after the control of the high probability time saving state is started. You may make it change according to the number of the game balls which entered the mouth 2006 or the lower special winning opening 2005). In this case, the more the number of big hit game states executed in the high-probability time saving state, the more the form of the effect can be made different. Therefore, depending on the form of the effect executed according to the number of the big hit game states, the player Can give a sense of superiority and satisfaction, and can further enhance the joy of being a big hit.

In addition, in the above example, when the button effect is executed and the upper plate effect button 257 is operated within the effective period, the effective period ends at that point and the back-and-bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is operated a predetermined number of times (book). Although it is configured to appear only once in the example), the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the back decorative body unit 3550 appears, it does not end the valid period, and if it is within the valid period, The rotating decorative body unit 3550 may be made to appear by operating the upper plate effect button 257 again after the rotating decorative body unit 3550 is retracted, or a predetermined round in the jackpot gaming state (all rounds). Alternatively, when the upper plate effect button 257 is operated in a specific round (for example, until the end of 10 rounds or an odd number round), the back and rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 may be made to appear. With this, the joy of being a big hit can be further enhanced, and the fact that a big hit has been achieved due to the appearance of the rear-bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 by operating the upper plate production button 257 is superior to the surroundings. It can give a feeling.

Further, in the above example, the configuration is such that the battle effect (battle effect short, battle effect long) can be executed not only when it is a big hit but also when it is a big hit, but it is a big hit during the high probability time saving state. The variation pattern of the battle effect may be executed only in this case, and the battle effect may not be executed in the case of a deviation. With such a configuration, when a battle effect is executed, a big hit is always made, so that the effect can be paid attention to at the same time as the timing of starting the big hit game state control and the kind of big hit (4R normal You can also pay attention to big hits, 4R certainty big hits, 4R certainty big hits, 16R certainty big hits).

Also, during the high-probability time saving state, the judgment result notification command instructs the big hit (4R normal big hit, 4R latent accurate big hit) to end the high probability time saving state, and at the same time, the change pattern command causes the battle effect (battle effect short, battle effect). When the variation pattern of (long) is instructed, the control of the big hit game state is started after the end of the battle effect, but in the 4R big hit game state executed in this case, compared to the 16R big hit game state. Because the period required from the start of the jackpot gaming state to the end is short, even if you execute the battle effect as a variable display effect until the end during the variable display of the second special symbol, the special symbol (this In the case of starting the variable display of the second special symbol, from the start of the variable display of the special symbol (in this case, the second special symbol) compared to the period from the start of the 16 jackpot game state to 4 It is possible to shorten the period until the jackpot gaming state is ended.

[9. Game contents]
Next, the game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 174 to 176. FIG. 174 is a front view of the game board in which the front component member and the front unit are cut at substantially the center in the front-rear direction within the game area. Also, FIG. 175(a) is a front view showing an enlarged right part in the game area in FIG. 174, and FIG. Is. Further, FIG. 176 is an explanatory view showing an enlarged vicinity of the upper special winning opening in FIG. 174.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3, whereby the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. However, it is driven into the upper part in the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball hit into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the upper left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 which divides the inside of the game area 5a into left and right depending on the hitting strength. The driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle lever 504, and can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game balls serve as obstacle nails. By abutting, the flow speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a wind turbine (not shown) that rotates by abutting the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

According to the turning angle of the handle lever 504, the ball launching device 680 hits the game ball with a driving force less than a predetermined driving force, and the game ball is driven to the upper part of the center character 2500. Of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500, the front part enters the left side in front view from the highest part. Then, the game ball that has entered on the left side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center role object 2500 is on the left side of the center role product 2500 while the game ball is in contact with a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown). Will flow down. Then, when the game ball flowing down the left side of the center character 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opening on the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center character 2500, the game ball of the center character 2500 passes through the warp passage 2521. It is supplied to the left end of the stage 2530 from a warp outlet 2522 opening in the frame.

The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 rolls back and forth on the stage 2530, and moves back and forth to form side guide grooves 2532 formed on both sides of the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction. When it is released from the front side, it flows down the area above the starting opening unit 2100 below the stage 2530 in the game area 5a. As a result, the game ball may be received in the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100.

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is discharged forward from the central guiding groove 2531 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a of the stage 2530, the starting opening unit 2100 opened immediately below the central guiding groove 2531. The first start port 2002 of 1 is accepted with a high probability. When the game balls are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board and the payout control board.

By the way, when the game ball flowing down to the left side of the center character 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, a plurality of obstacle nails, the first shelf 2201a of the side unit 2200, or the like causes the game to be performed below the center character 2500. There is a possibility of being guided toward the center in the left-right direction within the area 5a and being accepted by the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, etc., which are arranged on the downstream side. When the game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper plate 201 via the main control board and the payout control board.

In addition, the game ball flowing down to the left side of the center character 2500 does not flow down to the attacker unit 2300 side due to the lower side of the center character 2500 extending between the starting opening unit 2100 and the attacker unit 2300. The general winning opening 2001, the second starting opening 2004, and the lower special winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2300 are not accepted. The starting opening unit 2100 is provided below the first starting opening 2002 with a horizontally long rectangular fake portion 2105a similar to the lower winning opening door member 2352 for opening and closing the lower winning opening 2005 in the attacker unit 2300. Therefore, it is possible to make an illusion that there is a special winning opening below the first starting opening like a conventional pachinko machine.

On the other hand, according to the turning angle of the handle lever 504, the ball launching device 680 is driven with a driving force that is equal to or higher than a predetermined driving force, so that the ball is driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a. The game ball enters (drives in) to the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500. Then, the game ball that has entered on the right side of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500 that is higher than the highest part, passes from the upper right entrance to the upper game space 2541 and the right passage 2542 and from the lower right exit 2543. It is discharged directly above the gate portion 2003 in the attacker unit 2300. As a result, the game ball that is hit (right hit) so as to flow down the right side of the center accessory 2500 will pass the gate portion 2003 with an extremely high probability. Then, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 flows down on the shelf member 2303 through the front of the second starting port 2004, rolls on the shelf member 2303 to the left in front view, and then the front surface of the shelf member 2303. It is released downward from the left end of the eye. The game ball released from the shelf member 2303 passes in front of the lower special winning opening 2005 and flows down to the lower right rail 1005, and rolls on the lower right rail 1005 to the left when viewed from the front to play from the outlet 1111. It is discharged to the outside of the region 5a.

When the game ball discharged from the lower right outlet 2543 flows down on the left side of the gate portion 2003 when viewed from the front, the second winning opening 2004 via the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2300 and the guiding portion 2302b of the starting opening front member 2302. Or, there is a possibility that the prize will be accepted in the prize winning opening 2005. On the other hand, when a game ball flows down on the right side of the gate section 2003 when viewed from the front, the game ball flows down onto the lower right rail 1005 and is discharged from the out port 1111 without being accepted by the general winning opening 2001, the second starting opening 2004, or the like. It

Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate portion 2003 when the lower special winning opening 2005 is open, the lower special winning opening 2005 has a high probability of being accepted.

When a game ball passes through the gate section 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2305, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board, and when the result of the ordinary draw is "normal win", the second starting door member 2323 For a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 3 seconds), the vehicle moves forward to open the second starting port 2004. Therefore, when the game ball reaches the front of the second starting opening 2004 at the timing when the second starting opening door member 2323 is advanced and is in the open state, the distribution direction is changed to the rear by the second starting opening door member 2323. Then, it is received in the second starting port 2004. When the game balls are received in the second starting opening 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board and the payout control board.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game balls passing through the gate section 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result (for example, 0. 1 to 10 seconds, also referred to as a normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of this ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5.

Also, if the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 between the time the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 and the time when the result of the normal lottery is suggested, the suggestion of the result of the normal lottery cannot be started. The start of suggestion of the result is held until the suggestion of the result of the ordinary drawing has been completed. The maximum number of ordinary lottery results to be held is limited to four, and if the number is more than that, even if a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, the number is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball is received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player on the main control board (for example, “big hit”, “medium”). The winning of the special lottery result that causes a "win", "small win", "probability change win", "time reduction win", etc.) is performed. Then, the special lottery result selected by the lottery is suggested to the player for a predetermined time (for example, 5 to 360 seconds). The special lottery results that are drawn by receiving the game balls in the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 include "miss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "15R big hit", " Probability change (probability change) per”, “time reduction (time reduction) per”, “probability variation time reduction per hit”, “probability variation time reduction non-per hit”, etc.

In the case where the special lottery results (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) that are drawn by receiving the game balls into the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 are the special lottery results that cause the advantageous gaming state. , Either the lower prize opening door member 2352 of the attacker unit 2300 or the upper prize opening door member 2550 of the center character 2500 is opened/closed in an opening/closing pattern according to the result of the special lottery, and the lower large The game ball can be accepted into the winning opening 2005 or the special winning opening 2006. When the lower special winning opening 2005 or the upper special winning opening 2006 is in an open state and a game ball is received in the lower special winning opening 2005 or the upper special winning opening 2006, the main control board and the payout board provide a predetermined number of the payout devices 830. (For example, 10 or 13) game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the lower special winning opening door member 2352 or the upper large winning opening door member 2550 is opening and closing in a predetermined pattern, the lower large winning opening 2005 or the upper large winning opening 2006 receives a game ball, so that many The game balls can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

When the special lottery result is “small hit”, the lower special winning opening door member 2352 or the upper special winning opening door member 2550 is opened for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The open/close pattern that closes in a state is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses or lowers after the lower special winning opening door member 2352 or the upper special winning opening door member 2550 is opened. When any of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls to the special winning opening 2005 or the upper special winning opening 2006 is satisfied, the lower special winning opening door member 2352 or the upper special winning opening door member 2550 is provided. The open/close pattern for closing (open/close pattern is called one round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, in the case of "2R jackpot", two rounds are repeated, and in the case of "15R jackpot", 15 rounds are repeated, and an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated.

In the case of "big hit", change the probability that special lottery results such as "big hit" will be drawn after the big hit game ("probability change"), or change the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result. (“Short-time winning”) There is a “hit”.

[Holding memory relating to acceptance of game balls into the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004]
In the present embodiment, a random number value is acquired in order to execute the special lottery by accepting the game balls to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and the variable display based on the acquired random value is started. During the period, when the game ball is received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, the variation cannot be started, so the random number value is held until the variation display executed earlier is completed. .. The number of reserved random number values to be reserved is up to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for those exceeding the upper limit, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 are used. Even if the game ball is received in the mouth 2004, it is discarded without acquiring the random value.

[Send command to specify number of holdings to peripheral control board]
As described above, the main control MPU, when the number of reserves of the first special symbol changes based on the game ball entering the first starting port 2002, that is, the first starting port shown in FIG. 157. When the value of the first special reserve number counter by step S43 of the passing process is incremented by 1, and when one reserve memory of the first special symbol is consumed, that is, in the first special symbol normal process shown in FIG. When the value of the first special holding number counter in step S103 is subtracted by 1, in the storage process of FIG. 155(b) (step S20), a command for instructing the holding number of the first special symbol (first holding number designation command) 0-4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board.

Also, if the number of holding of the second special symbol changes based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004, that is, if 1 is added in step S53 of FIG. 158, and the holding of the second special symbol When digesting one memory, that is, in the second special symbol normal processing, which is not shown and described because it is the same algorithm as the first special symbol normal processing, the value of the second special reserved number counter is decremented by 1. In this case, the storage process (step S20) sets a command (second reserved number designation command 0 to 4) for instructing the reserved number of the second special symbol and transmits it to the peripheral control board.

[Reception of command in peripheral control board]
As described above, the peripheral control MPU controls the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the lamps/LEDs, the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. based on the command received from the main control board in the 16 mS steady process (see FIG. 167). Execute the process.

[Command analysis processing]
That is, the peripheral control MPU executes the processing of steps S601 to S606 shown as an example of the 16 mS steady-state processing of FIG. 168 every 16 mS. For example, in the command analysis process of step S601, the command received from the main control board is analyzed.

[Production control processing]
In the effect control process of step S602, based on the analysis result of the command, as an example, as the process of step S137, a lottery result (type of big hit, out of reach, out of order is indicated (stop of the first special symbol). (It may indicate the aspect of the symbol)) determination result notification command transmitted according to each lottery result so that it is transmitted to the peripheral control board, and variation pattern setting process (first variation pattern setting process In step S149, the second variation pattern setting process), the control process related to the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is executed based on the receipt of the variation pattern command transmitted by being set.

The peripheral control MPU controls the display of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command (the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are variably displayed and left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → middle) Stop display in the order of decorative designs (note that left, middle, and right decorative designs may be displayed in sync with the same design in a variable manner and stopped at the same time).

Further, even when the reception of the first hold number designation commands 0 to 4 and the second hold number designation commands 0 to 4 is analyzed by the command analysis process (step S601), in the effect control process of step S602, On the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, a control process for displaying the first reserved number related to the first special symbol and the second reserved number related to the second special symbol is executed.

[Display of decorative pattern in central liquid crystal display device 1500]
Next, an example regarding a display mode in the central liquid crystal display device 1500 will be described. FIG. 177 is a diagram showing an example of the hold number display on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 in the embodiment. Here, an example of the display mode of the reserved memory will be described in the middle of the progress of the effect of one variation of the decorative symbol drawn on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 by the player sitting directly in front of the gaming machine 1. ..

The "1 variation" means that the first special symbol display (not shown) of the function display unit 1400 shown in the front view of the game board 5 in FIG. The first special lottery result that has been randomly selected is from the start of variation as the first special symbol until the stop display, or the second special symbol display device (not shown) of the function display unit 1400 to the second starting opening 2004. The second special lottery result selected by the acceptance of the game ball is started to change and stop displayed as the second special symbol, and the effect drawn on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is also the first special symbol or It is performed according to the time when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of this example, in the normal gaming state, that is, in the left-handed state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the second starting opening door member 2323 is driven. I don't know. Therefore, in the left-handed state, no winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 2004 occurs, and only winning of the gaming ball into the first starting opening 2002 occurs. However, unless there is a reserved ball of the second special symbol, only the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display is executed, and the big hit (4R normal big hit, 4R latent probability big hit) related to the first special symbol 4R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit) will occur. Therefore, in the following, a case where there is a reserved storage of the first special symbol will be mainly described.

The first special lottery result selected by receiving the game balls into the first starting opening 2002 is controlled by the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board on the basis of a command from the main control board, so that the result is shown in FIG. ), in the upper part of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the variable display of the decorative design 1600a on the left side, the decorative design 1600b on the center, and the decorative design 1600c on the right side is started, and the predetermined time has passed. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbols 1600a to 1600c is stopped, and the player can recognize the first special lottery result (winning judgment result).

In FIG. 177(A), as an example of the changing decorative pattern, the left decorative pattern 1600a and the right decorative pattern 1600c are stopped and displayed in the same pattern on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and only the middle decorative pattern 1600b is changed. There is shown an example in which the reach state is generated by the decorative pattern by adopting the display mode. In FIG. 177(A), as an example, the left decorative design and the right decorative design are stopped and displayed as the design “7”, and only the middle decorative design 1600b is changing.

[Display of Suspended Storage in Central Liquid Crystal Display 1500]
Further, as shown in FIG. 177(A), on the left side of the lower part of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 which is visible to the player, the first reserved number display area 1510 (first starting opening) relating to the first special symbol. 2002) is set, and the second reserved number display area 1580 (related to the second starting port 2004) related to the second special symbol is set on the lower right side of the display panel.

In FIG. 177(A), in the first hold number display area 1510, two hold images 1521 and 1522 indicating that the first special symbol is held corresponding to the hold number of the lottery result are displayed, and It is shown that the first holding number of the lottery result for the special symbol is "2". Further, in the second hold number display area 1580, a hold image indicating that the second special symbol is held corresponding to the second hold number of the lottery result is not displayed, and the second special symbol is selected by lottery. It is shown that there is no pending number of results.

In addition, the display of the first number of reserves in the first number of reserves display area 1510 for the first special symbol, the first reserve memory, the second reserve memory, the third reserve memory from the left toward the center, The reserved images 1521 to 1524 are displayed like the fourth reserved storage. Further, the display of the number of reserves in the second number of reserves display area 1580 of the second number of reserves for the second special symbol, the first reserve memory, the second reserve memory, the third from the center to the right. The reserved image is displayed like the reserved memory and the fourth reserved memory.

Further, in this example, the reserved images 1521 to 1524 indicating that they are stored on hold can take a plurality of types of display modes. For example, there are a plurality of types of display modes, such as a mode in which the image has the same shape and a different display color, a mode in which the image has the same display color and a different shape, and a mode in which both the image shape and the display color are different. obtain.

In the present embodiment, the reserved images 1521 to 1524, which represent that the first special symbol is reserved and stored, are displayed in a circular shape, and the display color of the reserved images 1521 to 1524 changes to a plurality of colors. It is supposed to do.

In FIG. 177(A), the reserved image 1521 and the reserved image 1522 for the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory for the first special symbol are a normal display mode of the reserved memory, for example, a circular display color. It is displayed in "blue" (first reserved image) and is visible to the player.

Then, in FIG. 177(B), the peripheral control MPU determines that the stop display command received from the main control board is identified by the command analysis processing in step S601, and the changing middle decoration pattern 1600b is the pattern “ 5" is stopped and displayed, as a result, the left decorative design is "7", the middle decorative design is design "5" and the right decorative design is stopped and displayed as design "7", and the variation stop result of the decorative design is "reach out of reach". It is indicated that the player has been informed that it is.

Next, in FIG. 177(C), the peripheral control MPU identifies the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board in the command analysis processing of step S601, and accordingly, the central liquid crystal It is shown that the design variation of the left decorative design 1600a, the middle decorative design 1600b, and the right decorative design 1600c is started on the display panel of the display device 1500. Hereinafter, this is called digestion of reserved memory.

The peripheral control MPU identifies the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board in the command analysis processing in step S601, and accordingly, the left decorative pattern is displayed on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. The symbol variation of 1600a, the middle decorative symbol 1600b, and the right decorative symbol 1600c is started.

Then, after this, the peripheral control MPU analyzes that the first reserved number designation command “1” transmitted from the main control board has been received, by the command analysis processing (step S601), and accordingly, , The first reserved memory is exhausted for the first special symbol, and the reserved image 1521 displayed as the first reserved memory disappears, and as the second reserved memory for the first special symbol in FIG. 180(A). The displayed reserved image 1522 becomes a new first reserved memory and is moved and displayed as a reserved image 1521 (circular display color "blue"), and the first reserved number of the lottery result for the first special symbol is displayed. It becomes "1".

[Hold change effect]
FIG. 178 is a diagram showing an example of the hold change effect using the hold number display on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. In FIG. 178(A), it is analyzed by the command analysis process (step S601) that the first hold number designation command “2” transmitted from the main control board is analyzed while the decorative symbols 1600a to 1600c are changing. After that, the fact that the first hold number designation command “3” transmitted from the main control board is received is analyzed in the command analysis process (step S601).

In response to this, on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 in FIG. 178(A), the second special hold is newly added to the right of the reserved image 1521 displayed as the first reserved memory for the first special symbol. The reserved image 1522 (a circular display color “blue”) is displayed as a memory, and the third reserved memory is newly reserved on the right side of the reserved image 1522 displayed as the second reserved memory. The image 1523 (circular display color “blue”) is displayed, and it is shown that the first holding number of the lottery result for the first special symbol is “3”.

Next, in FIG. 178(B), it is analyzed by the command analysis process (step S601) that the first hold number designation command “4” transmitted from the main control board is received while the decorative symbols 1600a to 1600c are changing. Accordingly, for the first special symbol, a fourth reserved memory is newly provided on the right side of the reserved image 1523 displayed as the third reserved memory, and the reserved image 1524 (circular display color is displayed. "Blue") is displayed, and the first withdrawal number of the lottery result for the first special symbol is "4", indicating that the reserved memory number has reached the upper limit for the first special symbol. In the following description, the first hold number display area 1510 will be simply referred to as the hold number display area 1510.

[Hold change effect using upper plate effect button 257 and an on-hold image representing an on-hold memory]
In the conventional gaming machine that performs the pending notice effect, in a normal gaming state, the probability of a big hit is kept low, and the probability of a reach is not so high. Therefore, the player has a low chance of seeing the pending notice production. In other words, it can be said that the probability that the pending notice production is performed is low.

Further, there is also a system in which a hold notice is given on condition that the operation button is operated. Hereinafter, since the content of the effect changes when the player operates such an effect form, it is referred to as "participatory effect". However, due to the low probability of holding notice production being performed, some players are not blessed with the opportunity to operate the operation buttons provided for production effectively, making them dissatisfied and reducing the interest of the game. There was a risk that it would end up.

Therefore, the embodiment described below relates to an invention relating to a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the interest of the game by expanding the opportunity to participate in the participatory type production.

In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU that controls the effect control, the first holding number of the lottery result for the first special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, the upper limit may be "4", or a smaller number than that). For example, it may be “3” or “2”), and a lottery is performed on the condition that the hold change effect is performed. That is, in this example, whether or not the hold change effect is performed on condition that the reception of the first hold number designation command “4” transmitted from the main control board is analyzed in the command analysis process (step S601). The lottery (referred to as the lottery for the pending change effect) is performed.

When it is determined to perform the hold change effect by the lottery of the hold change effect, the player's operation on the upper plate effect button 257 (FIG. 22, FIG. 31) is validated, and the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is performed. Each time it is detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258 (FIG. 38), the hold change effect of changing the display color of the hold image representing the hold storage is performed.

[Hold change effect screen]
Further, in the hold change effect of this example, the display color of the hold image to be finally displayed (referred to as the final display color) is determined based on the timing of the start winning. FIG. 178(C) shows an example of the hold change effect screen displayed on the display panel of central liquid crystal display device 1500 when it is determined to perform the hold change effect.

As shown in FIG. 178(C), the left, middle, and right decorative designs are reduced in the upper right portion of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 to perform variable display. Further, the characters "When the button is pressed, the on-hold color will change!" are displayed in the approximate center of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and the operation on the plate effect button 257 (FIG. 22, FIG. 31) is performed. It suggests that the game is valid and prompts the player to operate a button.

Although it is possible to arbitrarily set how long the effective period in which the operation on the above-mentioned plate effect button 257 (FIG. 22, FIG. 31) is valid, it is possible to set from the main control board as an example. This can be done until the received next control command is analyzed by the command analysis process (step S601).

The control command is, for example, one of a stop display command, a jackpot start command, a judgment result notification command, a first hold number designation command, or a combination selected from a plurality of these control commands. You can In this example, for easier understanding of the explanation, it is assumed that the next stop display command transmitted from the main control board is received until the command analysis processing (step S601) is analyzed.

FIG. 179 is a diagram showing an example of the hold change effect using the hold number display on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, which is performed subsequent to FIG. 178(C). In FIG. 179(A), as a result of the player's operation on the upper plate effect button 257 (first time) in response to the suggestion of the button operation to the player, the fourth hold in FIG. 179(C). It is shown that the display color of the reserved image 1524 (the circular display color “blue”) that has been stored and displayed in the normal display mode has changed to “green”.

Although not clearly shown in FIG. 178(C) and FIG. 179, during the hold change effect, the display color of the hold image of the hold storage which is the target for the button operation by the player is changed each time. The final display color of the hold image in the hold memory is predetermined when the hold change effect is determined. In the illustrated specific example, it is assumed that the final display color of the target reserved image in the reserved storage is determined to be “red”. Then, the display color of the hold image of the target hold storage is displayed in the hold number display area 1510 with the final display color determined as a result.

Note that, in FIG. 179(A), subsequently, in the substantial center of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the characters "Hold the button to change the pending color!" are displayed, and the upper plate effect button 257 is displayed. It is suggested that the operation to is effective and also prompts the player to operate the button.

Next, in FIG. 179(B), as a result of the player operating the upper plate effect button 257 (second time) in response to the suggestion of the button operation to the player, in FIG. 179(A), It is shown that the display color of the hold image 1524 displayed as the hold image 1524 (circular display color “green”) has changed to “yellow” as the fourth hold storage.

Note that, here, of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols that are reduced and displayed in the upper right portion of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the left decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol “3”, and The decorative pattern on the right continues to be variably displayed.

Note that, in FIG. 179(B), subsequently, in a substantially central portion of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the characters "If the button is pressed, the reserved color changes!" are displayed, and the upper plate effect button 257 is displayed. It is suggested that the operation to is effective and also prompts the player to operate the button.

Next, in FIG. 179(C), as a result of the player operating the upper plate effect button 257 (third time) in response to the suggestion of the button operation to the player, in FIG. 179(B), It is shown that the display color of the hold image 1524 displayed as the hold image 1524 (circular display color “yellow”) as the fourth hold storage is changed to “rainbow”.

Note that, here, of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols that are reduced and displayed in the upper right portion of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol “3”, and Only the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern continues to be variably displayed. Further, it is shown that the reach is generated by the stop symbol “3” of the left and right decorative symbols.

FIG. 180 is a diagram showing an example of the hold change effect using the hold number display on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, which is performed subsequent to FIG. 179(C). In FIG. 180(A), in response to the stop display command received from the main control board being specified by the command analysis processing of step S601 by the peripheral control MPU, the changing middle decoration symbol 1600b is the symbol “4”. The reduced display of the left, middle, and right decorative designs in the upper right portion of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is canceled, and the original position and size of the center of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 are eliminated. Is displayed again, as a result, the left decorative design is "3", the middle decorative design is design "4" and the right decorative design is stopped and displayed as design "3", and the variation stop result of the decorative design is "reach out". Indicates that the player has been notified that

Further, in FIG. 180(A), in response to the stop display command being specified in the command analysis processing of step S601, the display mode of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 indicates that "the color is a hold color when the button is pressed." The word "I will change!" has disappeared, suggesting that the operation on the plate effect button 257 is no longer valid (the valid period for validating the operation on the plate effect button 257 has ended). It is shown that

In this way, the hold change effect is performed on condition that the hold number instructed by the control command (first hold number designation command “4”) has reached a predetermined number (for example, 4) set in advance. It has become. Therefore, the player is widely given the opportunity to perform the hold change effect. Then, each time the operation input device (upper plate effect button 257) is operated during execution of the hold change effect, the target hold memory displayed in the hold number display area 1510 (4 in this example). The display color of the reserved image 1524 in the (second reserved memory) changes. Therefore, during the hold change effect, the player is given an opportunity to operate the operation input device not only once but a plurality of times. Moreover, each time the operation input device is operated, the display color of the reserved image in the target reserved storage changes. Therefore, since the opportunities to participate in the holding production participation type production are expanded, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the entertainment appeal.

[Relation between digestion of reserved memory and reserved image]
FIGS. 180(B) to 180(C) show how the pending storage is being consumed. First, FIG. 180(B) shows that after the number of the reserved memories is four in FIG. 180(A), the two reserved memories are consumed.

The peripheral control MPU identifies the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board in the command analysis processing in step S601, and accordingly, the left decorative pattern is displayed on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. The symbol variation of 1600a, the middle decorative symbol 1600b, and the right decorative symbol 1600c is started.

Then, after that, the peripheral control MPU analyzes that the first hold number designation command “3” transmitted from the main control board has been received, by the command analysis processing (step S601), and in response to this, , The first reserved memory is exhausted for the first special symbol, and the reserved image 1521 displayed as the first reserved memory disappears, and the second to the fourth for the first special symbol in FIG. 180(A). The reserved images 1522 (display color “blue”), 1523 (display color “blue”), and 1524 display color “rainbow” that have been displayed as the reserved memories become new first to third reserved memories and are reserved images. 1521 (circular display color "blue"), reserved image 1522 (circular display color "blue"), reserved image 1523 (circular display color "rainbow") are moved and displayed, and the first special symbol is selected by lottery. The resulting first pending number is "3".

Then, the peripheral control MPU, in response to the stop display command received from the main control board is specified in the command analysis process of step S601, the middle decoration pattern 1600b that is changing is a symbol "omission, but not a symbol". It is stopped and displayed, and as a result, the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design are stopped and displayed with a combination of the detached designs, and the player is informed that the variation stop result of the decorative design is "displaced". And

Next, the peripheral control MPU identifies the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board by the command analysis processing in step S601, and accordingly, in the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. The design variation of the left decorative design 1600a, the middle decorative design 1600b, and the right decorative design 1600c is started.

Then, thereafter, the peripheral control MPU analyzes that the first hold number designation command “2” transmitted from the main control board has been received, by the command analysis processing (step S601), and in response to this, , The first reserved memory is consumed for the first special symbol, and the reserved image 1521 (display color “blue”) displayed as the first reserved memory disappears, and the first special symbol in FIG. 180(A). 1523 (display color “blue”) and 1524 (display color “rainbow”) that were displayed as the second to third hold storages of the above, become new first and second hold storages and hold images 1521 ( It is moved and displayed as a circular display color “blue”) and a reserved image 1522 (circular display color “rainbow”), and the first reserved number of the lottery result for the first special symbol is “2”. FIG. 180(B) shows the result of the above progress process.

Thereafter, the peripheral control MPU, in response to the stop display command received from the main control board is specified in the command analysis process of step S601, the middle decoration pattern 1600b in change is a symbol "omitted, but out of pattern". ”Is displayed as a stop, and as a result, the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design are stopped and displayed with a combination of the detached designs, and the player is informed that the variation stop result of the decorative design is “displaced”. I will.

Next, the peripheral control MPU identifies the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board by the command analysis processing in step S601, and accordingly, in the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. The design variation of the left decorative design 1600a, the middle decorative design 1600b, and the right decorative design 1600c is started.

Then, after this, the peripheral control MPU analyzes that the first reserved number designation command “1” transmitted from the main control board has been received, by the command analysis processing (step S601), and accordingly, , The first reserved memory is digested for the first special symbol, and the reserved image 1521 (display color “blue”) displayed as the first reserved memory disappears, and the first special symbol in FIG. 180(B). 180223 (display color "rainbow"), which was displayed as the second reserved memory for, becomes the new first reserved memory in FIG. 180C, and is the reserved image 1521 (circular display color "red"). Is displayed and moved, and the first holding number of the lottery result for the first special symbol becomes "1".

As described above, in this example, the display color of the reserved image of the target reserved memory in the above example is changed to “rainbow” by the player's operation of the upper plate effect button 257 during the pending change effect, The final display color of the target hold image in the hold storage is predetermined when it is determined to perform the hold change effect.

The effect that the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is developed is closely related to the reach variation state and the big hit notification state of the lottery symbols displayed on the display panel, and the player's interest and attention. The degree is very high.

Therefore, even after the hold change effect has been finished, in other words, even after the valid period of the plate effect button 257 has expired, in the first hold number display area 1510, as soon as the hold storage is exhausted, 1 The display color of the holding image (holding image whose display color is changed), which is the target of sequentially moving the display position toward the third holding storage, is kept unchanged. Therefore, when the player progresses the game, consideration is given not to reduce the interest of the game without being influenced by the effect information provided from the display panel to be disadvantageous.

In a specific example shown in the figure, when the reserved image of the target reserved memory is displayed as the first reserved memory in the reserved number display area 1510, it is changed to a predetermined final display color “red”. The reserved image of the reserved storage that is the target is displayed. For this reason, the player who intends to change the color of the reserved image by operating it is given a surprise and a surprise such as "Ah...? Why is it changing to red?". Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

FIG. 181 is a time that schematically shows the pending change effect of this example, the change in the display color of the target pending image, and the display color of the target pending image whose display position is changed as the pending storage is exhausted. It is a chart.

As shown in FIG. 181, the variation time of the first special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display by the main control MPU and the variation time of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 are almost the same. I am doing it. Also, during the variation of the first special symbol, due to the game ball winning the first starting opening 2002, the value of the first special pending number counter of the main control MPU is updated to "4", the main control The first reserve number designation command “4” is output from the board.

Whether or not the peripheral control MPU performs the hold change effect on condition that the first hold number designation command “4” transmitted from the main control board is analyzed in the command analysis process (step S601). As a result of performing the lottery of the hold change effect, it is determined that the hold change effect is performed in the lottery of the hold change effect. In this example, the fourth hold memory is the hold memory for the effect target, and the player selects the hold change effect. The operation (referred to as button operation) on the dish effect button 257 is valid. Further, as the fourth reserved memory determined as the notice target, the reserved image 1524 of the normal display color (circular display color “blue”), which is described as “blue 4” in the figure, is displayed. There is.

In the hold change effect of this example, the display color of the hold image to be finally displayed (referred to as the final display color) is determined based on the timing of the start winning, and as an example, the effect target It is assumed that the final display color of the hold image is set to "red".

In FIG. 181, as a result of the player performing the first button operation during the symbol change, the display of the reserved image 1524 described as “green 4”, which is the fourth reserved memory determined as the effect target, is described. The color has changed to "green". After that, as a result of the second button operation performed by the player, the display color of the reserved image 1524 as the fourth reserved memory determined as the effect target, which is described as "yellow 4", becomes "yellow". Is changing. Further, after that, as a result of the player performing the third button operation, the display color of the reserved image 1524, which is described as "rainbow 4" and is determined as the fourth reserved memory, is "rainbow". Has changed to.

After that, the stop display command is output from the main control board based on the fact that the variation of the first special symbol is stopped. The peripheral control MPU stops the variation of the decorative symbol on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 in response to the stop display command being specified by the command analysis processing in step S601. At the same time, it also indicates that the button operation is no longer valid (the valid period during which the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is valid has ended).

Thereafter, the main control MPU, along with the exhaustion of the number of holding the first special symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed, in FIG. 181, each variation of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol of the first special symbol indicator. The display is being made three times. The first hold number designation command 3 (hereinafter, simply referred to as the hold number designation command 3) is output along with the exhaustion of the first hold storage, and accordingly, the display position of the hold image in the hold number display area 1510. Is performed, and the reserved image 1524 as the fourth reserved memory determined as the effect target is shifted to the reserved image as the third reserved memory described as “rainbow 3” without changing the display color. Is displayed.

Thereafter, the first reserved number designation command 2 (hereinafter, simply referred to as reserved number designation command 2) is output along with the second completion of the reserved storage, and in response to this, the reserved image in the reserved number display area 1510. The reserved image 1524, which is the third reserved memory determined as the effect target after the display position is shifted, is the second reserved memory as the second reserved memory described as “rainbow 2” without changing the display color. It is shifted and displayed.

Further, the first reserved number designation command 1 (hereinafter, simply referred to as reserved number designation command 1) is output along with the completion of the reserved storage for the third time, and accordingly, the reserved image is displayed in the reserved number display area 1510. The display position is shifted, and the reserved image 1524 as the third reserved memory that is determined as the effect target is changed to the final display color that is determined as the first reserved memory described as “red 1”. It is shifted and displayed on the reserved image.

[Each process related to pending storage notice by peripheral control MPU]
FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing, as each process of the effect control process of step S602 of FIG. 168, each process executed by the peripheral control MPU in relation to the pending storage. In the effect control process, the peripheral control MPU sequentially executes the number-of-holds designation command process (step A100), the pending change effect determination process (step A200), the pending change effect process (step A300), and the pending image shift process (step A400). To do. The actual execution conditions in each process are as described below.

If it is specified that the command analyzed by the command analysis of step S601 in the 16 ms steady process shown in FIG. 168 is the first hold number designation command (hereinafter, simply referred to as hold number designation command), the step In the effect control process of S602, the reservation number designation command process of step A100 is executed.

In the processing for specifying the number of holdings in step A100, when it is determined that the number of holding storages reaches a predetermined number (for example, “4” in this example) as the execution condition of the holding change effect for changing the holding image. In the step A200, the hold change effect determination process is substantially executed.

The hold change effect determination process of step A200 is substantially executed, and when it is determined to perform the hold change effect, the hold change effect process of step A300 is substantially executed. In step A100, when it is determined that the display position of the reserved image needs to be shifted by detecting that the number of reserved images is decreased by 1, the reserved image shift process is substantially executed.

[Holding number specification command processing]
The number-of-holds designation command processing is executed when the command analyzed by the command analysis in step S601 is identified as the number-of-holds designation command. It is transmitted from the main control board. The hold number specification command is a control command output when the hold number (memory number) managed in the main control board changes, and is a command for specifying the hold number.
Hold number specification command "0" that specifies the hold number "0 (none)",
Hold number specification command "1" to specify the hold number "1",
Hold number specification command "2" to specify the hold number "2",
Hold number specification command "3" to specify the hold number "3",
Hold number specification command "4" to specify the hold number "4" (upper limit number),
There are five types.

183 to 184 are flowcharts showing a subroutine of the number-of-holding designation command processing executed by the peripheral control MPU. When the peripheral control MPU starts the number-of-holds designation command processing, first, the number-of-holds designated by the number-of-holds designation command analyzed by the command analysis in step S601 is "0" (hereinafter, simply referred to as the designated number of holds. ) Is determined (step A110).

When the peripheral control MPU determines in step A110 that the designated number of reservations is "0", the peripheral control MPU sets the value 0 to the first number of reservations counter for storing the number of reservations (step A111). ), the first to fourth reserved image storage areas set in the built-in RAM (not shown) are cleared (step A112), the subroutine for the reserved number designation command process is exited, and the process returns to the effect control process routine.

FIG. 188 is a diagram showing each table, storage area, and processing operation required for the peripheral control MPU to execute each processing related to the pending storage. As shown in FIG. 188(D), the built-in RAM is provided with a first reserved image storage area to a fourth reserved image storage area corresponding to the values 1 to 4 in the first reserved number counter. ..

On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU determines in step A110 that the designated number of reservations is not "0", the peripheral control MPU proceeds to step A113 and determines whether or not the designated number of reservations is "4" ( It is determined whether or not the number has reached a predetermined number (step A113). It should be noted that in this example, it is determined that the hold change effect by the hold image is performed on condition that the value of the hold number has reached a predetermined number. In this example, the predetermined number is described as “4”, but the predetermined number is not limited to this. The predetermined number may be a smaller number such as "3" or "2".

When the peripheral control MPU determines in step A113 that the designated number of reservations is "4", the peripheral control MPU sets the value 4 to the first number of reservations counter for storing the number of reservations (step A114). ), the reserved image (circular shape) is set to the fourth in the reserved image storage area (step A115), the display color of the reserved image is set to normal (“blue” in this example) (step A116), and the reserved The execution flag of the change effect determination process is set (step A117), the subroutine for the number-of-holding designation command process is exited, and the process returns to the effect control process routine.

On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU determines in step A113 that the designated holding number is not "4", the process proceeds to step A113. In this case, the designated number of holdings is any one of "1", "2", and "3". In step A114, the peripheral control MPU compares the designated number of holdings with the value of the first holding number counter (step A120).

Then, it is determined whether or not the comparison result is an increase of "+1" (step A121). When it is determined that the comparison result is an increase of “+1”, for example, when the designated hold number is “3” and the value of the first hold number counter is 2, the hold number is stored. The value is incremented by 1 in the first hold number counter (step A122), and the hold image (circular shape) is set in the hold image storage area (see FIG. 188(D)) corresponding to the value of the first hold number counter (step A123). ), the display color of the reserved image is set to normal (“blue” in this example) (step A124), the subroutine for the reserved number designation command process is exited, and the process returns to the effect control process routine.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A121 that the comparison result is not increased by “+1”, for example, the designated number of holdings is “3” and the value of the first holding number counter is 4, or For example, when the designated number of holdings is “2” and the value of the first holding number counter is 3, the comparison result is “−1”.

The peripheral control MPU determines NO in step A121, decrements the value of the first holding number counter for storing the holding number by -1 (step A126), and sets the shift flag for executing the holding image shift process described later. 1 (execution) is set (step A127), the subroutine for the number-of-holding designation command process is exited, and the process returns to the effect control process routine.

[Hold change effect determination process]
FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of the hold change effect determination process executed by the peripheral control MPU. When the peripheral control MPU starts the hold change effect determination process, it first determines whether or not the execution flag is set (step A130). The execution flag is set in step A117 of the above-described holding number designation command processing.

In step A130, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the execution flag is not set, that is, when the determination in step A130 is NO, the peripheral control MPU executes the subroutine of the hold change effect determination process without performing substantial processing. Exit and return to the routine for effect control processing.

In step A130, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the execution flag is set, that is, when the determination in step A130 is YES, the peripheral control MPU acquires a hold change effect random number (for example, 0 to 99) (step A131), referring to the obtained value of the random number for pending change effect and the pending change effect determination table (step A132), it is determined whether or not to perform the pending change effect (step A133).

FIG. 188(A) is a diagram showing an example of the distribution ratio of the hold change effect determination table stored in the ROM (not shown). As shown in FIG. 188(A), in this example, it is determined that the hold change effect is performed at a distribution ratio of 70%. For the remaining distribution ratio of 30%, another effect (an effect other than the hold change effect) is performed.

In step A133, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the hold change effect is not performed, that is, if the step A133 is NO, the process proceeds to step A140, and the execution flag of the hold change effect determination process is cleared (step S133). A140), exits the subroutine of the pending change effect determination process and returns to the effect control process routine. In this case, the substantial pending change effect process described below is not executed.

In step A133, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the hold change effect is to be performed, that is, if the step A133 is YES, the process proceeds to step A134, and the hold change effect process execution flag is set (step A134). .. As a result, execution of the hold change effect process is determined.

Next, the peripheral control MPU acquires the final display color random number (for example, 0 to 6) (step A135), refers to the acquired value of the final display color determination random number and the final display color determination table, and determines the final display color. Is determined (step A136), and the determined final display color reserved image is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (step A137).

FIG. 188(B) is a diagram showing an example of the final display color determination table stored in the ROM (not shown). As shown in FIG. 188(B), if the value of the acquired final display color determination random number is “0”, the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be “blue”, and if it is “1”, the reserved image is determined. Final display color is determined to be "yellow", if it is "2", the final display color of the retained image is determined to be "green", and if it is "3", the final display color of the retained image is determined to be "orange". If it is "4", the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be "purple", if it is "5", the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be "red", and if it is "6", the reserved image is determined. The final display color of is determined to be "rainbow".

Next, the peripheral control MPU sets "1 (stored)" to the storage flag indicating that the final display color has been stored (step A138), and indicates what number of the hold image the hold change effect target is. The display location counter value is set to a number representing the display location, which is "4" in this example (step A139), and the process proceeds to step A140 to clear the execution flag of the hold change effect determination process (step A140) and hold change effect. The subroutine of the determination process is exited and the process returns to the effect control process routine. In this case, the hold change effect process is executed.

[Hold change effect processing]
FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of the hold change effect process executed by the peripheral control MPU. When the peripheral control MPU starts the hold change effect process, first, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the execution flag is set (step A150). The execution flag is set in step A134 of the pending change effect determination process described above.

When it is determined in step A150 that the execution flag is not set, that is, when the determination in step A150 is NO, the peripheral control MPU exits the subroutine for the hold change effect process without performing substantial processing. And returns to the routine of the effect control process. In this case, the hold change effect is not substantially performed.

In step A150, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the execution flag is set, that is, if it determines YES in step A150, whether or not there is a button operation (whether the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed) or not. It is determined (step A151). That is, the state in which the execution flag is set is a state in which the player's operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is valid.

In step A151, when the peripheral control MPU determines that there is a button operation, that is, when it determines YES in step A151, it obtains a random number for operation (for example, 0 to 6) (step A152) and obtains it. The value of the random number for operation and the display color selection table during operation are referred to (step A153), the display color is determined (step A154), and the reserved image of the determined display color is placed in the fourth reserved state shown in FIG. 188(D). The image is stored in the image storage area (step A155), and the process proceeds to step A156.

FIG. 188(C) is a diagram showing an example of the operation display color selection table stored in the ROM (not shown). As shown in FIG. 188(C), if the value of the acquired operation random number is "0", the display color of the reserved image is determined to be "rainbow", and if it is "1", the display color of the reserved image is determined. It is determined to be "yellow", the display color of the reserved image is determined to be "green" if it is "2", the final display color of the retained image is determined to be "orange" if it is "3", and is determined to be "4". If there is, the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be "purple", if it is "5", the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be "green", and if it is "6", the final display color of the reserved image is " "Rainbow" is decided.

On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU determines in step A151 that there is no button operation, that is, when it determines NO in step A151, the peripheral control MPU directly proceeds to step A156 without performing the processing in steps A152 to A155. move on.

Upon advancing to step A156, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not a stop display command has been received (step A156). That is, the peripheral control MPU determines that the stop display command is received when the command analyzed in the command analysis of step S601 identifies the stop display command.

In step A156, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the stop display command is received, that is, if it determines YES in step A156, it clears the execution flag of the hold change effect process (step A157), The process of the hold change effect process is exited and the process returns to the effect control process routine. In this case, the subsequent pending change effect is not performed. Further, in this example, the state in which the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 by the player is valid is ended.

In step A156, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the stop display command has not been received, that is, if it determines NO in step A156, it does not perform the process of step A157, and executes the subroutine for the pending change effect process. After that, the process returns to the effect control process routine. In this case, since the execution flag has been set, the suspension change effect process subroutine is subsequently executed. Therefore, step A152 to step A155 are executed each time the button is operated. Therefore, the display color of the reserved image changes.

In this way, the hold change effect is performed on condition that the hold number instructed by the control command (first hold number designation command “4”) has reached a predetermined number (for example, 4) set in advance. It has become. Therefore, the player is widely given the opportunity to perform the hold change effect. Then, each time the operation input device (upper plate effect button 257) is operated while the hold change effect is being executed, the display color of the effect target hold image 1524 displayed in the hold number display area 1510 is changed. Change. Therefore, during the hold change effect, the player is given an opportunity to operate the operation input device not only once but a plurality of times. Moreover, each time the operation input device is operated, the display color of the effect-holding image changes each time. Therefore, since the opportunity to participate in the participatory type effect by the hold change effect is expanded, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the entertainment appeal.

[Holding image shift processing]
FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of the reserved image shift process executed by the peripheral control MPU. When the peripheral control MPU starts the reserved image shift processing, it first determines whether or not the shift flag is set (step A160). The shift flag is set in step A127 of the above-described holding number designation command processing.

In step A160, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the shift flag is not set, that is, when the determination in step A160 is NO, the peripheral control MPU exits the subroutine for the reserved image shift processing without performing substantial processing. And returns to the routine of the effect control process. In this case, the display position of the reserved image is not substantially shifted (moved to the left by one).

In step A160, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the shift flag is set, that is, when it determines YES in step A160, it stores the second to fourth reserved image storage areas in FIG. 188(D). The reserved images are copied to copy areas 1 to 3 (not shown) (step A161), the first to fourth reserved image storage areas are cleared (step A162), and copy areas 1 to 3 (not shown). Each of the reserved images respectively copied to is stored in the first to third reserved image storage areas (step A163). See FIG. 188(E).

Next, the peripheral control MPU determines whether the storage flag is set (step A164). The storage flag is set in step A138 of the pending change effect determination process described above.

In step A164, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the storage flag is not set, that is, if step A164 is determined to be NO, the reserved image shift processing is performed without performing the processing of steps A165 to A169. The subroutine of (3) is returned to the routine of effect control processing. In this case, substantially only the display position of the reserved image is shifted (moved to the left by one).

On the other hand, in step A164, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the storage flag is set, that is, when it determines YES in step A164, it indicates that the hold change effect has been performed in this case. The peripheral control MPU decrements the value of the display location counter by -1 (step A165), proceeds to step A166, and determines whether the value of the display location counter is "1 (position to display the reserved image in the final display color)". The determination is made (step A166). By the process of step A165, the display position of the reserved image that is the effect target is updated.

In step A166, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the value of the display location counter is not "1", that is, if step A166 determines NO, the peripheral control MPU performs each process of steps A167 to A169. Instead, the process returns from the reserved image shift process subroutine to the effect control process routine. In this case, only the display position of the reserved image is substantially shifted (moved to the left by one).

On the other hand, in step A166, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the value of the display location counter is “1”, that is, when step A166 determines YES, the peripheral control MPU performs each processing of step A167 to step A169. To do. That is, in the first reserved image storage area, the reserved image of the final display color previously determined and stored is stored (step A167), the storage flag is cleared (step A168), and "0" is set in the display location counter. After setting (step A169), the subroutine for the reserved image shift process is exited and the process returns to the effect control process routine.

Display of the reserved image on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is performed by outputting image data in the information output process of step S605 of FIG. 168.

As is clear from the above description, even if the player does not perform the button operation even once, the reserved image [normal display color “blue”] targeted for the effect is the first. When the display position is reached, the reserved image is displayed in the final display color which is previously determined and stored, and the display color is changed.

Therefore, even after the hold change effect has been finished, in other words, even after the valid period of the plate effect button 257 has expired, in the first hold number display area 1510, as soon as the hold storage is exhausted, 1 The display color of the holding image (holding image whose display color is changed), which is an effect target whose display position is sequentially moved toward the third holding memory, is kept unchanged. Therefore, when the player progresses the game, consideration is given not to reduce the interest of the game without being influenced by the effect information provided from the display panel to be disadvantageous.

In a specific example shown in the figure, when the holding image to be rendered is displayed as the first holding storage in the holding number display area 1510, it is changed to a predetermined final display color, for example, “red”. The pending image that is the effect target is displayed. For this reason, the player who intends to change the color of the reserved image by operating it is given a surprise and a surprise such as "Ah...? Why is it changing to red?". Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

Although the embodiment relating to the pending change effect has been described above, the pending image may change to a display color different from the normal display color, for example, “blue”, and the pending image may be displayed in the final display color at the final display position. How the player receives it is entirely up to the player's imagination.

In the present embodiment, the condition for changing the display color of the reserved image is the condition that the number of reservations reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, there is no restriction on whether or not the reserved memory that wins the winning opening is a big hit, whether a reach occurs, or the like.

In the above-described embodiment, when the stop display command is received as the end of the valid period of the button operation, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a big hit start command, a determination result notification command, a first hold number designation command. , Or any of the above. For example, when the big hit start command is received as the end of the valid period of the button operation, then, until the big hit game is started, the button operation becomes effective over the multiple variable display of the decorative pattern, and the pending image is displayed. The display color will change.

Therefore, during the hold change effect, the opportunity for the player to operate the operation input device is given not only to the variable display with one decorative pattern but also to the variable display with multiple decorative patterns. .. Moreover, each time the operation input device is operated, the display color of the effect-holding image changes each time. Therefore, since the opportunity to participate in the participatory type effect by the hold change effect is expanded, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the entertainment appeal.

[Example of hold advance notice effect using upper plate effect button and hold image]
In the embodiment related to the holding effect described so far, the peripheral control MPU which controls the effect control, the first holding number of the lottery result for the first special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, even if the upper limit is "4"). It has been described that the determination as to whether or not to carry out the holding effect is performed on the condition that the number has reached a smaller number, for example, "3" or "2"). In the holding effect of, the peripheral control MPU decides whether or not to perform the holding effect when the launched game ball wins the winning prize, and the held lottery result is pre-determined before the holding is exhausted. This is a preliminary announcement effect of changing the display color of the reserved image a predetermined number of times after determining and determining the display color (referred to as the final display color) of the reserved image finally displayed in the preliminarily determined reserved image.

In the pending notice production of this example, the time from when the operation for the upper plate production button 257 is valid to the time when it becomes invalid is appropriately set in advance, and while the operation is valid, the central liquid crystal display device 1500, various speakers, etc. By using the notification means of (3) to perform an effect (operation request effect) for requesting the player to operate the upper plate effect button 257, it is notified that the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is effective, Then, the player presses the upper plate effect button 257 in accordance with the operation request effect, thereby performing the hold advance notice effect of changing the display color of the hold image according to the degree of expectation for the big hit.

An example of the pending notice effect of this example will be described below. In addition, the pending image for which it is decided that the pending announcement effect will be referred to as “advance pending image” hereinafter. Also, in the pending announcement effect of this example, the display color of the pending image to be finally displayed (referred to as the final display color) is determined based on the timing of the start winning a prize. It is assumed that the final display color of has been determined to be “red”, which has a high expectation for the jackpot.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display color of the hold display, which is changed by the pressing operation on the upper plate effect button 257, is used to suggest the expectation degree to the jackpot to the player.
The display color of the notice pending image in this embodiment includes "blue", "yellow", "green", "orange", and "red", and [normal display color "blue"] is the highest expectation for the jackpot. A color with a low degree, [the final display color "red"] is set as the color with the highest expectation for the jackpot, and "blue"<"yellow"<"green"<"orange"<"red" It is structured with high expectations in order.
As the order of display color change of the reserved image, the player presses down the upper plate production button 257 in accordance with the operation request production in the state where [normal display color “blue”] is displayed. The display color changes to any one of "yellow", "green", and "orange", and after that, a specific trigger, for example, the hold display that the hold announcement effect is being executed is the display position of the first hold image. When it is shifted to, it changes to the final display color "red".
The flow of the pending notice effect will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 189.

FIG. 189 shows an example of the flow in the pending notice effect, and (A) shows a state in which the fact that the pending notice effect is to be performed is notified in the third hold image, and (B). Shows the state where the third hold image is shifted to the second hold position, (C) shows the state after the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is performed, and (D) shows The reserved image shifted to the second reserved position is further shifted to the first reserved position.

As shown in (A), when it is determined by the peripheral control MPU that the pending notice effect will be performed on the pending image displayed at the third pending position, by the time the current pattern change ends. , A message image “Attention to the third hold!” is displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and an arrow and a “collapse” are displayed near the hold image (notice hold image) displayed at the third hold position. "!" is displayed to notify and recognize to the player that the pending notice effect will be performed.

Next, as shown in (B), when the change of the hold image displayed in the first hold position in (A) is started and the notice hold image is shifted to the second hold position, the center is displayed. On the liquid crystal display device 1500, an image that prompts the user to operate the upper plate effect button 257, "If the button is pressed, does the held color change?!" is displayed (operation request effect). As a result, the player recognizes that the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is effective, and further, by pressing down the upper plate effect button 257, it reminds me that something will be gained. It has a configuration that can.

Then, by pressing the upper plate effect button 257 in response to the operation request effect, the display color of the notice pending image changes from “blue” to “green” as shown in (C-1). This allows the player to change the display color of the notice pending image by his/her own operation to remind the player that the expectation for the jackpot is increased, and the interest in the game can be increased. It is to be noted that the peripheral control MPU determines how many colors the reserved image of “blue” is changed to after the pressing of the upper plate effect button 257.

Further, in (B), the change mode of the notice pending image when the player does not operate the upper plate effect button 257, as shown in (C-2), is more than that when the operation is detected. It is designed to change to a display color of "yellow", which has low expectations for jackpots. As a result, compared to the case where the upper plate effect button 257 is operated, the display color is changed to a display color having a higher expectation than the normal display color “blue”, although the expectation related to the jackpot is displayed as being low. Therefore, you can have a sense of expectation for the jackpot. In addition, the player who notices that when the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed changes to a display color which is expected to have a higher expectation for the jackpot, the player has a merit to operate the upper plate effect button 257. Because of the feeling, it is possible to actively participate in the production, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Next, as shown in (D), when the notice pending image is displayed as the first pending memory, it is displayed after being changed to the final display color determined in advance, “red” in this example. .. The player who operated the upper plate production button 257 changes the display color of the notice pending image to “green”, which has a higher degree of expectation than “blue”, and further holds “red”, which has the highest degree of expectation. By seeing the display color changed in the image, it is possible to feel a higher sense of expectation and to increase the interest in the game. Even if the user touches the upper plate effect button 257 and hesitates, the display color of "yellow", which has a low expectation for the jackpot, is changed to the "red" reserved image, which has the highest expectation. Since there is a follow that the display color changes, it can be wiped out even if the expectation drops due to the display color being pressed down and the expectation is low, suppressing the decline in interest in the game can do.

Further, in the description of the above-described notice of pending notice, the operation requesting effect is triggered by the shift of the notice-holding image from the third holding position to the second holding position, and the display color of the notice-holding image is changed only once. Although the configuration has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, an operation request effect may be performed and the display color of the notice pending image may be changed each time the holding position of the notice pending image is shifted. For example, when the notice image is the notice image at the fourth hold position, the operation request effect is triggered by the shift to the third hold position, and the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed to make the notice. The display color of the held image changes from "blue" to "yellow". Next, when the notice pending image is shifted to the second reserve position, the operation request effect is performed, and by pressing the plate effect button 257, the display color of the notice pending image changes from “yellow” to “green”. Change. Then, when the notice holding image is shifted to the first holding position, the final display color is changed to “red”.

According to the above-described example, since the pending announcement effect is performed each time the display position of the specified announcement pending image is shifted, the display color of the pending image is changed a plurality of times for one announcement pending image. It is possible to Also, every time the player's operation pushes the upper plate effect button 257, the display color of the notice pending image becomes a display with high expectation for the jackpot, so by participating in the hold notice effect, the jackpot becomes closer and closer to the jackpot. Since it is possible to make the player think that he will go, the player will actively participate in the pending notice production, and can hope for the interest of the game to be improved.

[Second embodiment in pending notice effect using upper plate effect button and reserved image]
Further, the timing of the pending notice effect is not caused by the case where the display position of the notice pending image is shifted, but by the variation time set corresponding to the variation pattern output from the main control board to the peripheral control board, It may be possible to determine whether or not to perform the hold notice effect on the notice hold image.

For example, when the hold before the notice hold image is the change, when the change time is short (for example, less than 10 seconds), when the hold notice effect is performed, after the operation request effect is performed, the player Even if an attempt is made to press the upper plate production button 257, the fluctuation display of the fluctuation is immediately ended, so that the player cannot miss the upper plate production button 257 within the time and thinks that the player missed the chance. There is a risk that the interest in the content will be reduced. Further, since it is desired to press the upper plate production button 257 within the time, there is a possibility that the user may be distracted by the pending notice production and cannot fully enjoy the variation display of the variation. When the change time of the hold that is changed when the display position of the hold image is shifted is a predetermined change time (10 seconds or more in this example) or more, the hold advance notice effect is performed.

As in the above-described configuration, when the variation time related to the hold before the notice hold image is 10 seconds or more, the hold notice effect is performed, and after the operation request effect is performed, the player presses the upper plate effect button 257. Since it is possible to sufficiently secure the pressing time, it is possible to suppress the risk of pressing the upper plate production button 257 in an insufficient amount of time as much as possible, and display the fluctuations due to being too distracted by the pending notice production. You can prevent the situation that you can not enjoy.

[Third embodiment of pending notice effect using upper plate effect button and reserved image]
Further, it may be possible to determine whether or not to perform the pending notice effect on the notice pending image based on the variation pattern output from the main control substrate to the peripheral control substrate.

In the present embodiment, the pending announcement effect is performed when the pending variation mode in which the variation occurs when the display position of the announcement pending image is shifted is a variation involving reach.
If the fluctuation is a fluctuation display accompanied by reach, the player may think that a big hit may arrive, and expectations for the big hit related to the fluctuation increase. In that state, by further performing the hold notice effect on the notice hold image, it is possible to increase the expectation for the jackpot and enhance the interest in the game. Further, even if the result of the change is wrong, the notice pending image continues, so it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the final display color of the notice pending image is assumed to be determined to be “red” which has a high degree of expectation for the jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and “yellow”, “ The final color may be a color such as “green” or “orange” that is changed by pressing the plate effect button 257.

Furthermore, when performing a pending notice effect multiple times for one notice pending image, for example, when the display color of “green” is currently displayed as the notice pending image, the display color changes from “green” to “yellow”. It is supposed not to. Since the display color does not change to a display color having a lower degree of expectation than the currently displayed display color, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game related to the change in the display color.

Further, the display color having a higher degree of expectation than the final display color of the notice reservation image is not displayed as the display color caused by pressing the upper plate effect button 257. For example, when the final display color of the notice reservation image is set to “green”, when the upper plate button 257 is pressed in the hold notice production, “orange” or “red” having higher expectation than “green” is displayed. The display color is not displayed. As a result, when the notice pending image becomes the final display color, the display color having the expected degree higher than that of the currently displayed notice pending image is displayed as the final display color, so that the interest in the game can be improved. ..

Further, the peripheral control MPU determines the display color of the notice pending image relating to the notice notice effect. How many display colors will be changed from the standard display color "blue", and how many display colors will be finally displayed is determined as a scenario. The peripheral control MPU is determined as one scenario pattern.

FIG. 190(a) is a scenario pattern table showing a pattern in which the display color of a notice pending image changes.
The scenario determining random numbers in this example are set so as to determine which of the pending announcement effects patterns is to be executed. In this example, the scenario patterns 1 to 4 are included, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the scenario patterns may be appropriately prepared and provided.

When the pattern 1 is selected by the peripheral control MPU, the pending notice effect is produced when the display position of the notice pending image is shifted. The number of times of the pending notice effect caused by pressing the upper plate effect button 257 is once, and when the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed by the player, the display color changes to “green” and is not pressed. Display color changes to "yellow". Then, when the notice holding image is shifted to the first holding position, the final display color is changed to “red”.

When the pattern 2 is selected by the peripheral control MPU, the pending notice effect is performed when the display position of the notice pending image is shifted. The number of times of the pending notice effect caused by pressing the upper plate effect button 257 is two, and when the player presses the upper plate effect button 257 in the first pending notice effect, the display color is “green”. When the button is not pressed, the display color changes to “yellow”. Next, when the player presses the upper plate effect button 257 in the second pending notice effect, the display color changes to "orange", and when not pressed, the display color changes to "green". Then, when the notice holding image is shifted to the first holding position, the final display color is changed to “red”.

When the pattern 3 is selected by the peripheral control MPU, the pending notice effect is performed when the display position of the notice pending image is shifted. The number of times of the pending notice effect caused by pressing the upper plate effect button 257 is two, and when the player presses the upper plate effect button 257 in the first pending notice effect, the display color is “yellow”. When it is not pressed, the display color does not change, and it is displayed as "blue". Next, when the player presses the plate production button 257 in the second pending notice production, the display color changes to "green", and when it is not pushed, the display color does not change and remains "blue". Is displayed. Then, when the notice holding image is shifted to the first holding position, the final display color is changed to "orange".

When the pattern 4 is selected by the peripheral control MPU, the hold advance notice effect is performed when the change mode of the hold that is changed when the display position of the advance notice hold image is a change involving reach. The number of times of the pending notice effect caused by pressing the upper plate effect button 257 is once, and when the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed by the player, the display color changes to “green” and is not pressed. Display color changes to "yellow". Then, when the notice holding image is shifted to the first holding position, the final display color is changed to “red”.

The example of the scenario pattern selected by the peripheral control MPU has been described above. Further, in the peripheral control board, a random number for scenario pattern determination and a scenario pattern table are prepared in advance as means for determining a scenario pattern in the preliminary announcement pending image in the preliminary announcement production. Based on the scenario pattern table, the scenario relating to any of the pending announcement effects is determined.

As shown in FIG. 190(b), for example, 100 types of variable random numbers are set as the determination value (0 to 99) indicating that one of the scenario patterns is executed, and 25 types of variable random numbers out of the variable random numbers are set. , Which is set as a determination value indicating that the pending notice effect of pattern 1 is executed (0 to 24), and 20 types of variable random numbers are set as determination values indicating that pattern 2 is executed (25 to 44). 40 types of variable random numbers are set as the determination values indicating that the pattern 3 is executed (45 to 89). Ten types of variable random numbers are set as the determination values indicating that pattern 4 is to be executed (90 to 99).

According to the configuration of the present embodiment described above, the change pattern relating to the display color of the notice pending image is different depending on the scenario pattern relating to the hold notice effect determined by the peripheral control MPU, and even if the scenario pattern is the same. Since the change mode relating to the display color of the notice pending image is made different depending on whether or not the upper plate production button 257 is operated, it is possible to provide the player with various variations of the pending notice production. The change mode of the display color of the notice reservation image can make the player happy and unhappy, and the interest in the game can be improved.
Further, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, since the change pattern relating to the display color of the notice pending image is made different depending on the scenario pattern relating to the notice of pending notice decided by the peripheral control MPU, it is possible for various players. It is possible to provide various variations of the pending notice effect, and it is possible to make the player happy and grumpy by the change mode relating to the display color of the notice pending image.

In the hold notice effect described above, the display color of the notice hold image changes depending on whether or not the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed, but in addition to that, for example, the change may occur before the notice hold image. When the held image to be performed is variably displayed, if the variation mode is a variation mode with reach, the display color of the notice pending image is changed without the player's operation on the upper plate effect button 257 as a trigger. Alternatively, the holding color of the notice-holding image may be changed without giving any notice to the player.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment described above, the change pattern relating to the display color of the notice pending image is different depending on the scenario pattern relating to the hold notice effect determined by the peripheral control MPU, and even if the scenario pattern is the same. Since the change mode relating to the display color of the notice pending image is made different depending on whether the upper plate production button 257 is operated or not, it is possible to provide the player with various variations of the pending notice production. The change mode of the display color of the notice reservation image can make the player happy and unhappy, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Change timing of notice pending image in pending notice production]
In addition, in the present embodiment, a plurality of change timings related to the hold color of the notice hold image, which change after the operation of the upper plate effect button 257, is provided in the hold notice effect.

The timing pattern (hereinafter, referred to as a change timing pattern) for changing the display color of the notice-and-hold image in the hold-and-notice effect includes an immediate change pattern, a change pattern after 1 second, and a change pattern after 2 seconds, which will be described later. FIG. 200 is a time chart in the case where an immediate change pattern is selected from among the change timing patterns of the notice pending image in the hold notice effect, and FIG. 200 shows 1 second described later among the change timing patterns of the notice pending image in the hold notice effect. FIG. 201 is a time chart when the post-change pattern is selected, and FIG. 201 is a time chart when the 2-second post-change pattern is selected from the change timing patterns of the notice pending image in the pending notice effect. Also, FIG. 202 is a change timing table showing a change timing pattern of the notice pending image.

In the time chart of FIG. 199, respective timings of (A) operation valid period, (B) operation request effect, (C) upper plate effect button operation detection, and (D) immediate change pattern are shown, and FIG. 201 shows the respective timings of (A) operation valid period, (B) operation request effect, (C) upper plate effect button operation detection, and (E) change pattern after 1 second. In the time chart of (3), the respective timings of (A) operation valid period, (B) operation request effect, (C) upper plate effect button operation detection, and (F) change pattern after 2 seconds are shown.

In the case where the suspension notice effect is performed, as shown in (A), the time point when the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 becomes valid to the time point when the operation becomes invalid is appropriately set in advance, and as shown in (B) during that time. In addition, by using the notification means such as the central liquid crystal display device 1500 and various speakers, an effect (operation request effect) that requires the player to operate the upper plate effect button 257 is performed, and thus the upper plate effect button 257. It is configured to notify that the operation for is valid. Then, in response to the operation request effect, as shown in (C), the player presses the upper plate effect button 257 to change the display color of the notice pending image. After pressing the upper plate effect button 257, the operation valid period of (A) and the operation request effect of (B) are finished, and the display color of the notice reservation image changes, but the change timing is An immediate change pattern in which the display color of the notice pending image is instantly changed by pressing the upper plate effect button 257 as shown in (D), and the upper plate effect button 257 as shown in (E) is pressed to 1 Change pattern after 1 second in which the display color of the notice pending image changes after 2 seconds, change after 2 seconds in which the display color of the notice pending image changes after 2 seconds from pressing the upper plate effect button 257 as shown in (F) There are patterns etc.

When the immediate change pattern is selected, as shown in FIG. 199, when the operation valid period of (A) and the operation request effect of (B) are in the on state, the player changes the upper plate effect button 257. When the pressing operation is performed, the operation valid period and the operation request effect are turned off when the operation is detected, and then the display color of the notice reservation image changes.

Further, when the change pattern after 1 second is selected, as shown in FIG. 200, when the operation valid period of (A) and the operation request effect of (B) are in the on state, the upper plate is set by the player. When the effect button 257 is pressed, the operation valid period and the operation request effect are turned off when the operation is detected, and the notice pending image is displayed 1 second after the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 is detected. The color changes.

Further, when the change pattern after 2 seconds is selected, as shown in FIG. 201, when the operation valid period of (A) and the operation request effect of (B) are in the on state, the upper plate is set by the player. When the effect button 257 is pressed, the operation valid period and the operation request effect are turned off when the operation is detected, and the notice pending image is displayed 2 seconds after the operation of the plate effect button 257 is detected. The color changes.
As a result, the display color of the notice pending image changes after the plate effect button 257 is pressed, depending on which change pattern is selected, so the display color of the notice pending image changes at any timing. The excitement that can be gained by not knowing what to do increases, and it becomes possible to entertain various variations in the pending notice production.

Further, in the pending notice effect, even though the player is requested to operate the upper plate effect button 257 in the operation request effect, the operable period for accepting the pressing operation on the upper plate effect button 257 ends. If it is not pressed, or if the immediate change pattern is selected, the display color of the notice reservation image changes immediately after the operation valid period ends, and if the change pattern after 1 second is selected, If the display color of the notice pending image changes 1 second after the operation valid period ends, and the change pattern is selected after 2 seconds, the display color of the notice pending image changes 2 seconds after the operation valid period ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display color of the notice pending image may be changed at an appropriate timing after the operable period ends. As a result, even if the operation request effect is overlooked and the upper plate effect button 257 cannot be operated, the display color of the notice pending image changes, and thus the display color of the notice pending image has a low degree of expectation. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling the feeling that he/she was lost because the display color remains the same, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, in the peripheral control board, as a means for determining the timing at which the display color of the notice pending image changes in the hold notice effect, a change timing determination random number for determining the timing at which the display color of the notice pending image changes. , A change timing table is prepared in advance, and the change timing pattern of the display color of the notice pending image is determined based on the change timing determining random number and the change timing table. Then, the pending notice effect determined by the peripheral control MPU in response to the game ball entering the starting opening changes the display color of the notice pending image when the player operates the upper plate effect button 257. In this case, after the effect is determined, the change timing of the notice pending image is determined from the change timing determination random number extracted by the change timing determination random number extraction means and the change timing table. ..

Next, the change timing determining random number will be described with reference to FIG. The change timing determination random number in this example is set so as to determine which display timing change timing pattern of the notice pending image is to be executed. For example, 100 types of variable random numbers are set as the determination value (0 to 99) indicating that one of the change timing patterns of the notice pending image is to be executed, and 50 types of variable random numbers among the variable random numbers are displayed on the plate. After the pressing operation on the button 257, it is set as a determination value indicating that the immediate change pattern in which the display color of the notice pending image changes at an immediate timing is executed (0 to 49), and 30 kinds of variable random numbers are used as the plate effect button. After the pressing operation on 257, it is set as a judgment value indicating that a change pattern of 1 second after that the display color of the notice pending image is changed at a timing of 1 second later is set (50 to 79), and 20 kinds of variable random numbers are set. After the pressing operation on the upper plate effect button 257, it is set as a determination value indicating that the change pattern after 2 seconds in which the display color of the notice pending image changes at the timing 2 seconds later is executed (80 to 99).

Further, in the hold notice production, as a trigger for determining the timing at which the display color of the notice reserve image changes after the user presses the upper plate effect button 257, the display position of the notice reserve image is, for example, the fourth hold. When shifting from the position to the third holding position, the change timing determining random number extracting means may extract the change timing determining random number to determine the timing at which the display color of the notice pending image changes. When the change mode of the hold, which is changed when the display position of the advance notice hold image is shifted, is a change with a reach, the change timing determination random number extraction means is triggered by the change with the reach being performed. A random number for determining the change timing may be extracted to determine the timing at which the display color of the advance notice reserved image changes, and various triggers can be selected.

Further, during the game, the change timing pattern of the display color of the notice pending image in the last notice notice effect is the immediate change pattern, and the change timing pattern of the notice pending image selected next is also the immediate change pattern. If so, the player cannot notice that there are a plurality of types of change timing patterns for the notice pending image, and the change pattern of the notice pending image after pressing the upper plate production button 257 changes immediately. Since there is a risk that it will only make the user think that it is only a pattern and reduce the interest in the game, in this example, a timing pattern different from the change timing pattern of the notice pending image performed last is selected. Has become.

Further, for example, when the immediate change pattern is selected as the change timing pattern of the last notice pending image, the change timing pattern selected next is either the change pattern after 1 second or the change pattern after 2 seconds. Is selected, and if the change pattern after 1 second is selected, either the immediate change pattern or the change pattern after 2 seconds is selected as the change timing pattern to be selected next. If the change pattern after 2 seconds has been selected, the immediate change pattern or the change pattern after 1 second is selected as the change timing pattern to be selected next. As a result, since a change timing pattern different from the last selected change timing pattern is selected, it is possible to prevent the same change timing pattern from being continuously selected, and suppress a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Next, the flow of the pending notice effect in this example will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 203 shows an example of the flow of the pending notice effect, and this example shows a series of pending notice effects comparing the case where the change effect after 1 second is selected and the case where the immediate change effect is selected. It is a figure which shows the flow of. (A) shows a state of notifying that the pending notice effect will be performed in the third hold image, and (B) shows the notice pending image when the third upper plate effect button 257 is operated. The color change is suggested and the operation request effect is displayed. (C-1) shows that the operation on the plate effect button 257 is performed when the immediate change pattern is selected. The state immediately after is shown, (C-2) has shown the state immediately after the operation with respect to the plate production button 257 is performed when the change pattern after 1 second is selected, and (D), In (C-2), it shows a state after 1 second has elapsed since the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 was performed.

As shown in (A), when it is decided by the peripheral control MPU that the hold advance notice effect is to be performed on the hold image displayed at the third hold position, the central liquid crystal display device 1500 displays “3rd hold position”. In addition to displaying the message image "Attention!", an image with an arrow and "This!" is displayed in the vicinity of the hold image (preliminary hold image) displayed at the third hold position. The player is informed and made aware that the pending notice effect will be performed.

Next, as shown in (B), the central liquid crystal display device 1500 displays an image of “When the button is pressed, the held color changes?!” and an image simulating the plate effect button 257, and the plate effect button is displayed. An image prompting an operation on 257 is displayed (operation request effect). As a result, the player recognizes that the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is effective, and by further pressing the upper plate effect button 257, the display color of the notice pending image changes, and something can be gained. It can remind you that you might get up.

Then, for example, when the immediate change pattern is selected by the peripheral control MPU, as shown in (C-1), immediately after the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed in response to the operation request effect, a notice is given. In this example, the display color of the hold image is changed to “green” and displayed. In addition, when the display pattern after 1 second is selected by the peripheral control MPU, as shown in (C-2), even if the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed in response to the operation request effect, the notice advance reservation image is displayed. The display color of is not changed and is displayed as "blue".

After 1 second has elapsed after pressing the upper plate effect button 257 after (C-2), the display is changed to "green" as shown in (D).

In this way, when the immediate change pattern is selected, the notice pending image changes immediately after the operation for the plate effect button 257 is performed, and when the change pattern after 1 second is selected, the plate effect button 257 is selected. By providing a plurality of change timing patterns that the display color of the notice pending image does not change to "blue" immediately after performing the operation for, and the notice pending image changes after 1 second e.g. If is selected, it is possible to immediately know the result of the change in the notice pending image after pressing the upper plate effect button 257, and the change pattern after 1 second or the change pattern after 2 seconds is selected. If it is, you will think that the display color of the notice pending image does not change at least once, but since the display color of the notice pending image changes due to time difference, it makes you excited about the pending notice effect. It is possible to improve the interest in the game.
It is to be noted that the peripheral control MPU determines how many colors the “blue” reserved image changes to after the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed.

[Variation 1 of notice of pending notice]
In the pending announcement effect in this embodiment, the lottery ratio of the change timing pattern of the announcement pending image is changed according to the number of rounds when the advantageous game state (for example, big hit) is drawn by the main control board. It will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 204 is a change timing table showing a change timing pattern of the notice pending image for each round when the jackpot is selected by lottery. (A) is a change timing table selected when a 15-round jackpot is drawn, (b) is a change timing table selected when an 8-round jackpot is drawn, and (c) is 2 It is a change timing table selected when a round jackpot is drawn.

When the 15 round big hit is selected by the main control board, as shown in FIG. 204(a), 80 kinds of fluctuation random numbers among the fluctuation random numbers are held with advance notice immediately after the pressing operation on the plate effect button 257. It is set as a judgment value indicating that an immediate change pattern in which the display color of the image is changed is executed (0 to 79), and 10 kinds of fluctuation random numbers are timing 1 second after the pressing operation on the plate effect button 257. Is set as a determination value indicating that a change pattern after 1 second in which the display color of the notice pending image is changed is executed (80 to 89), and 10 types of random numbers are changed after the pressing operation on the upper plate effect button 257, It is set as a determination value indicating that a change pattern after 2 seconds in which the display color of the notice pending image is changed at a timing after 2 seconds is executed (90 to 99).

When the eight-round jackpot is selected by the main control board, as shown in FIG. 204(b), 10 kinds of fluctuation random numbers out of fluctuation random numbers are put on advance notice immediately after pressing the upper plate effect button 257. It is set as a judgment value indicating that an immediate change pattern in which the display color of the image is changed is executed (0 to 9), and 80 kinds of fluctuation random numbers are the timing 1 second after the pressing operation on the plate effect button 257. Is set as a determination value indicating that a change pattern after 1 second in which the display color of the notice pending image is changed is executed (10 to 89), and 10 kinds of fluctuation random numbers are set after the pressing operation on the plate effect button 257, It is set as a determination value indicating that a change pattern after 2 seconds in which the display color of the notice pending image is changed at a timing after 2 seconds is executed (90 to 99).

When the two-round jackpot is selected by the main control board, as shown in FIG. 204(c), 10 types of fluctuation random numbers are changed immediately after the operation of pressing the upper plate production button 257. It is set as a determination value indicating that an immediate change pattern in which the display color of the image is changed is executed (0 to 9), and 10 kinds of fluctuation random numbers are timing 1 second after the operation of pressing the upper plate effect button 257. Is set as a determination value indicating that a change pattern after 1 second in which the display color of the advance notice pending image is changed is executed (10 to 19), and 80 types of random numbers are changed after the pressing operation on the upper plate effect button 257, It is set as a determination value indicating that a change pattern after 2 seconds in which the display color of the notice-reserved image is changed at a timing after 2 seconds is executed (20 to 99).

According to the configuration of the present embodiment described above, the number of rounds related to the jackpot can be predicted to some extent based on the notice pending image change timing pattern after pressing the upper plate effect button 257. For example, when the display color of the notice pending image changes immediately after pressing the upper plate effect button 257, the player remembers that the 15 round jackpot will come with a high probability, and also presses the upper plate effect button 257. If the display color of the notice pending image changes after 2 seconds, the player remembers that the two-round jackpot will come with a high probability. As a result, it is possible to make the player happy and anxious by the change timing pattern of the notice pending image, and to improve the interest in the game.

[Other variations of notice production]
The notice effect described above changes the display color of the notice pending image triggered by the operation on the upper plate effect button 257, and further prepares a plurality of timings at which the display color of the notice pending image changes to prepare various variations. However, the notice effect in the present example does not use the hold image, but in a state where there are a plurality of hold states, for example, a change that is currently being performed (hereinafter, referred to as the change). When the player operates the upper plate effect button 257 and the player operates the upper plate effect button 257, the change (preliminary target change) of the digestion performed after the change is performed. This is to perform a preliminary announcement change effect that can bring about a change in the effect mode. The flow of a series of effects will be described below with reference to FIG. 205.

FIG. 205 shows a series of flows in the preview variation effect in this example. (A) shows a state in which a change effect of a change that is digested before the advance notice change is being performed, (B) shows a state in which an operation request effect is being performed, and (C-1). (B) shows a state after the upper plate effect button 257 is not operated when the operation request effect is performed, and (C-2) is when the operation request effect is performed in (B). The state after performing the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is shown, (D-1) shows the state in which the fluctuation of the fluctuation has ended after (C-1), and (D-2). ) Indicates a state in which the fluctuation of the fluctuation is finished after (C-2), and (E-1) indicates a performance mode of the notice fluctuation performance performed after (D-1). (E-2) shows a state in which the notice variation effect is started after (D-2), and (F) shows an effect mode of the notice variation effect performed after (E-2). Is.

For example, when the fluctuation held in the first holding position is the notification target fluctuation, as shown in (A), when the pre-notification fluctuation is being performed, the player is notified to the player as shown in (B). By performing an effect (operation request effect) requesting an operation on the upper plate effect button 257, it is notified that the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is effective. At that time, if the player does not press the upper plate effect button 257 in accordance with the operation request effect, the process branches to (C-1). As shown in (C-1), since the player does not press down the upper plate effect button 257 in (B), effects other than variable display of the symbols are not performed, and the process proceeds to (D-1). .. Then, as shown in (D-1), the fluctuation ends. As shown in (E-1) after that, the presentation mode of the notice variation effect is the same as the previously performed variation effect mode.
On the contrary, when the player presses down the upper plate effect button 257 in (B), an image simulating the ladybird appears on the central liquid crystal display device as shown in (C-2), and the image is displayed vertically and horizontally. The effect of flying around inexhaustibly is performed, and the process moves to (D-2). Then, as shown in (D-2), the fluctuation ends. After that, as shown in (E-2), an image simulating the ladybird is displayed again based on the start of the change of the advance notice subject change, and then, as shown in (F), the form of the advance notice change effect. However, unlike the variation effect mode performed before, the variation symbol display mode is changed and displayed. As a result, the player can be reminded that something may happen when the user presses the upper plate effect button 257, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, the effect mode displayed in (F), which is different from the change effect mode performed before the notification target fluctuation, is whether the lottery result of the notification target fluctuation is in the specific game state by the main control MPU. It is assumed that the mode of the variable symbol is changed after it is determined in advance.

For example, after the player operates the upper plate effect button 257 at the time of (B) and the effect using the image simulating the ladybird is performed at the next point (C-2), (D-2). If the lottery result of the change is out of order, the player is discouraged and has an expectation for the change subject to be announced next. Then, in (E-2), an effect using an image simulating the ladybird is performed again, and in (F), the aspect of the notice variation effect is different from that in the past (in this example, the appearance of the variable symbol is different). Therefore, the player may have missed the lottery result of the previous change, and the expectation for the change subject to the advance notice is strongly increased. At this time, if the lottery result of the advance notice change is, for example, a miss, it will further discourage the player, and the interest in the game will be greatly reduced due to the increased expectations. When the lottery result of the production is a big hit, by changing the mode of the notice change production, although it is disappointing at the time of (D-2), when the result of the change of the notice subject is witnessed, it is discouraged. As a result, the joy of a big hit increases, and the interest in playing games can be greatly improved.

As described above, according to the present example, in the effect in the variation, the effect game in which the operation for the upper plate effect button 257 is performed is performed, and when the operation for the upper plate effect button 257 is performed by the player, the notice target is given. When the fluctuation becomes the fluctuation, the effect mode changes, so that it is possible to entertain the various variations of the notice fluctuation effect and to increase the interest in the game.

Further, in the operation request effect displayed in (B) of FIG. 205, when the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed, even if the result of the variation is out, the out symbol display is displayed. On the basis of the fact, the variation mode of the notice variation production changes at the stage of (F), so that it is possible to newly hold hope for the jackpot and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, by displaying the image simulating the ladybird displayed in (C-2) again in (E-2), by operating the upper plate effect button 257 in the stage of (F), It is possible to make the player notice that the display mode of the notice change effect has been changed by the operation, and it is possible to remind that the operation with the upper plate effect button 257 has attracted the effect with high reliability for the jackpot. The interest in is improved.

In addition, in the present example, the description has been made assuming that the presentation mode of the notice change effect in the notice subject change is changed without using the hold image, but the display color of the notice image of the notice subject change performed after the change is changed. It may be configured.
As a result, even if the result of the change is out of order, if there is a change with a high degree of expectation for holding, if the upper plate production button 257 is pressed at the stage of (B), the change will occur. In accordance with the stop of the symbol fluctuation, the display color of the pending image of the fluctuation with high expectation is changed. As a result, although the result of the change is discouraged, it is possible to make a new expectation for the change subject to the advance notice, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.
In addition, when the upper plate effect button 257 is not pressed at the stage of (B), the display color of the notice image of the variation subject to advance notice does not change. Even if there is, there is no change in the reserved color, so the player does not notice that the highly anticipated change is pending.

Further, when the result of the fluctuation is a big hit, if the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed in the stage of (B), it is highly expected in accordance with the fact that the symbol fluctuation of the fluctuation is stopped. Change the display color of the fluctuation pending image. As a result, in addition to the joy that the fluctuation has been a big hit, it is possible to further expect the fluctuation to be foretold, so that it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.
In addition, when the upper plate effect button 257 is not pressed at the stage of (B), the display color of the notice image of the variation subject to advance notice does not change. Even if there is, there is no change in the reserved color, so the player does not notice that the highly anticipated change is pending.

As a result, the player can feel an increase in the degree of expectation for the jackpot game by performing a pressing operation on the upper plate effect button 257, and also can know the degree of expectation of the fluctuation in the pending storage. , Especially if the lottery result of the fluctuation is out of place, if there is a hold with a high degree of expectation in the hold, even if you are discouraged because the lottery result of the fluctuation falls out, you can expect further fluctuations. Since this can be done, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

Further, in the notice variation effect in this example, the display mode of the variation pattern is changed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the background image of the notice variation effect is changed, or the contents of the effect game are changed. It is possible to select various effect modes, for example, by changing or changing to a so-called prefetch zone.

Further, in this example, the previous change of the noticed change is described as the change before notice, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the change two or three before the noticeable change is noticed. It may be a pre-variation and can be appropriately selected.

In the present embodiment, during the period from the start of the special lottery by the receipt of the game balls to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 to the suggestion of the special lottery result selected by the lottery, the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2002 (2) When the game ball is accepted in the starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. It The number of reserved special lottery results to be reserved is up to four for the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and for more than that, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening are held. Even if a game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the central liquid crystal display device 1500. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board to suggest the special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) is to turn on and off a plurality of LEDs repeatedly for a predetermined time, and then turn them on. A special lottery result is suggested by the combination of the LEDs.

On the other hand, in the central liquid crystal display device 1500, based on the control signal from the main control board, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board to suggest the special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is variably displayed by varying each symbol row in a state where three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of decorative symbols are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Each symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the decorative symbols of the three symbol rows that are stopped and displayed become a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. If the result of the special lottery is other than “miss”, after the three symbol rows are stopped and each decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a confirmation image indicating the result of the special lottery is displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and the lottery is performed. An advantageous game state (for example, a small-hit game, a big-hit game, etc.) corresponding to the selected special lottery result occurs.

It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (the blinking time of the LED (variation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 (the symbol row fluctuates and the final image is confirmed). (Time until is displayed) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a shorter time.

Further, on the peripheral control board, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the front movable production unit 2560 and the front movable production are performed according to the special lottery result selected by the lottery. A unit 2570, a back upper movable effect unit 3100, a back lower front movable effect unit 3200, a back right movable effect unit 3300, a back left movable effect unit 3400, a back lower movable effect unit 3500, a back four corner movable effect unit 3600, and the like. The movable effect is appropriately used to make the player entertainable by the movable effect, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball can be received in the upper special winning opening 2006, the back right rotating decorative body 3310 of the back right movable effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 is rotated. When the third decorative surface 3310c is directed forward (front), the rear outlet 2554 of the rear guideway 2553 through which the game balls received in the upper special winning opening 2006 circulate coincides with the back right ball inlet 3320. (See FIG. 175). In this state, when the game ball is received in the upper special winning opening 2006, it enters the rear right ball entrance 3320 from the rear outlet 2554 of the rear guideway 2553, and the ball guide member arranged in the rear right effect space 3321. By 3322, it flows down while rotating in a spiral multiple times (here, eight times) around an axis extending vertically in the back right effect space 3321 (see FIG. 175(a)).

As a result, the game ball received in the upper prize hole 2006 can be made to flow in a spiral shape in the back right effect space 3321, so that the player can visually recognize the game ball accepted in the upper prize hole 2006. It is possible to increase the expectation for paying out the game balls by receiving the game balls to the upper prize hole 2006, and to entertain the player with the game balls that flow in a spiral shape. Can be suppressed. Further, since the ball guiding member 3322 is disposed adjacent to the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the game ball flows down the ball guiding member 3322 to the player who is paying attention to the effect image displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. You can easily recognize what you are doing. Although the sphere guiding member 3322 is arranged so as to be adjacent to the central liquid crystal display device 1500 in this example, the sphere guiding member 3322 is arranged so that a part or all of the sphere guiding member 3322 is arranged so as to overlap with the central liquid crystal display device 1500. You may make it easy to recognize that the game ball is flowing down the guide member 3322. Further, in this case, it is possible to prevent the visual effect image displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 from being obstructed by forming the ball guiding member 3322 with a transparent member whose back portion is visible.

In addition, when the upper right winning opening 2006 is in the open state, in the case of the back-right rotating decorative body 3310 except for the third decorative surface 3310c, the rear outlet 2554 of the rear guideway 2553 has the first decorative surface 3310a. And because it is closed by the outer peripheral surface of the second decorative surface 3310b, the game ball received in the upper special winning opening 2006 enters the escape passage 2555 branching near the rear end of the rear guideway 2553 and escapes. It is discharged downward through the passage 2555. Thereby, when the upper special winning opening 2006 can be accepted, an effect using the back right effect space 3321 of the back right movable effect unit 3300 or an effect not using the back right effect space 3321 is performed. It is possible to present various variations to the player for entertaining. Further, for some reason, even if the back-right rotating decorative body 3310 cannot direct the third decorative surface 3310c to the front, the game ball received in the upper special winning opening 2006 is stuck in the rear guideway 2553. Therefore, the game can be continued without any problem.

[10. Fast digestion of jackpot games]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a predetermined number of rounds of the big hit game can be completed in a shorter time than a conventional game machine in which a big winning hole is arranged near the lower end of the game area 5a. The details will be described below.

As described above, the ball launching device 680 hits the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a with a driving strength equal to or higher than a predetermined driving strength, whereby the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500 is hit. The game ball that has entered on the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface comes into contact with the stopper 1006 to weaken its momentum, and then enters the upper game space 2541 from the upper right entrance.

Further, as shown in FIG. 176, the upper right entrance extends vertically with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball that is abutted against the stop 1006 and weakened in its force rolls by the upper right entrance. The moving direction is restricted and it will fall right below.

Then, in a state where the upper special winning opening 2006 is opened, the upper end of the upper special winning opening door member 2550 is made higher than the lower end, so that the game ball abutting on the upper special winning opening door member 2550 is raised with an extremely high probability. Not only is it received in the special winning opening 2006, but the upper special winning opening door member 2550 is rotated so that the upper end of the upper special winning opening door member 2550 is located to the right in front view rather than the upper right entrance.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since no obstacle nail is planted in the upper game space 2541, the game ball falling from the upper right entrance abuts the upper special winning opening door member 2550 with an extremely high probability. Therefore, a game ball that has entered the right side of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500 and is falling from the upper right entrance with the upper special winning opening 2006 open is extremely There is a high probability that the prize will be accepted in the upper prize hole 2006.

In this way, since the upper prize hole 2006 is arranged near the upper right end of the game area 5a, it is driven into the game area 5a more than a conventional gaming machine in which the big prize hole is arranged near the lower end of the game area 5a. The movement distance until the game ball is received in the upper prize hole 2006 is shortened, and the game ball that has entered the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500 is extremely short. Since there is a high probability that the game ball will be accepted into the upper prize hole 2006, it is possible to shorten the period from when the ball launch device 680 hits the game ball in the game area 5a to when the game ball is accepted into the upper prize hole 2006. This makes it possible to complete a predetermined number of rounds of the big hit game in a shorter time than a conventional gaming machine having a big winning opening near the lower end of the game area 5a.

In addition, the game ball hit by the ball launching device 680 with a driving strength equal to or higher than a predetermined driving strength by arranging the upper prize hole 2006 near the upper right end portion of the game area 5a is hit by the hitting portion 1006. Since it is configured to be able to roll along the inner side of the outer rail 1001 and enter the upper special winning opening 2006 without coming into contact with an obstacle such as an obstacle nail until it comes into contact, the game ball that is hit is always It becomes possible to roll at a certain speed or more, and at least the period from when the ball launching device 680 hits the game ball in the game area 5a to when the game ball abuts the stop portion 1006 can be shortened. That is, the ball launching device 680 has a game area as compared with a case where the game ball is hit with a hitting strength less than a predetermined hitting strength so as to be able to enter the upper special winning opening 2006. It is possible to shorten the period from when the game ball is hit in 5a to when the game ball is received in the upper special winning opening 2006.

In other words, the upper special winning opening 2006 is arranged near the upper left end of the game area 5a, and when the game ball is hit by the ball launching device 680 with a driving strength less than a predetermined driving strength, the game ball is Compared with the case of being configured to be able to enter the upper special winning opening 2006, the upper special winning opening 2006 is arranged in the vicinity of the upper right end of the game area 5a and has a predetermined driving force or more by the ball launching device 680. When the game ball is driven with the driving strength of, the game ball can be entered into the upper prize hole 2006, so that the rolling speed of the game ball becomes faster, and thus the ball launching device 680. It is possible to shorten the period from when the player hits the game ball in the game area 5a to when the player hits the game ball in the upper prize hole 2006, so that a predetermined number of rounds of the jackpot game can be digested in a short time. ..

Since the ball launching device 680 is designed to hit one game ball about every 0.6 seconds, for example, the time required to hit 10 game balls is 6 seconds. Further, as described above, the game ball hit by the ball launching device 680 with a driving strength equal to or higher than a predetermined driving strength contacts an obstacle such as an obstacle nail until it contacts the hitting portion 1006. Since it rolls along the inner side of the outer rail 1001, the game ball is driven by the ball launching device 680 with a driving strength higher than a predetermined driving strength and enters the game area 5a, and then the first prize is given. It takes only a very short time (about 1 second) to be accepted by the mouth 2006.

That is, the period from the opening of the upper prize opening door member 2550 in one round in the big hit game to the receipt of 10 game balls in the upper prize opening 2006 is about half that of the conventional game machine. The period is about 7 to 8 seconds, and the interval period between rounds (the period from closing the special winning opening 2006 to opening it again) is shorter than that of the conventional gaming machine (about 2.0 seconds). Since it is about 0.6 seconds, if it is a big hit game of 15 rounds, it will be completed in about 113.4 seconds to 128.4 seconds.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since the period required for a big hit game can be shortened as compared with the conventional game machine, it is executed per unit time on the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device. The number of executions (variation display count) of the variable display of possible symbols (first special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display, second special symbol that is variably displayed on the second special symbol display) The number of games can be increased more than that of a gaming machine, and the chances of a big hit increasing can be prevented from deteriorating the appeal of the game. In addition, since the execution period of the big hit game executed by the conventional gaming machine can be shortened to about half, the big hit game itself can be made interesting, and the deterioration of the enjoyment of the game can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the game ball received in the upper special winning opening 2006 enters the back right ball entrance 3320 from the rear outlet 2554 of the rear guideway 2553, and the back right effect space By the ball guiding member 3322 arranged in 3321, it flows down while rotating in the back right effect space 3321 spirally a plurality of times (here, eight times) around an axis extending vertically (see FIG. 175(a)). ). The game sphere flowing down the ball guide member 3322 is fragmentally visible to the player as shown in FIG. 175(a). It takes about 2 seconds until the game ball flowing down the ball guiding member 3322 is discharged from the discharge port 3303a of the lower back right base 3303 and becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize. As described above, the period from when the game ball is driven by the ball launching device 680 with a driving strength equal to or higher than the predetermined driving strength and enters the game area 5a until it is received in the upper prize hole 2006 is 1 Since it is about a second, the period from the hitting of the game ball by the ball launching device 680 to the acceptance of the upper prize hole 2006 from the time when the game ball is accepted by the upper prize hole 2006 to the lower back right base 3303 Is shorter than the period until it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it after being discharged from the discharge port 3303a.

In this way, not only the rolling of the game ball in the game area 5a that the player pays attention to, but also the gaming ball received in the upper special winning opening 2006, which normally does not pay attention, is complicatedly rolled and discharged. It is possible to draw attention to the player by prolonging the period until the game is started, and by effectively using the game ball that has become a so-called dead ball by being accepted in the upper prize hole 2006, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the entertainment level. be able to. In addition, since the period from the hitting of the game ball by the ball launching device 680 to the acceptance of the upper prize hole 2006 is short, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the hit game ball, and the hitting of the game ball is smooth. Although it may be uncertain whether or not it is being done, by striking the game balls accepted in the upper prize hole 2006 intricately and prolonging the period until they are discharged, the game balls can be driven smoothly. It is possible to reassure the player by letting him know that he is being abused. In addition, the period from when the game ball is hit by the ball launching device 680 until it is received in the upper prize hole 2006, after the game ball is received in the upper prize hole 2006, the outlet 3303a of the back lower right base 3303a It is possible to direct the player's attention to the game ball received in the upper special winning opening 2006 by making the time shorter than the period from the time when it is discharged from the player until it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize it.

[11. Characteristic effect of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball is hit in the game area 5a to change the game state, the back drive motor of the back movable production unit 3100 according to the changed game state. 3103 rotates. When the back drive motor 3103 rotates, the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 attached to the unit base 3101 rotate together with the back drive motor 3103. When the first transmission member 3107 rotates and enters the first specific rotation range from one end of the first specific rotation range, the rotation of the first transmission member 3107 is transmitted to the first transmitted member 3117. The first transmitted member 3117 rotates. When this first transmitted member 3117 is rotated, the first movable base 3116 is opposite to the tip end opposite to the base end which is one of both ends of the first movable range extending in the direction parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. That is, it slides from the retracted position at the upper end toward the first appearance position below. Since the back decorative body 3152 is attached to the first movable base 3116 via the second movable base 3119, the back decorative body 3152 may move downward as the first movable base 3116 slides. Becomes After that, the first transmission member 3107 rotates and reaches the range end on the opposite side of the first specific rotation range, and at the same time, the first movable base 3116 reaches the tip on the opposite side of the first movable range, that is, the descending end. Then, when the first transmission member 3107 further moves out of the first specific rotation range, the first movable base 3116 is stopped moving at the lower end. Although the second transmission member 3108 is rotating even while the first transmission member 3107 is rotating, the second transmission member 3108 is not within the second specific rotation range, so the second transmission member 3108 is not. Therefore, the second movable base 3119 cannot be slid relative to the first movable base 3116.

A second movable base drive member 3124, to which the rotation from the second transmission member 3108 is transmitted, is rotatably attached to the first movable base 3116. Since the second movable base drive member 3124 is slidably attached to the rotation link member 3123 in the extending direction (second direction) of the second transmission guide portion 3123d, when the first movable base 3116 slides, The rotation link member 3123 and the second movable base drive member 3124 rotate respectively so that the second direction becomes parallel to the moving direction of the first movable base 3116, and the second movable base drive member 3124 moves to the rotation link member 3123. On the other hand, it slides relatively in the second direction. At this time, when the second movable base drive member 3124 rotates, the second movable base 3119 slides with respect to the first movable base 3116 by the amount of rotation of the second movable base drive member 3124, and the back decorative body 3152 is removed. The second movable base 3119 is slightly moved in the moving direction, but when the second direction is parallel to the moving direction of the first movable base 3116, the rotation of the second movable base drive member 3124 is stopped and the first movable base 3116 is stopped. The movement of the back decoration 3152 with respect to the movable base 3116 is also stopped. Since the moving direction of the second movable base 3119 is the same vertical direction as the moving direction of the first movable base 3116, even if the second movable base 3119 slightly slides due to the rotation of the second movable base driving member 3124, Without being noticed by the player, the upper back decorative body 3152 can be moved in a comfortable manner. In the first state, when the second direction is parallel to the moving direction of the first movable base 3116, the rotation link member 3123 and the second movable base drive member 3124 do not rotate and the second movable base 3116 does not rotate. 3119 does not slide relatively.

Subsequently, the rotation of the back drive motor 3103 causes the first transmission member 3107 to move away from the first specific rotation range, and the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 are further rotated to cause the second transmission member 3108 to move. When the second specific rotation range is entered from one end of the second specific rotation range, the rotation of the second transmission member 3108 is transmitted to the second transmitted member 3122, and the second transmitted member 3122 starts rotating. To do. When the second transmitted member 3122 rotates, the rotation link member 3123 moves the second transmitted member 3122 via the portion slidably attached in the extending direction (first direction) of the first transmission guide portion 3122e. Will be revolved around. When the rotary link member 3123 revolves, the extending direction of the second direction tends to rotate. Then, when the direction in the second direction (the rotation link member 3123) is about to rotate, the reaction force from the portion where the second movable base drive member 3124 is slidably attached in the second direction becomes small, so that the rotation link The second movable base drive member 3124 is rotated while the member 3123 slides along the first direction and the second direction, respectively, and the rotation from the second transmission member 3108 is changed to the second transmitted member 3122 and the rotation link. It can be transmitted to the second movable base drive member 3124 via the member 3123.

By transmitting the rotation to the second movable base driving member 3124, the second movable base 3119 is moved from the base end (upper end) which is one of both ends of the second movable range to the first movable base 3116. It slides in the same downward direction as the moving direction of the first base 3116 toward the opposite tip (lower end) side. As a result, the back decorative body 3152 attached to the second movable base 3119 also moves downward together with the second movable base 3119. After that, the second transmission member 3108 rotates to reach the range end on the opposite side of the second specific rotation range, and at the same time, the second movable base 3119 moves to the tip (second appearance position) on the opposite side of the second movable range. When the second transmission member 3108 reaches and further moves away from the second specific rotation range, the second movable base 3119 is stopped moving at the tip of the second movable range.

When the second movable base 3119 slides with respect to the first movable base 3116, the ornament rotating gear 3120 rotatably attached to the second movable base 3119 is attached to the first movable base 3116. The member 3115 moves while rotating along the rack gear 3115a. Since the back decoration 3152 is attached to the decoration rotating gear 3120, when the second movable base 3119 is slid, the back decoration 3152 moves downward together with the second movable base 3119 while rotating. Becomes

In this state, by rotating the back drive motor 3103 in the reverse direction, the second moveable base 3119 and the first moveable base 3116, that is, the back decorative body 3152 are moved to the initial state. Can be returned to.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the first movable base 3116 and the second movable base 3119 can be separately moved, and thus the back upper decorative body 3152 can be moved in two steps. Therefore, the back decoration 3152 can be made to perform complicated movements. Further, as the movable effect of the back decorative body 3152, by moving only the first movable base 3116, or by moving the second movable base 3119 after moving the first movable base 3116, various movable effect patterns can be obtained. Since it can be realized, the movable effect of the back decorative body 3152 can be prevented from getting tired, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, when the second movable base 3119 is slid, the back decorative body 3152 rotates and moves downward together with the second movable base 3119. Therefore, more versatile movement can be given to the back decorative body 3152. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, the first movable base 3116 and the second movable base 3119 are slid in the same vertical direction, and the back decorative body 3152 can be moved in the same direction by a longer distance. It is possible to increase the impact of the movable effect by 3152, entertain the player, and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, the rotation from the first transmission member 3107 is first transmitted to the first transmitted member 3117, and then the first movable base 3116 is moved by the first transmitted member 3117. It becomes possible to amplify the perimeter of the first specific rotation range of the member 3107 by the first transmitted member 3117, and to increase the first movable range of the first movable base 3116 from the retracted position to the first appearance position. The back-side decorative body 3152 that moves greatly can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, since the back side decorative body 3152 can be caused to perform complicated movements with only one back side driving motor 3103, for example, another drive motor for moving the second movable base 3119 to the first movable base 3116 should be provided. The number of drive motors can be reduced and the load related to the control of the movable effect can be reduced as compared with the case where the first movable base 3116 is not required to be provided with a drive motor. The load (weight) acting on the one movable base 3116 can be reduced. Further, since it is not necessary to provide the first movable base 3116 with the drive motor for the second movable base 3119, it is possible to make the back decorative body 3152 larger (heavier) by the weight of the drive motor. Since the back decoration 3152 makes complicated movements, the impact on the player can be increased, and the large back decoration 3152 makes two-stage complicated movements, which causes something to the player. It is possible to think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

[Movement timing of movable parts]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to perform an effect in which various decorative objects that are movably controlled by the peripheral control MPU (hereinafter referred to as movable accessory) are movably controlled due to the operation on the upper plate effect button 257. It is like this. Hereinafter, a detailed description will be given with reference to FIGS.

When the player operates the handle unit 500, the game ball is driven into the game area 5a, and the game ball flowing down the game area 5a enters the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. In the control board, a special lottery result that produces an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", "probability change", "time reduction hit", etc.) A lottery, a time (variation time (for example, 5 to 360 seconds)) that suggests the result of the special lottery to the player is determined, and the peripheral control is performed by using the results as a determination result notification command and a variation pattern command. The peripheral control MPU is output to the substrate, and based on these commands, the peripheral control MPU performs a variation effect using the central liquid crystal display device 1500 and the movable accessory.

In the variation effect of this example, after executing the operation request effect of pressing the upper plate effect button 257, the player presses the upper plate effect button 257 in response to the operation request effect, and accordingly, the operation is performed. By moving the movable accessory in various modes, the player feels as if he/she is participating in the game, which enhances the interest in the game (hereinafter referred to as participation type movable accessory production).

In addition, in the participation type movable accessory production of this example, the back-up movable production unit 3100 will be described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the front-up movable production unit 2560, the front-down movable production unit 2570, and the back Perform the participation type movable accessory production by appropriately using the lower front movable production unit 3200, the back right movable production unit 3300, the back left movable production unit 3400, the lower back movable production unit 3500, the rear four corners movable production unit 3600 and the like. You can

Next, the participation type movable accessory production will be described with reference to FIGS.
The movable pattern of the back-side movable effect unit 3100 in the participatory movable accessory production includes an immediate movable pattern, a movable pattern after 1 second, and a movable pattern after 2 seconds, which will be described later. FIG. 192 is a time chart when the immediate movable pattern is selected from the movable patterns of the back movable art production unit 3100, and FIG. 192 shows the movable pattern of the back movable art production unit 3100 in the participation type movable accessory production. FIG. 193 is a time chart in the case where a movable pattern after 1 second is selected, which will be described later. FIG. 193 shows that a movable pattern after 2 seconds is selected from the movable patterns of the back side movable effect unit 3100 in the participation type movable accessory production. It is a time chart of a case. In addition, FIG. 194 is a movable timing table showing a pattern of timing at which the back-side movable effect unit 3100 moves.
In the time chart of FIG. 191, respective timings of (A) operation valid period, (B) operation request effect, (C) upper plate effect button operation detection, and (D) immediate movable pattern are shown. 193, the respective timings of (A) operation effective period, (B) operation request effect, (C) upper plate effect button operation detection, and (E) movable pattern after 1 second are shown in FIG. 193. In the time chart of (3), the respective timings of (A) operation valid period, (B) operation request effect, (C) upper plate effect button operation detection, and (F) movable pattern after 2 seconds are shown.

In the case of the participation type movable accessory effect, the variable effect is started, and as shown in (A), the time point when the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 becomes valid and the time point when it becomes invalid is appropriately set in advance, and during that time. , (B), by using the notification means such as the central liquid crystal display device 1500 and various speakers, an effect (operation request effect) for requesting the player to operate the upper plate effect button 257 is performed. Thus, it is configured to notify that the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is valid. Then, in response to the operation request effect, as shown in (C), when the player presses down the upper plate effect button 257, the back-up movable effect unit 3100 is movably controlled. After pressing the upper plate effect button 257, the operation valid period of (A) and the operation request effect of (B) are finished, and the back side movable effect unit 3100 is movable. An immediate movable pattern in which the upper and lower movable effect units 3100 are immediately controlled to move by pressing the upper plate effect button 257 as shown in (D), and the upper plate effect button 257 as shown in (E) is pressed. After 1 second, the movement control of the back side movable effect unit 3100 is performed, and the movement pattern after 1 second, as shown in (F), the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed and the back side movable effect unit 3100 moves 2 seconds later. There is a movable pattern etc. 2 seconds after the movable control is performed.

When the immediate movable pattern is selected, as shown in FIG. 191, when the operation effective period of (A) and the operation request effect of (B) are in the on state, the player presses the upper plate effect button 257. When the pressing operation is performed, the operation valid period and the operation request effect are turned off when the operation is detected, and then the back-side movable effect unit 3100 is movably controlled.
Further, when the movable pattern after 1 second is selected, as shown in FIG. 192, when the operation valid period of (A) and the operation request effect of (B) are in the on state, the upper plate is set by the player. When the effect button 257 is pressed, the operation valid period and the operation request effect are turned off when the operation is detected, and one second after the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 is detected, the back-side movable effect unit 3100 is movably controlled.
Further, when the movable pattern after 2 seconds is selected, as shown in FIG. 193, when the operation valid period of (A) and the operation request effect of (B) are in the on state, the upper plate is set by the player. When the production button 257 is pressed, the operation valid period and the operation request production are turned off when the operation is detected, and two seconds after the operation of the plate production button 257 is detected, the back-side movable production unit. 3100 is movably controlled.
As a result, the timing at which the back movable production unit 3100 moves after the upper plate production button 257 is pressed differs depending on which movable pattern is selected, so the back movable production unit 3100 moves at any timing. The feeling of excitement obtained by not knowing whether or not to control is increased, and it becomes possible to strengthen the impact in the participation type movable accessory production.

In addition, in the participation type movable accessory production, although the operation request production for requesting the player to operate the upper dish production button 257 is executed in the operation request production, the pressing operation on the upper dish production button 257 is performed. If it is not pressed during the operable period during which the operation is accepted, and if the immediate movable pattern is selected, the back-up movable effect unit 3100 is controlled to move immediately after the operation valid period ends, and the movable pattern after 1 second. If is selected, the back side movable effect unit 3100 is movably controlled 1 second after the operation valid period ends, and if the movable pattern is selected after 2 seconds, 2 seconds after the operation valid period ends. The back movable art production unit 3100 is controlled to move, but not limited to this, the back movable art production unit 3100 may be moved at an appropriate timing after the operable period ends. .. Alternatively, the back-side movable effect unit 3100 may not be moved.

Further, the peripheral control board is for timing determination for determining the timing at which the back side movable effect unit 3100 moves as a means for determining the timing at which the back side movable effect unit 3100 moves in the participation type movable accessory production. Random numbers and a movable timing table are prepared in advance, and the effect mode of the participation type movable accessory production is determined based on the timing determining random number and the movable timing table. Then, according to the special lottery result selected by the main control board, the effect pattern determined by the peripheral control MPU is movably controlled by the player's operation on the upper plate effect button 257 to move the back side movable effect unit 3100. When it is an effect, the movable timing of the back side movable effect unit 3100 is determined from the timing determination random number extracted by the timing determination random number extraction means and the movable timing table after the effect is determined. Is.

Next, the random number for timing determination will be described using FIG. 194. The timing determining random numbers in this example are set so as to determine which participation type movable accessory effect is to be executed. For example, 100 types of variable random numbers are set as the determination values (0 to 99) indicating that one of the participation type movable accessory effects is to be executed, and 60 types of variable random numbers among the variable random numbers are the upper plate effect buttons 257. Is set as a determination value indicating that the immediate movable pattern in which the movable control of the back-side movable effect unit 3100 is performed at an instant timing is performed after the pressing operation on (0 to 59), and 25 kinds of variable random numbers are used for the plate effect. After the pressing operation on the button 257, it is set as a determination value indicating that the movable pattern of the back movable operation unit 3100 is performed 1 second later and the movable pattern is executed 1 second later (60 to 84), and 15 types of The variable random number is set as a determination value indicating that a movable pattern is executed 2 seconds after the movable control of the back side movable effect unit 3100 is performed 2 seconds after the pressing operation on the upper plate effect button 257 ( 85-99).

Also, in the participation type movable accessory production, as the timing for determining the movable timing of the back side movable production unit 3100 after the upper plate production button 257 is pressed, after the production is determined by the peripheral control MPU. However, for example, the production pattern determined by the peripheral control MPU according to the special lottery result drawn by the main control board is operated by the player with respect to the upper plate production button 257, and the back movable production unit 3100. If the effect is controlled to be movable, the effect is determined, and in response to the operation request effect instructing the player to press the upper plate effect button 257 on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 or the like, the game is answered. When the person presses down the upper plate production button 257, the timing determination random number extraction means may extract the timing determination random number to determine the movable timing of the back side movable production unit 3100.

Further, in the change timing pattern of the notice pending image, in this example, the probability of selecting the immediate change pattern is 50%, the probability of selecting the change pattern after 1 second is 30%, and the probability of selecting the change pattern after 2 seconds. Is 20%, but is not limited to this, and the probability that each movable pattern is selected may be changed as appropriate.

[Variation of participation type movable accessory production]
Further, as a variation of the participation type movable accessory effect, the timing at which the back side movable effect unit 3100 is movably controlled after the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed is until the actual movability control is seen. The player does not know, and the variation display in the lottery result in which the participation type movable accessory effect is selected is started, and when the upper plate effect button is pressed during the operation valid period, it is movable behind the player. After suggesting that the rendering unit 3100 does not move, the back side movable rendering unit 3100 may be movably controlled with a time lag. This will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 195 shows a flow of an effect in which a moving pattern notice is given when the movable accessory effect is selected after 1 second in the participation type movable accessory effect, and (A) is a participation type movable accessory effect. It shows a state in which a special lottery result selected earlier is suggested, (B) shows a state in which a participatory movable accessory production is being performed, and (C) is an operation request production. Is performed, (D) indicates a state of less than 1 second after the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed, and (E) indicates 1 after the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed. This shows a state in which seconds have passed and the back-up movable effect unit 3100 is exposed in front of the central liquid crystal display device 1500.

For example, when the movable pattern is selected after 1 second, the special lottery result in which the participation-type movable accessory effect is selected is displayed as a suggestion of the special lottery result until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. The start is suspended, and the central liquid crystal display device 1500 displays the suspended display. Here, the normal hold display is H1, and the hold display of the participation type movable accessory effect is H2.
The suggestion of the special lottery result of H2 is started, an image simulating the upper plate effect button 257 is displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and an image “PUSH!! A performance is performed. When the upper plate effect button 257 is operated according to the operation request effect, a message image of "sorry!!" is displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. By seeing this, the player loses hope that the back side movable effect unit 3100 can move, and is disappointed at one point, but one second after the operation for the upper plate effect button 257, the back side movable effect unit 3100 is disappointed. The unit 3100 rotates and appears so as to cover the central liquid crystal display device 1500.

As described above, after pressing the upper plate production button 257, after temporarily suggesting to the player that the back movable production unit 3100 does not move, the back movable production unit 3100 is movably controlled with a time lag. Therefore, although it is discouraged at once, it is possible to improve the interest again, it can excite the game, and the interest for the game can be improved.

Further, during the game, the movable pattern of the back-side movable effect unit 3100 in the last participation-type movable accessory production is the immediate movement pattern, and the back-side movement of the participation-type movable accessory production subsequently selected by lottery. When the movable pattern of the effect unit 3100 is also the immediate movable pattern, the player cannot notice that there are a plurality of movable patterns of the back-side movable effect unit 3100, and the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed. Since the movable pattern after pressing is thought to be one pattern, there is a risk that the movement of the back side movable effect unit 3100 will not have an impact and the interest in the game may be reduced. A movable pattern different from the movable pattern in the participation type movable accessory production performed in FIG.

Further, for example, when the immediate movable pattern is selected as the movable pattern in the participation type movable accessory production performed last, the movable pattern selected next is either the movable pattern after 1 second or the movable pattern after 2 seconds. Is selected, and if the movable pattern after 1 second has been selected, either the immediate movable pattern or the movable pattern after 2 seconds is selected as the movable pattern to be selected next. Therefore, when the movable pattern after 2 seconds has been selected, the immediate movable pattern or the movable pattern after 1 second is selected as the movable pattern to be selected next. As a result, a movable pattern different from the previously selected movable pattern is selected, so that it is possible to prevent the user from continuously seeing the same movable pattern, and suppress a decrease in interest in the game. it can.

Also, the back-side movable effect unit 3100 may be movably controlled after performing a gaze effect. For example, when the movable pattern after 2 seconds is selected, the back-side movable effect unit 3100 is temporarily vibrated immediately after pressing the upper plate effect button 257 according to the operation request effect. The player looks at the back movable artistic production unit 3100 that is not exposed in front of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 and, while thinking that the back upper movable artistic production unit 3100 is movable, illusions that it is a so-called gasse production, and once Although discouraged, since the back side movable effect unit 3100 moves 2 seconds after the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed, the interest can be improved again and the excitement for the game can be enhanced.

If, for example, a movable pattern after 2 seconds has been selected as one pattern of the above-mentioned gaze effect, the back movable effect unit 3100 is temporarily vibrated immediately after pressing the upper plate effect button 257 according to the operation request effect. Alternatively, the lower right door effect unit 270 may be movably controlled. By temporarily vibrating the back side movable effect unit 3100, the player thinks that the back side movable effect unit 3100 can move, but two seconds after pressing the upper plate effect button 257, the door lower right effect unit 270 is movably controlled. As a result, the movable accessory that is different from the player's expectation is movably controlled, so that the player can be surprised and the interest in the participation type movable accessory production can be enhanced.

In the above description of this example, in the participation type movable accessory production, if the upper plate production button 257 is pressed during the operation valid period, the back-side movable production unit 3100 can be moved according to the selected movable pattern. Although it was controlled, it is not necessarily controlled to move. For example, if the production game executed as the participation type movable accessory production succeeds, the back side movable production unit 3100 is controlled to move, and conversely fails. For example, the back movable production unit 3100 may not be controlled to move. This will be described below with reference to FIGS.

FIG. 196 is a diagram showing a time chart when the effect game is successful, and FIG. 197 is a diagram showing a time chart when the effect game is unsuccessful.

For example, as the participation type movable accessory effect, when the peripheral control board executes a successful effect game when the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), as shown in FIG. When the operation on the upper plate production button 257 by the player is detected 10 times as shown in (C) when the operation valid period of (A) and the operation request production of (B) are in the on state, the production game Is completed, the operation valid period of (A) and the operation request effect of (B) are finished, and the back movable operation unit 3100 moves as shown in (D).
Further, as shown in FIG. 197, when the operation on the upper plate production button 257 is less than 10 times during the operation valid period of (A) and the operation request production of (B) is in the on state, The back side movable effect unit 3100 is not movable.

Further, in the participation type movable accessory production, in this example, the probability of selecting the immediate movable pattern is 60%, the probability of selecting the movable pattern after 1 second is 25%, and the probability of selecting the movable pattern after 2 seconds. Although it is 15%, it is not limited to this, and the probability that each movable pattern is selected may be appropriately changed.

Further, in this example, as the effect that the player can participate in up to this point, the movable accessory (here, the back-side movable effect unit 3100) is moved after the operation means (here, the upper plate effect button 257) is operated by the player. By preparing multiple types of controlled timing, the timing at which the movable accessory related to pressing the operation means is controlled to move is not constant, and the excitement that can be obtained by not knowing when the movable control is performed increases. However, although the participation type movable accessory production that can enhance the impact in the production has been described, not only the production using the movable accessory, but also the production mode after the player operates the operation means. As long as a plurality of types of switching timings are prepared, in addition to the player participation type effect using the central liquid crystal display device 1500 together, it is the player participation type effect that is performed only by the central liquid crystal display device 1500. May be.

In addition, in this example, an example in which the operation means such as the upper plate effect button 257 that can be pressed is used for the participation type movable accessory effect, the operation means is limited to the upper plate effect button 257. Instead, a touch panel 246 that can be touched, a stick-type operation means that allows the player to perform tilting operation, an operation means such as a rotation-type selector that allows the player to perform rotation operation, etc. are appropriately used. You may do it.

[Second embodiment of movable timing of movable accessory]
In the participation type movable accessory production in this embodiment, the lottery ratio of the movable pattern in the back side movable production unit 3100 is changed according to the number of rounds when the advantageous game state (eg, big hit) is drawn by the main control board. I am trying. This will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 198 is a movable timing table showing a pattern of timing at which the back-side movable effect unit 3100 moves for each round number when the jackpot is selected by lottery. (A) is a movable timing table selected when a 15-round jackpot is drawn, (b) is a movable timing table selected when an 8-round jackpot is drawn, and (c) is 2 It is a movable timing table selected when the round jackpot is drawn.

When the 15-round big hit is selected by the main control board, as shown in FIG. 198(a), 80 kinds of fluctuation random numbers among the fluctuation random numbers are displayed on the back at the timing immediately after the operation of pressing the upper plate production button 257. It is set as a determination value indicating that an immediate movable pattern in which movable control of movable control unit 3100 is performed is executed (0 to 79), and 10 types of random numbers are changed, one second after pressing operation on upper plate control button 257. Is set as a determination value indicating that the movable pattern is executed one second after the movement control of the back side movable effect unit 3100 is performed at the timing (80 to 89), and 10 types of fluctuation random numbers for the upper plate effect button 257. After the pressing operation, it is set as a determination value indicating that the movable pattern of the back-side movable effect unit 3100 is executed at a timing of 2 seconds later and the movable pattern is performed 2 seconds later (90 to 99).

When the eight round jackpot is selected by the main control board, as shown in FIG. 198(b), 10 kinds of fluctuation random numbers among the fluctuation random numbers are displayed on the back at an immediate timing after the operation of pressing the upper plate production button 257. It is set as a determination value (0 to 9) indicating that an immediate movable pattern in which the movable effect unit 3100 is controlled to move is executed (0 to 9), and 80 kinds of random numbers are changed, one second after the pressing operation on the upper plate effect button 257. Is set as a determination value indicating that the movable pattern is to be executed 1 second after the movable control of the back-side movable effect unit 3100 is performed at the timing (10 to 89), and 10 types of variable random numbers for the upper plate effect button 257. After the pressing operation, it is set as a determination value indicating that the movable pattern of the back-side movable effect unit 3100 is executed at a timing of 2 seconds later and the movable pattern is performed 2 seconds later (90 to 99).

When the two-round jackpot is selected by the main control board, as shown in FIG. 198(c), 10 kinds of fluctuation random numbers are changed to the back at an immediate timing after the operation of pressing the upper plate production button 257. It is set as a determination value indicating that an immediate movable pattern in which movable control of the movable effect unit 3100 is performed is executed (0 to 9), and 10 kinds of random numbers are changed, one second after the pressing operation on the upper plate effect button 257. Is set as a determination value indicating that the movable pattern is to be executed 1 second after the movement control of the back side movable effect unit 3100 is performed at the timing (10 to 19), and 80 kinds of fluctuation random numbers for the upper plate effect button 257. After the pressing operation, it is set as a determination value indicating that the movable pattern of the back-side movable effect unit 3100 is performed at a timing of 2 seconds later and a movable pattern is performed after 2 seconds (20 to 99).

According to the configuration of the present embodiment described above, the number of rounds related to the jackpot can be predicted to some extent by the movable pattern of the back-side movable effect unit 3100 after pressing the upper plate effect button 257. For example, when the back-side movable effect unit 3100 is moved immediately after pressing the upper plate effect button 257, the player remembers that the 15 round jackpot is likely to come, and also presses the upper plate effect button 257. If the back-side movable effect unit 3100 is immediately moved after 2 seconds, the player remembers that the two-round jackpot is likely to arrive. As a result, the movable pattern of the back-and-front movable effect unit 3100 can make the player happy and unhappy, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to the preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements are made as shown below without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above-described embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the invention is not limited to this and is applied to a pachi-slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused. However, even in this case, the same effect as the above can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 257 Upper plate effect button 1000 Front component member 1100 Game panel 1500 Central liquid crystal display device 2002 First starting port 2004 Second starting port 3000 Back unit 3010 Back side Box 3010a Opening 3100 Back movable production unit 3101 Unit base 3103 Back driving motor (driving motor)
3104 Drive gear 3105 1st driven gear 3106 2nd driven gear 3107 1st transmission member 3107a 1st transmission gear 3107b 1st transmission pin 3107c 1st locking protrusion 3107d 1st notch 3108 2nd transmission member 3108a 2nd transmission gear 3108b 2nd transmission pin 3108c 2nd locking protrusion 3108d 2nd notch 3115 Rack member 3115a Rack gear (decorative rack gear)
3116 1st movable base 3117 1st transmitted member 3117a 1st board|substrate part 3117b 1st action pin 3117c 1st transmitted main body part 3117d 1st transmission slit 3117e 1st locking recessed part 3119 2nd movable base 3120 Decorative body rotation gear 3122 Second transmission member 3122a Second substrate portion 3122b Second transmission main body portion 3122c Second transmission slit 3122d Second lock recess 3122e First transmission guide portion 3123 Rotation link member 3123a Link main body portion 3123b First transmission guide portion 3123d Second Transmission guide portion 3124 Second movable base drive member 3124a Second action pin 3124b Drive body portion 3124c Second transmitted guide portion 3125 Shaft member 3150 Back decorative unit (decorative body)
3151 Ornament base 3152 Back decoration (ornament)

Claims (2)

A gaming machine comprising an outer frame and a main body frame that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, wherein a game is played using a game ball ,
The outer frame is
A lower member that is provided at a lower portion and includes a curtain plate on which the main body frame is placed in a state where the main body frame is closed with respect to an outer frame;
A hinge member that is provided on the left side of the outer frame and that supports the main body frame in an openable and closable manner,
Has at least
On the side on which the hinge member is provided, a horizontally extending standing wall portion is provided at a position retracted rearward from the front end of the outer frame, and is formed in front of the standing wall portion to the rear surface side of the curtain plate. Equipped with a game ball discharge area for discharging balls,
The upper end of the standing wall portion is higher than the upper end of a portion of the portion of the curtain plate on which the main body frame is placed that is not present at a position where the standing wall portion is retracted rearward,
The game ball discharge area is provided at a position where the whole is retracted rearward from the front end of the outer frame,
On the side of the game ball discharge area, a flat plate portion capable of receiving a game ball when the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame is provided,
Is guidably configuration to said game ball discharge region game balls that are received in said plate along said vertical wall,
In a state in which the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame, the standing wall portion is fixedly provided in a form of rising upward from the rear surface of the lower end of the main body frame .
When the main body frame is closed, the front wall surface of the standing wall portion has a function of hindering straight movement of foreign matter inserted from the front of the hinge member,
The game ball discharge area is located at least behind the lower end rear surface of the main body frame so that the lower surface of the main body frame does not cover all of the game ball discharge area when the main body frame is closed. A gaming machine characterized by being present. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the standing wall portion has a bent portion that bends in the front-rear direction in the middle of the horizontal direction.